EZEKIEL

 

and YHWH’s

 

 Judgment

 

 

for the

 

Good News

 

PEOPLE

 

 

 

VOLUME XXXI

 

The Age End

 

 

EZEKIEL and YHWH’s

 

 

Judgment for the

 

 

 Good News People

 

 

 

 

Volume XXXI--The Age End

 

 

 

 

 

by

 

an unworthy servant

 

 

 

 

 

 

And you shall know the truth,

 

and the truth will make you free.

 

(John 8:32)

 

 

Common Law Copyright, 2003 & 2005 CE, an unworthy servant, Calder, Idaho.  The author claims his Right of exclusive ownership and control of this publication, the fruit of his labor, as a matter of Intellectual Property protected by the Laws of YHWH and as guaranteed by the US Constitution for the United States.  Permission is granted to quote provided appropriate credit is cited together with the Publisher’s web site name and postal mailing address––WWW.age-end.com PO Box 473, Calder, ID 83808, USA. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contents

 

 

 

Volume XXXI--The Age End 

 

 

CHAPTER or APPENDIX                                                        PAGE

 

 

      -                  Cover Page                                                                                                         1

 

      -                  Title Page                                                                                                             2

 

      -                  Contents                                                                                                              3

 

      -                  Publisher’s Preface                                                                                           5

 

 

Part SSSS--Dates 

 

      490             Dating the Age End I                                                                                         6

 

      491             Dating the Age End II                                                                                      20

 

      492             Yechezkel’s 30th Year I                                                                                  26

 

      493             Yechezkel’s 30th Year II                                                                                 41

 

      494             The 390-Day Test                                                                                             54

 

 

Part TTTT--Prophetic Signs

 

      495             Prophetic Overview                                                                                          67

 

      496             Signs in the Heavens I                                                                                    78

 

      497             Signs in the Heavens II                                                                                   83

 

      498             Cataclysms in Nature I                                                                                    94

 

      499             Cataclysms in Nature II                                                                                 101

 

 

Part UUUU--Breaking Yisrael’s Pride 

 

      500             End of the Dollar I                                                                                          112

 

      501             End of the Dollar II                                                                                         121

 

 

Part VVVV--Tyranny Now? 

 

 

      502             The Zombie Society                                                                                       130

 

      503             Government Plans for Tyranny                                                                   139

 

 

 

Part WWWW--Prophetic Deception 

 

      504             Coming Deception                                                                                         149

 

      505             The Greatest Future Deception of All                                                         160

SHEERIT YISRAEL

PO Box 473

Calder, Idaho 83808, USA

 

 

Publisher’s Preface

 

Greetings!  The following presentation is volume thirty-one of a 36-volume production of some 6,000 pages on “Ezekiel and YHWH’s Judgment for the Good News People,” all of which is on the Internet at the www.age-end.com web site. 

 

This overall effort provides an interpretation of the Good News message in the New Testament, its linkage to the book of Ezekiel, and an application of both to the age-end prophecies relating to certain nations and peoples now out in the world.  In order for this single volume to be understood and comprehended, it is imperative that the study be read from its beginning--from page one of volume one. 

 

Anyone trying to read this volume or the study’s 6,000 pages at any mid-point will end up in a state of confusion without having read and digested the preceding material.  It is crucially important that this work be read in sequence from its beginning--otherwise, the reader will almost certainly end up missing the essence of the message! 

 

The effort was originally set on a Macintosh computer with Microsoft Word 6.0.1.  It was set in Helvetica, 12-point type (18 pt on chapter headings); single line spacings; and margins:  left 1.2”, right 0.8”, top 0.7”, bottom 0.8” and footer 0.6” (for page numbers). 

 

For further information on obtaining this study in 18 computer floppy disks (IBM-formatted, high density, 2HD, 1.44 MB, 3 1/2 inches); in a single CD-Rom; or in hard copies (when the Internet or a compatible computer is not available); please write the publisher at the above address and send a stamped, self-addressed, long (legal-size), return envelope. 

 

With a CD-Rom or computer floppy disks, the study is readable on Macintosh (systems 5.0 and later) or IBM/compatible (with Microsoft Word-Windows) personal computers.  May The Great CREATOR and SOVEREIGN OF THE UNIVERSE bless you as you study His word to learn His will and to obey Him.  Shalom (peace) to you and yours! 

 

an unworthy servant, Hanukkah 2003 CE

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 490--Dating the Age End I

 

 

Peter J. Peters on Hastening the Day 

 

On the idea of dating the age end, the volume 4, 2002, “Scriptures for America” (p. 10) noted that Christian Identity leader Peter J. Peters has come out with the theory that “we can and are to hasten the day” of the coming of The MESSIAH, per II Peter 3:11-12.  Admittedly, the referred text does seem to suggest this possibility.  But that belief logically must be a wrong interpretation. 

 

 

Source 

 

As Dr David Stern indicates in his “Jewish New Testament Commentary” (p. 764-765), the concept of hastening the Day of YHWH comes from the Talmud (this fact would really tear the Jew hating Peters up if he correctly understood it). 

 

Per Stern, the Talmudic idea is to work to hasten the coming of this time.  And that seems to be precisely what Kefa is saying.  But the explanation is more complex because the idea is not that the elect can make the day of YHWH come faster, per se. 

 

The text in question (II Pet 3:11-12) compares with the Talmud (Sanhedrin 98a), a remark from Yeshayahu (Isa 60:22) and other NT comments (Matt 21:2-7).  Stern then quotes Yechiel Lichtenstein who addressed the problem. 

 

Lichtenstein quoted the Talmud:  “Rabbi Y’hoshua ben L’vi pointed out a contradiction-- ‘hasten it’ implies ‘before,’ not ‘in its time.’  Rabbi Y’hoshua’s solution:  God means, ‘If they deserve him, I will hasten it; but if they do not deserve him, his coming will be in its time.’”

 

Thus, the Talmudic view might be that YHWH’s people are to work hard in righteousness and obedience so that it will help persuade YHWH to come soon.  In Isaiah 60:22, the idea seems to be that YHWH will hasten the day “in its time.”  In other words, He won’t allow any delays to take place.  He will be sure that the coming day does come on time (in its time). 

 

 

Monte Judah 

 

In the Feb 2003 “Yavoh He is Coming” periodical (p. 9-10), Messianic Jew Monte Judah addressed the question of hastening the day in the context of Jewish thought.  Judah said that in Judaism, there is a belief that The MESSIAH has a definite plan and time to bring in the Messianic era (in the vein of the coming millennial kingdom). 

 

Yet, Jews believe that they can hasten the day.  Judah says that by hastening the day, religious Jews mean that they can prepare and help accelerate The MESSIAH’s coming. 

 

In terms of the mechanics of how this thing works out, Judah says that the true faithful ones believe that if they could get every Jew to keep the Sabbath and to say the Shema (Hear O’Israel, YHWH our ELOHIM is One) together, then The MESSIAH could not resist coming. 

 

They predicate this belief on the premise that the keeping of the Sabbath and the saying of the Shema would be an act of teshuvah (repentance and the submission to The MOST HIGH).  They also include in this stipulation the need to study the Torah, which is also an act to produce tzedakah (righteousness). 

 

This Jewish belief hangs upon the words of Isaiah 56:1 which quotes YHWH as saying for His followers to preserve justice and do righteousness (tzedakah) because His SALVATION is about to come and His righteousness (tzedakah) is to be revealed. 

 

Monte Judah said that he personally did not believe that we can do anything to hasten or to slow down the coming of The MESSIAH.  But he did suggest that the anticipated coming of The MESSIAH should be translated into preserving justice and doing righteousness. 

 

 

The Passover Cups 

 

In another very important revelation on truth, Monte Judah commented upon the Passover Seder and the four cups of wine which traditional and observant Jews drink at Passover.  These four are, per Judah, “Sanctification, Instruction, Redemption, and Praise.” 

 

After the cup of Redemption, there is another cup and one just prior to Praise.  It is the cup of Eliyahu.  Knowing full well and understanding Malachi 4:4-6 (on predicting the coming of Eliyahu the Prophet before the coming and terrible day of YHWH), religious Jews set this cup out for Eliyahu during the Passover Seder. 

 

But actually, they add one little twist to it which makes the whole event most extraordinary and profound.  Traditionally, this cup for Eliyahu is filled to the brim (and almost overflowing).  Observant Jews do this in order to hasten the coming of The MESSIAH. 

 

As Judah suggests, this act of filling Elijah’s cup to the brim is an indirect way of hastening The MESSIAH’s coming--by getting Elijah to come quickly. 

 

The need to remember the teachings of the Torah in combination with the spirit of Eliyahu acts to create one of the best ways for believers to prepare for The MESSIAH’s coming.  It draws, per Judah, the faithful ones back to the patriarchs--Avraham, Yitzhak and Yakov Yisrael and renews the promises of The ELOHIM given to them and their descendants. 

 

As Judah concludes, The MESSIAH is coming to save us, to dwell with us, and to drink the last cup of the beverage Praise with us. 

 

 

Therefore 

 

Surely, the best interpretation on II Peter 3:11-12 is that the election are to work hard in producing fruits of righteousness so that YHWH will hasten the day (and allow no delays) of His coming at its prescribed time.  Perhaps Dr Stern, Monte Judah and most or many religious Jews would all agree with this understanding. 

 

Assuredly, YHWH has a prescribed time for the coming of The MESSIAH.  That time cannot be altered because YHWH will hasten it and make it come to pass at precisely the right time and under the correctly stipulated circumstances. 

 

 

The Issue 

 

There is a precise time for all events to take place (Eccl 3:1-8; Matt 24:36; Gal 4:4).  The only problem is one of determining when that time is from the Word.  There is always first the dilemma that no man knows or can know the exact day and hour of the coming of YESHUA (Matt 24:36). 

 

Note that this statement does not include knowing the month or year.  So it seems that the month and year can be known.  Also, we are to watch and can know that the time is at the very door (Matt 24:33).  So while the exact day and hour cannot be known, it is possible to know “approximately” when He returns (perhaps within a day or so). 

 

 

Some Principles 

 

In the context of interpreting prophecy, there is an interesting day for a year principle (Gen 1:5-2:2; Ps 90:4; Ezek 4:5-6; Heb 4:8-9; II Pet 3:8).  Consequently, in fulfillments, a reference to the Hebrew “yom” can be a day or a year.  Since prophecy is often dual, the fulfillment can be timed as years in the ante-type case and as days in the type (or vice versa). 

 

Along with the day for a year principle, there also seems to be the use of the idea of one hour to represent some time span.  In the January-February 2002 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 53), writer William F. Dankenbring suggests that the prophetic one hour of Revelation 18:10 translates to 30 days (in that a day can be equal to a year and since there are 12 hours in a day, thus allowing 30 days to equal one prophetic hour). 

 

Next, it is important to realize that to The ELOHIM a thousand years is as a day (as outlined in a prior chapter).  It is this understanding which has paved the way to appreciate a 6,000 years (or six days) grant of time to Adam, to be followed by a 1,000-year millennium (or Seventh day Sabbath rest) allocated to the government of EL (as described at length elsewhere herein). 

 

Just as Jewish literature and writers have anticipated this millennial rest for vast ages, it is also fascinating that Rabbinical writings suggest that the preceding 6,000 years of salvation history mirrors the six days of creation week. 

 

Specifically, per Finnish writer Risto Santana, the belief is that the first 2,000 years are years of desolation (from Adam to Avraham--ed); the next 2,000 years are years of the Torah (from Avraham to The MESSIAH--ed); and the third 2,000 years are the years of The MESSIAH which have turned out as they have because of our sins (from YESHUA to the age end--ed). 

 

 

Five Methods 

 

It appears that The MOST HIGH has chosen five methods of dating all of the major events in the age end--almost always by their exact years and often by the precise days and months within a given year.  From this writer’s perspective, The EVERLIVING ONE apparently has used these five different courses to communicate important dates.

 

First, many events are precisely dated by the exact day, month and/or year of their occurrence (this method will be further described below and in Appendix E hereafter).  Second, there are great prophetic dates--usually spanning long years of time which date the end--usually by year (these will be shortly assessed in this chapter). 

 

Third, there are enormous implications of all festivals, Sabbaths and appointed times in the Book.  The case of the Seventh day Sabbath of 1,000 years is an illustration of one of these (as discussed elsewhere herein).  In general, these appointed times will be addressed in future chapters and in Appendix E. 

 

A fourth dating method surfaces in the context that many Scriptural books are extremely chronological in arrangement.  This reality is invaluable once almost any date is firmly established in a given book.  It allows the student of truth to get the overall dating scheme of the book (to be discussed below and in Appendix E). 

 

There is a fifth method--although it is not as precise as is the above four opportunities.  This fifth one requires a general overview of the Word and its linkage to man conceived practices, ideas and events on going in the secular society.  Some of these will be addressed below in this chapter and in the later Appendix E. 

 

 

Some Underlying Factors Affecting Dates 

 

“The King James Version” (KJV) of the Scriptures (1604-1611/1612) has been of profound importance to the English speaking peoples of the world, despite its few translation errors and problems and obvious limitations vis-à-vis the Hebrew originals.  It is a fairly literal translation and thus good in comparison with most others. 

 

Too, the English settlement at Jamestown (1607), the abandonment and re-establishment at Jamestown (1610) and the Pilgrims’ arrival at Plymouth Rock (1620) also appear to be extremely important in the scheme of things (to be later established). 

 

Early Jamestown saw hard years for the colonists (with many deaths and deprivations). 

 

The colony was technically abandoned in early June 1610 (Julian calendar) and the survivors reportedly were in the process of leaving on two ships--only to be met by the newly appointed Governor De La Warr with needed supplies and more colonists.  The entourage turned back and re-established the colony.  Therefore, 1610 could be especially important in the scheme of things. 

 

Finally, the fall of Jerusalem, both to the Babylonians (c554 BCE) and to the Romans (70 CE), was a sign to the House of Yisrael nations (Ezek 4:3; 12:6; 16:3--per the “Amplified Translation”).  In other words, what fell upon the Jews and Jerusalem will fall upon the House of Yisrael nations in the age end.  To understand it, one must read and study the books of Lamentations and Ezekiel (which detail the event/chronology). 

 

After a mark-off of some 390-395 years (390 years of accountable sin), real trouble probably starts on the House of Yisrael with a temporary embargo around the 10th day of the 10th month of one year.  The next year, the trouble intensifies as it turns into a harsh siege of 390 days, which finally culminates with famine, nuclear war, invasion, the end of the House of Yisrael nationally and captivity for the surviving people. 

 

Hence, logically, the 390-395 years to Yisrael’s fall should approximately parallel the fall of the House of Yehudah, after the division of the kingdom (the year following the 390 years’ test on Yisrael in the Scriptures and the three years or so of II Chronicles 11:17 and 12:2, as will be discussed in later presentations herein).  This 390 years’ test will possibly end by Yechezkel’s 32d-33d years. 

 

The final 390 days of punishment on Yosef-Yisrael for 390 years of accountable sin (Ezek 4:5) may start in Yechezkel’s 32d year (to end in Yechezkel’s 33d year).

 

Thus, the 390 years of sin may possibly parallel an approximate 390-year witness of the KJV (which started in 1611/1612, possibly the official publication and/or distribution date) or some other event and date from 1607-1620 (thus, a 390-395 years count could conclude in 2001-2014). 

 

 

The Exact Given Dates 

 

As just noted in the above comments, the Word itself outlines many dates for events by exact days and months or moons.  One sees this in Ezra, Nehemiah, Jeremiah, Ezekiel, Haggai, Zechariah, I and II Maccabees, etc.  Those dates are “all” significant.  YHWH was not just filling up space when He recorded those dates.  The problem is only one of interpretation. 

 

While I and II Maccabees are not in the Jewish or Protestant Christian canons, they are very important books prophetically, as was discussed in a prior chapter on understanding.  It is significant to note that I and II Maccabees are dated books, as is true with Yechezkel, Daniel and some of the other OT prophets. 

 

In particular, the book of Yechezkel has a “30th year” date which must be linked with a “Darius Hystaspes Artaxerxes” date (Darius’ first year occurred around a 30th year of a Jubilee cycle, as was established in the preceding chapters).  But his years did not seem to run on a spring to spring reckoning (as described in a prior chapter)--thus causing complications in trying to reconcile Darius 1 or 2 to Yechezkel’s 30th year. 

 

Interestingly, I Maccabees (1:54) has a Seleucid-Grecian date of 145 for the set-up of the abomination of desolation in the Second Temple (“The New English Bible” interprets this as 167 BCE; but based on the Sabbath year involved at I Maccabees 6:53-59, the date would have had to have been 168 BCE).  Anyway, it is possible to relate this date to both Yechezkel and the years assigned to Darius. 

 

When this linkage between Yechezkel, Darius and I and II Maccabees is correctly done, all kinds of things come together marvelously.  Yechezkel’s 30th year and Darius’ 2nd year will be described and established in presentations below and in the following chapters. 

 

 

Some of the Great Prophetic Dates 

 

As noted above, the great prophetic dates have significance when properly understood.  Numbers like 6 (the number of man), 7, 40, 49, 360, 390, 400, 430, 1150, 1260, 1290, 1335, 2300, 2520 (seven times one time of 360), etc mean something.  By using the chronology outlined in a former chapter and these prophetic numbers, some fantastic revelations develop in terms of time. 

 

For instance, Babylon, under Belshazzar, fell to Darius (the Mede) and the Medes and Persians sometime around 500 BCE (possibly as early as 503 BCE)--after seeing mene, mene, tekel, upharsin (Dan 5:25).  This reference of doom on Babylon interestingly adds up to 2,520 gerahs. 

 

Each shekel (tekel) is twenty gerahs (Ex 30:13; Num 3:47).  One thousand gerahs equal a mene and 500 gerahs equal an upharsin or peres (“The United States and British Empire Foretold in the Bible,” p. 74).   Thus, the sum total of gerahs in mene, mene, tekel, upharsin is 2,520. 

 

From 503-491 BCE to 2018-2030 CE, there are 2,520 years which can be relevant for several reasons.  For example, the years 2025-2030 CE may be significant in terms of Yehoyakhin’s 25th year, which will be addressed and commented upon in subsequent presentations.  Even 2018 could have some relevance, which is presently unclear. 

 

Also, after YESHUA comes, the world does not immediately accept Him and His rule.  As noted earlier, some years may be needed to bring the nations (like Egypt) into strict obedience with His government and law from Jerusalem and to get rid of the Babylonian sun worship practices--perhaps in 2018-2030.  Maybe the years 2018-2030 CE will see the final end of the Babylonian sun worship system.   

 

Yet, the Egyptian problem lasts 40 years (as discussed earlier).  The 40 years punishment on Egypt (Ezek 29:1, 9-16; Zech 14:17-19) apparently may end by 2045 or soon thereafter (the start of the 1,000 years), thus suggesting that it could start as early as 2005. 

 

From the fall of Jerusalem by the Babylonians (c554 BCE) to the conquest of Jerusalem by the Jews in the Six Day war (1967), 2,520 years passed.  The 40 years test on the Jews/Yehudah in Jerusalem may have started in 1967 (to end in 2007). 

 

Another possible starting date for this 40 years is 1973, which dated the last Jewish-Arab war (fulfilling the prophetic aspects of the earlier fall of Yehudah, as described in a prior chapter).  As will be established later, this 40-year trial on Jerusalem should end in 2013, by progressive counting, from 1973. 

 

 

More 

 

The Egyptian invasion of Yehudah by Shishak occurred in Rechavam’s fifth year after the division of the kingdom (I Kg 14:25-26).  Probably, Rechavam’s fourth year saw the termination of the three or four year grace period that YHWH allowed Yehudah (II Chron 11:17; 12:2). 

 

Yehudah’s accountable sin perhaps started that year and lasted some 390 years until the kingdom ended (totaling about 394 years or possibly 395 years from the actual division of the kingdom which likely occurred in Shlomo’s last year). 

 

From Shishak’s invasion and conquest of Yehudah (c943 BCE) to c1998, some 2,940 years or 60 Jubilees passed. 

 

From James I and his unification of the divided kingdom and his decision to authorize the KJV at the Hampton Court Conference (1604) to 2004, there are 400 years.  From the actual start of translating work on the KJV (1607) and the start of settlement of Jamestown (1607) to 2007, another 400 years occurs.  From De La Warr’s arrival at Jamestown and the revival of the colony until 2010, another 400 years pass. 

 

From Yisrael’s entrance into the promise land (c1424 BCE) to c2007, there are 3,430 years or 70 Jubilees. 

 

The 70th Jubilee occurs in 2015-16 (paralleling the first division of the land under Yehoshua after entering the land).  Since Yisrael entered the promised land in the 41st year of the Jubilee, it suggests that Yehoshua fought a war of seven or so years with the inhabitants in Canaan. 

 

While a similar seven years’ war may not occur in the age end and the restoration work of YESHUA, there is evidence from I and II Maccabees that YESHUA will fight at least a three and one half years war with the people who attack Him and the election in Jerusalem after He returns (to be discussed in later chapters and Appendix E).  This means that the return may happen by the next Jubilee. 

 

 

The Muslim Sites

 

The rebuilding of the Temple has been mentioned in earlier chapters.  If it should develop that the Third Temple goes up where the present Dome of the Spirits sets, then there are some very relevant dates to consider. 

 

Possibly, from the set up or recognition of the site which would later become the Dome of the Spirits on the Temple Mount (c850 CE) to c2000 CE, there are 1,150 years (with 2,300 mornings and evenings) or 1/2 of 2,300 (Dan 8:11-14).  The current, actual Dome of the Spirits edifice was apparently built as late as the 16th century (“The Coming Last Days Temple,” p. 343). 

 

However, the place was possibly recognized as an Islamic religious site much earlier since it must have been known for ages as having religious importance.  In “The Coming Last Days Temple” (p. 343), Dr Randall Price notes that Arabic edifices and facilities have often preserved original place names of sites.  Thus, the modern Dome of the Spirits or Dome of the Tablets could link to an earlier conception about the site. 

 

Since the present Dome of the Rock (to the South) actually arose and was constructed in phases over the years 638 to 715 CE by the Arabs (“The Coming Last Days Temple,” p. 170-171), there is a great likelihood that the Northern area of the spirits or tablets also must have had some significance (after all, it too had a large outcropping of bedrock). 

 

It may have been cleared at an early time and even had a previous structure over it before the present dome was built in later years.  Based simply on the numbers, this site must have had some early relevance after the Dome of the Rock was completed.  To take a wild guess, this writer would opt for something about this site perhaps around the year 850 CE (again, based upon the numbers). 

 

The 850 date is approximate as it is difficult to pin it down precisely.  The next few years (after 2003) may see the clearing of the Temple site and the building of an altar and the commencement of the daily sacrifice--which would allow an elapse of 1,150 years from just after 850 CE.  A 1,150-year time factor could be pertinent in terms of Daniel 8:11-14.  This writer is not prepared to ignore it at this time. 

 

For sure, 1,290 years (which could cover the years of the Abomination of Desolation) seem to run from 715 CE (the final year for the construction of the Dome of the Rock) to 2005.  This is a very intriguing count! 

 

 

More Dates 

 

From the fall of the House of Yisrael to the Assyrians, in successive stages (from about 742-682 BCE), until the restoration of the House of Yisrael (in national and world dominating senses), in successive stages (from about 1779 to 1839 CE), there are 2,520 years. 

 

As briefly noted above, from the fall of Jerusalem (and the end of Jewish sovereignty over Jerusalem) in 554 BCE to the conquest of Jerusalem and the re-assertion of Jewish sovereignty over Jerusalem on Jun 7, 1967, there are 2,520 years. 

 

From the rise of Grecian supremacy in world affairs, the defeat of the Persian army at the Granicus River, and the imposition of the Greek culture upon civilized man in c334 BCE to 1967, there are 2,300 years. 

 

From the conquest and imposition of Jewish sovereignty over the Old City of Jerusalem, and the beginning of  Jewish religious worship on the Temple Mount on Jun 7, 1967, until about Sep 23, 1973, and the termination of Jewish religious worship on the Temple Mount, some 2,300 days pass (per “The Coming Last Days Temple” [p. 604], the last  Jewish religious worship occurred on Aug 8, 1973.  By the Yom Kippur war in Oct 1973, Jewish religious access to the Temple Mount was successfully terminated by the Arabs, in conjunction with Israeli authorities). 

 

From the Greek conquest of Palestine by Ptolomy and the resulting attempted imposition of the Greek sun worship culture and religion upon the Jews (c301 BCE) to the year 2000 CE, 2,300 mornings-evenings pass (Dan 8:11-14). 

 

From the birth of Seth (c3883 BCE) to c1998, there were 5,880 years or 120 Jubilees (Gen 6:3 allocates 120 periods/yoms/yomim--which can mean Jubilees, as discussed in a former chapter on chronology). 

 

From the end of the flood (c2356 BCE) to c2006, there are 4361 years or 89 Jubilees. 

 

From the fall of Samaria (c690 BCE) to c2006, there are 2695 years or 55 Jubilees.

 

From the birth of YESHUA (c5 BCE) to c2005, there are 2009 years or 41 Jubilees. 

 

From Nimrod’s sin and the establishment of Babel sun worship in the post flood era (c2237 BCE) to Yarovam’s formal establishment of sun worship in the House of Yisrael (c947 BCE), there was 1,290 years.  From Yarovam’s sin to Constantine’s effective marriage of church and state and the start of the ante-typical great tribulation (c314 CE), there was 1,260 years. 

 

Constantine’s sin to the end of the great tribulation in Britain saw 1,260 years pass (perhaps ending around 1574 CE, a Jubilee year).  This marked the last major arrest and persecution of Anabaptists.  It happened that year on Mar 4, 1574 (old style) or 1575 (new style--after 1752, when Britain adopted Pope Gregory’s calendar changes).  The total from Yarovam’s sin to the end of the British tribulation was 2,520 years. 

 

From the start of religious liberty and the real Protestant Reformation in Britain in 1574 CE to 2004 CE, there are 430 years.  Is it possible that the year 2004 will hold some significance in the age end?  Right now, it looks like it. 

 

In the Book, 430 years is a significant period of blessing.  The First Temple stood 430 years.  Ezra’s Temple stood 430 years to the start of Herod’s rebuilding efforts (in c20 BCE).  The time from Avraham’s test and offer of Yitzhak (c1894 BCE, per Gen 22:1-17; Acts 3:25; Gal 3:8-17) to the Exodus (c1464 BCE) was 430 years. 

 

From Yarovam’s sin and the division of Yisrael (c947 BCE) to Constantine’s de facto marriage of church and state (c314)--1,260 years passed.  From Constantine’s sin to King James I of Britain and his unification of the divided kingdom (c1604)--1,290 years occurred.  From James I to Oliver Cromwell and the receipt of real freedom of religion in Britain (c1649)--45 years passed (totaling 1,335 years from Constantine’s sin). 

 

 

And More Dates 

 

From the time when Martin Luther nailed his 95 theses on the door of the Wittenburg, Germany Catholic Church with the start of the Protestant Reformation (Oct 1517) to 2007, there are 490 years. 

 

YESHUA reaches His goal in the third day (Lu 13:32); YHWH revives Yisrael on the third day (Hos 6:1-2); YESHUA stayed with the Samaritans two days before resuming His ministry in Galilee on the third day (Jo 4:40-43); YHWH gave bread for two days (Ex 16:29; Jo 6:48, 50); Yisrael was consecrated for two days before YHWH came down on the third day (Ex 19:10-11); and the marriage supper happened on the third day (Jo 2:1). 

 

Since one day is 1,000 years to YHWH (II Pet 3:8), could it be that this third day period, just outlined, dates from the birth of YESHUA in c5 BCE or his first Jubilee Passover (at reaching his 12th year in c7 CE)?  Could the third day in this period start around 1996 to 2015? 

 

The Mar-Apr 2001 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 49) quoted Rav Chaim Richman of the Temple Institute.  He notes that the year 2000 was 1,930 years from the destruction of the Temple (in 70 CE).  Add that 1930 to the 70 years of the Babylonian exile and one comes to 2,000 years without the Temple/Daily Sacrifice.  These 2,000 years are two days.  Thus, will The ELOHIM revive us and raise us up in the third day (Hos 6:2)? 

 

A 390-day test on the American people happened from Jan 20, 1998, to Feb 13, 1999, when the people were given a chance to begin to clean up their act by cleaning up the US White House over the Clinton-Lewinsky sodomy scandal.  The people consistently chose to support lying, cheating, dishonesty, immorality, etc.  Judgment is now ready to strike. 

 

This 390 days will be described in detail in a later chapter and in the chronological outlines of Appendices D and E. 

 

 

Some More Interesting Possibilities 

 

While the above outline offers the better Scriptural evidence, there are also some other events linked to important prophetic numbers.  For example, the world’s population hit the six billion level in 1999 (Feb 5, 1999, “Spokesman-Review,” p. A3).  Is 6 billion a significant number? 

 

FDR launched his New Deal of liberalism, Socialism, humanism and outcome based education in 1933-1934.  After 66 years of this evil, the nation is ready for judgment in 1999-2000.  Is 66 a unique number? 

 

From the start of WWII (1939) to 1999, there was 60 years (10 x 6, the number of man).  From America’s entrance into that war (1941) to 2001, 60 years pass.  Is 60 significant? 

 

In duplication of the 7 years of prosperity and the 7 years of want placed upon Egypt during Yosef’s time, the US American people (from Ephraim-Yosef) have been experiencing the same process.  The seven years from 1993 to 2000 have seen incredible prosperity, security and blessings. 

 

These seven years of blessings may now be followed by seven years of gross need, want and suffering--possibly in some relationship to Yakov’s Trouble, which interestingly may have produced some preliminary signs, as early as Yechezkel’s 22d year (to be described in subsequent remarks). 

 

 

The Basic Chronology of Many Books 

 

In the fourth methodology, outlined above, the point was made that many books in the Scriptures are extremely chronological in terms of events--like Revelation, Ezekiel, Zechariah, and Haggai.  Because of this fact, it is fairly easy to get an overview of time in these books once one or more dates are firmly established (especially so since some of them cover a specific mark off of seven years--like Ezekiel, Revelation etc). 

 

Obviously, when describing a series of events, there typically has to be some backtracking on occasion in a writing when a new subject or actor is introduced.  This backtracking (in the form of an inset) is done to provide a historical perspective for the event or subject being introduced.  For example, the seals and the first six trumpets of Revelation are very sequential. 

 

When The AUTHOR finished trumpet 6 and was ready for the 7th trumpet (which seems to occur just after the real, final, two witnesses are resurrected to heaven--Rev 11:15), He chose to backtrack in chapters 10 and 11 with an insert to give some background data--evidently on these two witnesses (who must be distinguished from two earlier possible prophets, maybe Yechezkel and Yirmeyahu, as noted in a prior chapter), their history and their status for the immediate years preceding their resurrection to heaven. 

 

 

Other Events of Significance in Dating 

 

As discussed above in item five, there are events occurring on earth and particularly in the vein of the age end which have significance from an overall dating viewpoint. 

 

For example, several significant comets have passed earth in the last few years (Hale Bopp at Passover in 1997, Hyakutake at Sukkot in 1996, Linear in July 2000 and Halley in 1986 and Shoemaker-Levy 9 struck Jupiter in 1994), coupled with some minor ones and several interesting eclipses (to be discussed in a later chapter). 

 

On Nov 12, 2000, astronomers discovered one more new comet which may rendezvous with earth later in some significant fashion (per a news report on the Art Bell Coast to Coast radio program on Mar 2, 2001). 

 

While no further known comets are due to approach earth in the next immediate years, there always remains the possibility of an unforeseen one surfacing to cause much anxiety by man.  Certainly, there is still one more strange light out in space which is still not explained (as elsewhere described herein).  It could be a comet or something else to rendezvous with earth in the next several years. 

 

A unique planetary alignment with all nine planets on one side of the sun happened during the period of the 2d to the 9th days (Dec 1-8) of the tenth month of Teveth in 1997.  The next alignment so close and so visible doesn’t happen for a hundred years.  Another significant alignment of the five visible planets and the moon occurred on May 5, 2000. 

 

Venus went into conjunction with Jupiter on May 17, 2000, Venus also made a conjunction with Saturn on May 18, 2000, and a conjunction of Jupiter and Saturn happened on May 27-31, 2000 (per ABC News, com sci/tech of 12/4/97 and “Prophecy Flash,” p. 11, Nov-Dec 1997).  The Saturn and Jupiter alignment is thought to be the star of Yakov, announcing the coming of YESHUA (Num 24:17; Matt 2:1-2). 

 

 

The 2002 Alignment 

 

The five planets visible to the naked eye (Mercury, Venus, Mars, Saturn, and Jupiter) went into a visible alignment on April 20, 2002, and continued in a clustered alignment until around May 15, 2002 (per Dr Daniel David Durda on the Coast to Coast AM radio program on April 21, 2002, and “The Week,” Apr 26, 2002, p. 2).  This type of an alignment won’t repeat itself until 2040 (Apr 12, 2002, “The Week,” p. 18). 

 

This clustered presentation/alignment was important because it was visible to so-called human beings on earth in the Western sky in the evenings just before darkness set in (as could be seen largely by the naked eye).  The May 2000 alignment essentially occurred with the planets somewhat behind the sun.  Hence, they were not always visible to the people on earth. 

 

As the age end approaches, astronomical signs will intensify.  Will meteorites or something else soon strike the earth? 

 

The New Age of Aquarius, as popularly anticipated by multitudes of New Agers, was supposed to start c2000.  Moreover, the actual 21st century began on January 1, 2001, per the Julian-Gregory calendar. 

 

 

More Dates 

 

Early first century CE Christians in Rome taught that The MESSIAH would return in the year 2000 (the Dec 1997 “Prophetic Observer,” p. 1, which quoted Edward Gibbon’s “The Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire,” p. 187-188, c. 15).  While this date appears wrong, it may be awful close to truth! 

 

In 1949, almost all Jewish theologians were convinced that the Messianic age was about to begin (Apr 1949 “Intelligence Digest”).  The Jewish religious expectations are still high (as will be addressed in the following presentations).  And this is rightfully so since the coming of The Messiah is associated with observance of the Scriptural Jubilee year (Isa 61:1-2).  While there are differences of opinion among both Jews and Christians on dating the Jubilee, the truth remains that it must be on the table for possibilities for the coming of The MESSIAH.

 

In the NT, YESHUA specifically linked His future coming to a Jubilee year which the KJV calls the acceptable year of YHWH (in Lu 4:19).  Lu 4:19 specifically is from Isaiah 61:1-2 which deals with the coming of YHWH to administer justice to this depraved world. 

 

Isaiah 61:1 uses the Hebrew deror in the vein of bringing liberty to the captives.  Deror is used in Leviticus 25:10 in reference to the Jubilee.  YESHUA in Luke 4:19 used the same word and idea where the KJV associates the coming judgment with the acceptable year of YHWH which seems to be the Jubilee.  Elsewhere herein, this publication builds the case that the next Jubilee will be 2015-2016.  Will YESHUA return in 2015?

 

The Free Trade of the Americas zone is to be established by 2005 (although current political plans are in place to have it finished earlier).  It will integrate and unite all North and South American countries into one trading partnership with fixed currencies or one new currency, as outlined by the 1994 Summit of the Americas, held in Miami, FL and attended by 33 countries. 

 

This trade declaration also said “We reiterate our firm adherence to the principles of international law and the purposes and principles enshrined in the United Nations Charter” (Jun 1998 “Prophetic Observer” p. 1). 

 

Furthermore, there was a new surge of talk for Quebec to be an independent country by the year 2000 (per an AP news release of Nov 29, 1998).  When this event eventually materializes, it will affect Canada and the fulfillment of prophecy. 

 

The New World Order was to be operational by 2000-2004 (i.e. Goals 2000, etc).  The year 2000 was the first goal for its establishment.  But reportedly, it slipped to 2004 (or possibly now to 2010).  The UN goal of world government, with the emergence of the UN Brown Man (whose statute is at the UN Building in NY--Jan-Feb 1999 “Intelligence Newsletter,” p. 8), was set for 2000.  Perhaps it has also slipped. 

 

 

And More Possibilities

 

According to USSR defector, Anatoly Golitsyn, the Soviet aim for world conquest was 2000 (“Origins of the 4th World War,” p. 46).  This date may have slipped a little. 

 

Different analysts have outlined Muslim plans for an anthrax, biological or radiological attack upon some 100-120 American cities by the year 2000, in the vein of a religious duty against the Great Satan/US. 

 

While the 2000 date seems to have slipped, the Muslim plans are still on the drawing boards (and could have reached some fruition in the 2001 anthrax terrorist attacks through the US mails, following the 9-11 terrorist attacks). 

 

One of the interesting things on the table (after the 9-11 attacks) was revealed in the search of the home of al Qaeda’s nuclear secretary Sultan Bashirrudden Mahmoud, who was captured in 2002 in Pakistan.  His home had anthrax-laden helium balloons for possible deployment over the United States, in addition to sophisticated A-bomb building equipment (May 2002 “American Sentinel,” p. 5). 

 

In another report, the May 10, 2002, “The Week” (p. 5) quoted the Bush administration which said that Cuba has now produced biological germ-weapons which could be used against the US.  Per the report, Castro has shared this technology with “other rogue states.” 

 

 

More on Coming Terrorism 

 

An October 1999 letter from Lee Bellinger, editor of the “American Sentinel” magazine, quoted microbiologist Larry Harris who said that there are now some 100 Islamic terrorist teams or cells in the US preparing to launch this attack.  Russia and her Serb allies have the same terrorist capability and may in time strike the US over Clinton’s aggression in the Balkans--and particularly over the continuing US presence there.   

 

In a follow-up mode, Bellinger, in the April 2001 “American Sentinel” (p. 7), quoted the recent testimony of Vice-Admiral Thomas Wilson, Director of the Defense Intelligence Agency, before a congressional committee that a major terrorist attack against US interests would occur in the next 2-3 years and involve a weapon capable of producing mass causalities (the Sep 11, 2001, attacks on the World Trade Center and the Pentagon [to be discussed later] may signal the start of these troubles). 

 

Manifestly, all of these Muslim threats, and particularly those emanating from Osama bin Laden, have to be taken seriously because of the continuing George W. Bush wars and assaults upon the Muslims of the Middle East.  The Bush War on Terrorism, and its focus upon Afghanistan and Iraq have been assessed in previous chapters. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 491--Dating the Age End II

 

 

Continuing   

 

The preceding chapter outlined some of the most pressing issues in attempting to date the age end and the urgency of the subject.  This chapter will continue with that presentation. 

 

 

Rav Avraham Sutton 

 

The “Vendyl Jones Institutes Researcher” (p. 2) for Feb 2003 quoted Rav Avraham Sutton who says that “We are living at the brink of history.”  For sure, Sutton hit a home run with that remark. 

 

 

Some More Jewish Thinking 

 

The previously quoted Nov-Dec 2001 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 17-21) had an article by William F. Dankenbring which focused upon the rebuilding of the Temple.  It mentioned a couple of items which are very relevant for the coming of The MESSIAH. 

 

As briefly cited earlier, a group of archaeologists and volunteers in 1989, under the direction of Dr Joseph Patrich of Hebrew University and/or archaeologist Vendyl Jones (as quoted elsewhere herein), were excavating near the Dead Sea where the Dead Sea Scrolls had been found. 

 

In one of the caves, they found a clay flask which had been covered with fibers and wrapped in palm leaves and hidden in a hole some three feet deep.  The oil was miraculously preserved. 

 

The oil was tested chemically.  It was found that one drop would turn water milky white, just as ancient Jewish documents said it should.  According to the Hilchot Beti haBechirah (4:1), this seems to be the precious anointing oil which was hid by the priests just before the Temple was destroyed in 70 CE. 

 

Dankenbring quoted Grant Jeffrey who said:  “It is no accident that this oil of anointing should reappear after all these centuries.  It has been given to the chief rabbi of Israel until it can be put in the rebuilt Temple and used to anoint their long-awaited Messiah.  The ‘Anointed One’ is surely coming soon.” 

 

This same “Prophecy Flash” (p. 21) also cited a 2001 brochure put out by the Israel Foundation and other Orthodox Jews which calls for the formation of the Sanhedrin of the Sixth Millennium to enable Israel to rebuild the Temple, and to anoint The MESSIAH, when He comes.  This group asked “rabbis” worldwide to meet in Israel to select the 71 most qualified “rabbis” to be in the Sanhedrin (this happened in 2004, as discussed earlier herein). 

 

 

More From Vendyl Jones 

 

The Feb 2003 “Vendyl Jones Researcher has been cited above and elsewhere herein.  Jones is an archeologist and apparently a good one.  He seems to have both a Christian and Jewish point of view in pursuing his subject of interest.  Thus, the work he is doing is a good work and one which ultimately will probably serve The MOST HIGH as the age end draws near. 

 

One of the most important undertakings, that Jones and his people have pursued, is his quest to find the Tabernacle and the Ark of the Covenant.  Someone once said (evidently to Jones)-- “Man, you have been looking for that Tabernacle and Ark for over twenty years.  When will you either find it or give up?” (ibid, p. 5). 

 

Actually, Jones says that he became interested in the subject and effectively commenced his search in 1939 when he was nine years old.  Well, in 2003, Jones is still looking and he still hasn’t given up (and even after 64 years). 

 

Anyway, the essence of his Feb 2003 Researcher was a progress report on the preparations that he and his team were making for excavations in Palestine in 2003, starting in March.  Jones believes that he is very close to finding the Tabernacle and Ark.  He asserts that he and his team are on the threshold of the greatest discovery in history. 

 

If true, it will surpass all of the other famous archeological finds.  As Jones believes, this discovery will turn the world upside down and pave the way for the return of HaShem’s presence upon earth. 

 

 

The Motivation 

 

The basis for the optimism and hope of Jones hangs essentially upon several artifacts which he has studied and analyzed over some years (ibid, p. 1-7).  Based upon Jones’ study of the text of “Emer HaMelech” (found in an ancient Jewish Tosefta), Jones believes that there are some four artifacts which describe where the Tabernacle and Ark treasures were hidden by Yirmeyahu the prophet. 

 

First, the Copper Scroll found at Qumran and the message it conveys about hidden treasures is the primary source.  Jones suggests that the Copper Scroll was prepared by the prophets Haggai and Zekharyah. 

 

Hence, he has studied this text and believes that he now understands it and in the context of the hidden Tabernacle and Ark of the Covenant. 

 

The next record cited by Jones is the Silver Scroll, which is a commentary on the Copper Scroll.  The third source cited by Jones is the Ibex Skin Scroll which describes how to re-institute true worship.  These two scrolls were also found at Qumran. 

 

The find of the Two Marble Tablets that were hidden on Mount Carmel is the fourth artifact.  They tell in detail the account of the hiding of the sought treasures. 

 

Jones suggests that the work of his team to discover the kodesh anointing oil, the recovery of 600 kilos of the kodesh incense, and the finding of the kodesh ground of Gilgal are all specified in the Copper Scroll.  If Jones is interpreting this thing right, the artifacts hidden by Yirmeyahu could also be described in this scroll. 

 

So far, Jones and his people have been greatly blessed in the recovery of many important artifacts (as cited above and in other commentary herein).  If he finds the Tabernacle and the Ark of the Covenant, it indeed will be one of the most profoundly important archeological finds in all of recorded history. 

 

As a minimum, if Jones or even someone else finds these important artifacts, it will assuredly mean that the building of the Third Temple is near.  With the Third Temple, we all can take comfort that YESHUA The MESSIAH will be soon coming back to impose His government over this presently misgoverned earth.  Time will be short for sure! 

 

 

The Talmud 

 

The Talmud teaches that one of the signs of the nearness of the coming of The MESSIAH is that “falsehood rules the minds of men” (Sanhedrin 97a, Jan-Feb 2001 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 11).  After eight years of the most professional liar in American history (Bill “Slick” Clinton), and the public acceptance of deceit and lies, this remark may be very relevant. 

 

 

Yakov’s Trouble 

 

On Mar 23, 2001, some 27 leading Rabbonim and multitudes of religious Jews from throughout Israel assembled at the Western Wall for a proclamation that the new year (this could be a reference to the year starting in the fall, although it could refer to the religious year starting Aviv 1) would be the time of Yakov’s Trouble (which is very close to the last seven years in the age end). 

 

In a related idea on Yakov’s Trouble, the Jul 29, 2002, “Jerusalem Report” (p. 18) had a story by Leslie Susser on “Before It’s Too Late” which quoted Mossad Chief Ephraim Halevy in Brussels, Belgium on Jun 26, 2002.  Halevy says that “September 11 (of 2001) marked the start of World War III.”  He went on to single out Iran, Iraq, Syria and Libya as threats. 

 

Actually, as suggested above and elsewhere herein, the evidence seems to be in place to suggest that the first signs of Yakov’s Trouble have already commenced (which will be considered in the following chapters as possibly being as early as 2000).  It appears that Yakov’s Trouble of seven years begins in earnest in Yechezkel’s 30th year and is completely phased-in--in his 31st-32d years. 

 

Hence, Yakov’s Trouble may not start in just one year and last seven years from that one date.  But rather, it may be phased in over two, three or more years and last a total of seven years for various groups of peoples.  In this sense, it may be that Yakov’s Trouble starts in Yechezkel’s 30th year and ends first for the election in his 37th year and starts in his 31st-32d years for others, with ending dates in his 38th-39th years. 

 

This possible explanation for Yakov’s Trouble is discussed and further explained in later chapters and in Appendices D and E. 

 

 

The Columbia 

 

On Feb 1, 2003, the US space shuttle “Columbia” disintegrated as it entered the atmosphere over North America.  Seven astronauts (including one Israeli named Illon Ramon) were killed and the shuttle debris was scattered over East Texas.  The Mar-Apr 2003 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 3-18) had a story by William F. Dankenbring on “The Columbia Space Shuttle Disaster--Why?” to assess this loss. 

 

Dankenbring asked if this disaster could be “A Message from God?” and could it be a “sign” of even worse disasters to follow? 

 

To support the analogy, Dankenbring took note of the fact that the name “Columbia” literally means “America.”  Quoting “Webster’s Seventh New Collegiate Dictionary,” Dankenbring found that Columbia is defined as “The United States.”  Various encyclopedias have made similar connections over the years. 

 

This article took note of the fact that the Columbia was launched on Jan 16, 2003, and was in space for 16 days, and it exploded some 16 minute from landing time.  So the accident was riddled with three sixes. 

 

Writer Dankenbring continues with other fascinating signs about the disaster and concludes that “The fiery crash of the space shuttle Columbia is a divine SIGN of worse trouble to come... Incredible destruction is in the offing!  The sacrifice of the Columbia space shuttle was only a precursor--a warning--a sign or omen--that unless we QUICKLY begin to change our ways, our society and civilization is headed toward a terrible rendezvous with Destiny!” 

 

The bottom line here is that one must ask if this is indeed a sign that the seven times of Yakov’s Trouble are about ready to strike the US--Ephraim Yisrael? 

 

The times are ripe and all of the signs are present for the start of Yakov’s Trouble on Yisrael in Yechezkel’s 30th year, the possible end of the House of Yisrael nations by Yechezkel’s 33d year and for YESHUA to likely return by Yechezkel’s 37th year (thus, allowing the age end and books, like Ezekiel and Revelation, to primarily cover at least seven plus years). 

 

 

Some Alternative Views 

 

While the Scriptural evidence for the time of the end being upon us right now in the early 21st century, there remains some contrary views that the age end is somewhat still in the future. 

 

One of the big proponents of a distant future age end was the former Ernest Martin of Portland, Oregon.  Martin, now deceased, held for years that the age end would not come until the distant future. 

 

Sometime, in the last couple of years (perhaps in 2002), writer Ralph Ward wrote an article on the age end in one of the issues of “Search the Scriptures” of Clarksville, Arkansas.  Ward offered the date of 2027 CE when The MESSIAH would supposedly return. 

 

In terms of this calculation by Ward, he used a Jubilee cycle of 50 years (from a very questionable start date determined from secular sources) to calculate his age end.  As demonstrated in a former chapter herein, this writer takes the position that the Jubilee cycle is 49 years.  Thus, Ward’s calculation and conclusion have some major flaws in its presentation. 

 

Finally, the Feb 24, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review” (p. A3) had an Associated Press story from Jerusalem on “BBC show:  Isaac Newton said world will end in 2060.” 

 

The background on this BBC story was that some of the writings of the famous Sir Isaac Newton (in the late 17th century or early 18th century) have come into the hands of an Israeli museum in Jerusalem.  In one such work, Newton postulated the date of 2060 for the end. 

 

Was Newton correct?  Or could either Martin or Ward be right in their calculations for a shorter date from Newton, but a much later date from the early 21st century?  Well, time will tell.  For sure, this writer opts for a much closer date (which will be addressed in succeeding chapters). 

 

If the student of truth takes the signs and the observations outlined in the preceding commentary, the case is strong for a short date. 

 

 

Redemption Comes Hastily and Unexpectedly 

 

The previously cited Nov-Dec 2001 “Prophecy Flash” magazine (p. 7) has a quotation and some commentary from “The Chumash” which is most fascinating.  The quotation is from Genesis 41:14-16 where Yosef was summoned from prison to appear before the Pharaoh.  Per tradition, this happened on a Yom Teruah of one year. 

 

The commentary noted in verse 14 that the text read that when the Egyptians brought Yosef out of the prison, “they rushed him.”  This commentary adds that every case of “Divine” deliverance comes hastily and unexpectedly.  Similarly, the coming of The MESSIAH will be sudden and hasty (but on time, as discussed in previous comments on II Peter 3:11-12). 

 

These remarks are undoubtedly true.  YESHUA will come suddenly and unexpectedly. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 492--Yechezkel’s 30th Year I

 

 

When? 

 

The essential basis of the “when” for the age end is covered in the dating scheme of the book of Ezekiel primarily; but also, in the books of Ezra, Nehemiah, Jeremiah, Haggai, Zechariah, and I and II Maccabees, to a lesser extent.  As remarked previously, it is possible to relate or link the dating references in all of these books together into one overall outline. 

 

The key for this is the book of Ezekiel and Yechezkel’s 30th year, noted formerly (Ezek 1:1).  There are several Scriptural citations which might possibly establish a date for Yechezkel’s 30th year.  In the first place, the overall chronology of Adam’s time, discussed in the former chapters, indicates that Adam man has now exceeded 6,000 years.  It is time for a new change in the worldly organization. 

 

Beyond this simple explanation of reaching (actually now exceeding) the 6,000 years, there are a host of other chronological calculations and fulfillments of historical events which make it abundantly clear that, at last, Adam man’s misrule of this globe is almost ready to abort (as mentioned in the prior chapters). 

 

For instance, there are two key prophetic references which seem to be fairly precise in dating Yechezkel’s 30th year correctly.  First, there is the obvious need for an elapse of 390 years of accountable sin upon Yisrael (Ezek 4:4-5), and on a possible age end dating of the 483 years associated with Daniel 9:24-27.  These two possible dating mechanisms were noted earlier and will be addressed in comments to follow. 

 

In any case, since Adam has been so obsessed with his desire to abort babies out of their mother’s wombs, he is about to find out what the word abortion really means when the chickens come home to roost and his rule and the worldly systems are totally aborted and destroyed forever--truly into infinity.  This will be one of the most profound and wonderful events in the past history of 6,000 years. 

 

 

A Closer Look At Yechezkel 

 

In a study of Ezekiel 1 and his reference to a 30th year, it is possible to correlate that 30th year to the fifth year of Yehoyakhin’s captivity (as Ezekiel one seems to do).  So the question here must be--what is this 30th year? 

 

The Jewish position on the 30th year is that it must be a reference to the 30th year in a Jubilee cycle.  However, a problem then comes up in that Yehoyakhin’s 5th year of captivity historically was not a 30th year in a Jubilee cycle. 

 

Actually, the last Jubilee was apparently in Yoshiyahu’s 25th-26th years.  Yechezkel’s 30th year, by inclusive counting, started as year one in Yoshiyahu’s 18th year--which was a Sabbath year and a year of great religious awakening, but not a Jubilee.  In short, Yechezkel’s 30th year seems to have been around the 22nd year in a Jubilee cycle. 

 

Having said that Yehoyakhin’s 5th year of captivity was not the 30th year in a Jubilee cycle (hence, implying that Yechezkel’s 30th year was also not a 30th year in a Jubilee cycle since Ezekiel one seems to make Yechezkel’s 30th year the same as Yehoyakhin’s 5th year), there is another possibility on Ezekiel one worth mentioning. 

 

It is conceivable and thus possible that the reference in Ezekiel 1:1 to the 30th year is not to Yehoyakhin’s 5th year as mentioned in Ezekiel 1:2. 

 

In this vein, maybe Yechezkel’s visions of the future did start in Yehoyakhin’s 5th year but they were visions of things which would happen to Jerusalem starting in or largely falling in the 30th year of the Jubilee (as a matter of fact, Jerusalem did fall in the fourth month of about the 29th or possibly the 30th year of the Jubilee).  Perhaps this course would read more into Ezekiel 1:1 than allowed, but it must be put on the table. 

 

 

Other Options 

 

The popular Christian position is that Yechezkel’s 30th year was the year of his birth.  Maybe it was.  Or perhaps, the “Jamieson, Fausset, & Brown” commentary has the right slant in its suggestion that the 30th year refers to the 30th year from the beginning of the reign of Nabopolassar, father of Nebuchadnezzar.  This was the beginning year of the Babylonian empire (which was to last around 90 years in total). 

 

Otherwise, this 30th year reference may have some other meaning relative to historic Yechezkel which may not be readily apparent.  This writer feels certain that the remark has an application to Yechezkel in the past tense.  But exactly what it meant in the historic vein is unclear to this writer presently. 

 

Too, there are numerous reasons to believe that the reference also has application and meaning to an age ending Yechezkel witness, as cited earlier, and to be discussed in some detail in later commentary (however such a witness is to be delivered or accomplished). 

 

Moreover, there are surely other reasons why The MOST HIGH has seen fit to record this reference to serve so-called humanity for the last 2560 years plus.  Some of these will become apparent in succeeding comments.  Also, remarks to follow shortly will offer some reasons to believe that the “30th year” remark has some particular relevance in the age end. 

 

 

Linking Other Dates 

 

Since it is feasible to date and understand Yehoyakhin’s 5th year, it is possible to relate that date to other dates--like those associated with King Tzidkiyahu in his declining years (before his capture at the hands of the conquering Babylonians and preceding the fall of Jerusalem). 

 

At a first glance, one may speculate that Yehoyakhin’s captivity paralleled Tzidkiyahu’s rule.  And it almost did within a few days or weeks.  But the greater problem seems to relate to the method which the Judean kings followed in counting their rulerships, as described in the prior chapters on chronology. 

 

In any case, Jerusalem fell to the Babylonians in Tzidkiyahu’s 11th year (fourth month) and this connects to Yehoyakhin’s 12th year of captivity, as illustrated in Ezekiel 33:21, where the news of Jerusalem’s fall reached Babylon on the fifth day of the tenth month of the 12th year of Yehoyakhin’s captivity. 

 

This news didn’t require a year and five months to get to Babylon.  Clearly, Tzidkiyahu’s 11th year must have corresponded to Yehoyakhin’s 12th year of captivity. 

 

Obviously, in the context of Yehoyakhin’s removal first and Tzidkiyahu’s accession later, there could be a year’s difference between the two count systems and especially since Tzidkiyahu’s count probably did not start with his accession year, while Yehoyakhin’s count on his captivity started at once with his removal (by inclusive counting, as is often the case with any presentation of data establishing a chronology of time). 

 

 

One Specific Dating Mechanism

 

The start of Yechezkel’s trial and first witness of 430 days (or perhaps 390 days) is outlined in Ezekiel 1:1-2 and 3:15-16.  It ends in Ezekiel 8:1.  By counting the days from the beginning to the end, it is certain that the 430 days extended over an intercalcary year of 13 months (of around 384 or so days).  Or if the witness covered 390 days, it could have been in a regular 12-month year. 

 

The Scriptural year commencing in the spring of 2000 was apparently an intercalcary year, as outlined elsewhere herein (although by the Jewish calendar, 1999 was the intercalcary year). 

 

In early 2000, there was some strong evidence indicating that indeed the year 2000 (starting in the spring at Aviv 1 and running to the next Aviv 1) could have corresponded to Yechezkel’s 30th year.  This correlation looked good up until late in the year (this correlation is discussed at length elsewhere herein).  Anyway, hindsight has proven that the 2000 option was incorrect. 

 

The next possible intercalcary years in sequence are the years 2002, 2005, 2008 and 2010.  Since 2000 and 2002 are both now in the past tense, it seems practical to write each of these years off right here at the start.  Obviously, Yechezkel’s 30th year must be some other year than 2000 or 2002. 

 

At first, this writer chose to believe that Yechezkel’s age end 30th year must also cover an intercalcary year.  But hindsight as it is developing suggests that possibly Yechezkel’s 30th year in the age end may not be an intercalcary year. 

 

As will be developed in comments to follow, one of the difficulties in addressing the early chapters of the book of Ezekiel arises because many of the prophet’s instructions from The MOST HIGH came to him in the form of visions (Ezek 1:1).  Yet, when a reader addresses Ezekiel 1-12, the messages seem to imply or allow that Yechezkel actually went through the physical motions outlined in order to receive the visions. 

 

Thus, it would seem that indeed the prophet did lay upon his sides for 430 days (Ezek 4) in order to see the vision associated with the coming destruction of Jerusalem (Ezekiel 4-7, which was the ante-type of the future destruction of the House of Yisrael) and demonstrate a removal from Jerusalem through the wall of the city and captivity (Ezek 12).  And these events can easily be true.  Yet, there is another option here. 

 

 

Yes 

 

Possibly, Yechezkel did not personally go through the 430-day motion on his sides or the removal from the city and captivity; but rather, saw these trials in the form of visions.  Actually, there is quite some body of evidence to suggest this possibility (as they seem to be described in context as visions). 

 

First, Yechezkel was a watchman for the House of Yisrael (then in bondage to the Assyrians and/or other nations in far away lands to the Northeast). 

 

While the argument can be made that indeed Yechezkel’s words to the lost House of Yisrael have been delivered by the prophet (in that modern peoples of the House of Yisrael generally have Christian “Bibles” in their homes containing them), the reader gets an impression from the book of Ezekiel of a more positive presentation of the warnings than has actually so far occurred. 

 

For example, the great bulk of the Israelites in the House of Yisrael have no idea at all about their personal identities and the enormous import of the book of Ezekiel to them and to them personally.  Too, the book is in Hebrew and modern Israelites cannot read Hebrew (although some fairly good translations to English are available). 

 

Last, many of these prophecies are extremely complex and the words simply mean little or nothing to the modern Israelites of the House of Yisrael nations (though they can be understood; surely through study and obedience--which modern Israelites simply won’t pursue). 

 

Therefore, has the prophet actually warned the people in the sense that he was a watchman specifically commissioned to warn the people? 

 

The second piece of evidence suggesting that the possibilities (of Yechezkel laying on his sides back in 561 BCE in Babylon) did not happen arises because of a remark at Ezekiel 4:12 in that the prophet was commanded to eat his food in the sight of the people (a similar remark on eating and drinking appears at Ezekiel 12:18-19). 

 

Even if he did do this in front of the Jews, then in Babylonian captivity, this would seemingly not constitute the true implications of Yechezkel’s job of being a watchman to the House of Yisrael.  The implication of Ezekiel 4 is that the prophet lays on his sides and the bread is baked and eaten in front of the persons being warned (the lost House of Yisrael, in the vein of the age end that is addressed in the message). 

 

 

The Point Is 

 

This backdrop prompted this writer to long ago become suspicious that the actual prophecies must be delivered in the age end by Yechezkel or some person or work operating under his spirit or at least with a mission of getting his message out to the Israelites of the lost House of Yisrael in the age end. 

 

In other words, there is some evidence of an age ending Yechezkel witness (as was commented upon in previous remarks).  Ideally, the case can be made that a chosen man will perform the mechanics of laying on his side and delivering YHWH’s message to lost Yisrael in the age end.  If so, the ancient prophecy first of all addresses its coming age end deliverance. 

 

Of course, the dating can apply directly to such a coming prophet.  But also, much of the dating aspects of Ezekiel can allow that the cited dates apply to their eventual fulfillments (as seems allowable after Ezekiel 7, and especially after Ezekiel 23). 

 

For years, this writer struggled trying to make both the delivery of the prophecies (in an age ending Yechezkel witness) and their actual fulfillments happen as one event which starts in Yechezkel’s 30th year.  Finally, hindsight has forced me to look in the direction that delivery of the prophecies (in the age end and not in the vein of Yechezkel’s day) and their fulfillments can be in two motions which are separated in time. 

 

Hence the student of truth is faced with several possibilities for the recorded events and their dates.  First, everything written could have precisely happened to Yechezkel as stated.  Next, the cited events and their dates can have application to an age end Yechezkel witness or prophet.  Thirdly, the events and dates can find their actual fulfillments in the age end as outlined. 

 

Finally, all three of these options seem plausible with perhaps some minor modifications of the dates and certainly from Ezekiel 1 to 23 (after Ezekiel 23, the case can be made that the prophecies came to Yechezkel in the form of the Word of YHWH, and not necessarily in visions, as was true from Ezekiel 1-12, and that the dates and events relate strictly to their age end fulfillments in a general sense). 

 

In this vein, it would seem that either of these events (the delivery of the prophecies or their fulfillments) can come in an intercalcary year (in fact, it might be that they both come in intercalcary years--which would dictate a separation of the prophesying from the fulfillment by as much as two or three years; but this option may conflict with the idea that much of Ezekiel addresses seven years in fulfillment). 

 

Alternatively, one can come in an intercalcary year while the other one comes in a regular year.  Or alternatively, maybe both of them come in regular years.  If one realizes that there is some probability in some separation of time of the 390 days to the House of Yisrael versus the 40 days’ witness to Yehudah, then it will allow that either witness/fulfillment can come in either a regular or intercalcary year. 

 

Regardless, the case can be made that Ezekiel 1-35 is fulfilled over an approximate seven-year period. 

 

 

Some Possibilities

 

Therefore, it would seem that there are three things involved from Ezekiel 1 to 23.  In the ante-type of Yechezkel’s day, everything happened as stated except that Yechezkel may not have actually lain on his sides for 430 days (per Ezek 4), nor did he simulate removal and captivity (per Ezek 12). 

 

On these two issues, he may have seen them in vision with an age end work fulfilling these physical motions while also delivering the prophecies.  In terms of the age end witness, perhaps a prophet will actually go though the physical motions and deliver the prophecies as stated--except for a few minor alterations in the dating and sequence. 

 

The last issue must address the actual fulfillments of the stated judgments on the House of Yisrael and Jerusalem.  Assuredly, these prophecies will take place.  But again, there might be some minor alterations in dating and sequencing of events. 

 

While it is possible that someone might build a case that the latter two of these things take place simultaneously in one single intercalcary year, this thinking will not stand because of several reasons.  Obviously, the first thing is that it logically follows that the prophetic warning must be given first before their fulfillments (after all, Yechezkel was a watchman who had a job to warn the House of Yisrael--presumably, in advance of the judgment). 

 

Otherwise, the message outlined in Ezekiel 20 seems paramount in establishing how this whole thing ties together in terms of the age end witness and fulfillments.  Clearly, the context of Ezekiel 20 is that this prophecy (on the 10th day of the 5th month of Yechezkel’s 32d year) suggests that the 390-day siege (as described earlier) against the House of Yisrael is underway. 

 

In fact, per Ezekiel 20:45-49 and 21:1-2 (which correctly belong together at the top of chapter 21, per the Hebrew Tanakh), it seems certain that just after this message of the inquiring elders from the House of Yisrael, the age end witness must turn and face the South (Jerusalem which is on the right in Hebrew thought, per Ezek 4) and prophesy of a coming judgment or fire on Jerusalem (which might fulfill as late as Yechezkel’s 37th year). 

 

Logically, this point in Ezekiel 20 44-45 and 21:1-2 separates the 390-day witness to the House of Yisrael and the 40-day witness to Yehudah as established in Ezekiel 4.  Before this event and date, Ezekiel 14:1-17 takes place to offer the chance of Yisrael’s repentance and the message that the behemah beasts will go wild to terrorize the land, even before the siege starts (as allowed in Lev 26:22). 

 

Interestingly, Ezekiel 15 seems to take place just after a preliminary embargo on the 10th day of the 10th month of the year preceding the start of the siege (as discussed earlier herein).  Importantly, Ezekiel 16:46 declares that Samaria (the House of Yisrael) still dwells nationally.  Yet conversely, Ezekiel 23:9-10 suggests that the House of Yisrael has, by then, may have been delivered into captivity. 

 

The last thing about Ezekiel 20 is that the actions of the elders of the House of Yisrael to inquire of YHWH and the fact that they are rebuffed suggest that the prophet has indeed just finished or is finishing his witness to the House of Yisrael (which is borne out in Ezek 20:45-49 where he turns to face South and prophesy to Yehudah/Jerusalem).  If he is prophesying in the 5th month of Yehoyakhin’s 7th year to Yisrael, he must have started earlier. 

 

Finally, there are three key dates which kick these events off.  First, there is the first date of the 5th day of the 4th month (Ezek 1:1-2); next there is a date of the 12th day of the 4th month (7 days later--Ezek 3:16), and last there is the interesting date of the 17th day of the 4th month which is the historic fast day commemorating the fall of Jerusalem to both Babylon and Rome (since Jerusalem is an ante-type for the House of Yisrael, this fast date must apply to the House of Yisrael). 

 

 

Tying It Together 

 

Putting this thing together, it would seem that the dates apply to the person of Yechezkel as given in the 6th century BCE.  In terms of the age end Yechezkel witness, he logically sees the Merkabah (of Ezek 1:4-28 and 10:1-22) and receives his commission sometime on or after the 5th day of the 4th month of Yechezkel’s 30th year (since he is told to eat/digest the scroll, perhaps of Yechezkel, this may take some time--Ezek 3:1). 

 

Possibly, the age end witness starts his work of delivering the prophecies to the House of Yisrael on or about the 12th or 17th day of the 4th month of Yechezkel’s 30th year (a regular luni-solar year), and concludes it some 390 days later by the 5th day of the 6th month of the 31st year (Ezek 8:!).  Everything from Ezekiel 8:1 to 20:1 happens after the first 390-day witness to the house of Yisrael. 

 

Here, a more likely alternative is that Yechezkel’s 30th year happens in an excessive intercalcary year.  If so, and if the witness commences on or about the 12th day of the fourth month, it would allow the 390 days witness to end a year later, on or about the 17th day of the fourth month--the historic fast day of such profound significance to both Yisrael and Yehudah.  This would make much sense. 

 

Everything from Ezekiel 8 on forward generally happens as stated except the actions and words spoken in Ezekiel 12.  This witness may take a day, but its fulfillment in possibly Yechezkel’s 32d or 33d year can cover a period of time. Otherwise, Ezekiel 16 seems out of place for a House of Yisrael witness. 

 

On fulfillments, Ezekiel 5-7 may take place during the 390-day siege on the House of Yisrael--which may start on  the 12th day of the 4th month of Yechezkel’s 31st or 32d year (if intercalcary) or near Shavuot if in a regular year and runs to the 17th day of the 4th month of Yechezkel’s 32d or 33d year.  This writer is suspicious that the fulfillment of the siege will start in the 32d year and end in the 33d year (though it is possible in the 31-32 years). 

 

Probably, for the age end witness, Ezekiel 8:1 and 11:24-25 take place on the 5th day of the 6th month of the 31st year.  In fulfillments, most of the prophecies of Ezekiel 8-11 probably start to be fulfilled in perhaps the 5th day of the 6th month of the 31st year and last until Yisrael falls in Yechezkel’s 32d or 33d years.  These fulfillments may take some time--perhaps over several months. 

 

Ezekiel 12, of about one day, is probably delivered by the age end witness either at the conclusion of the 390-day witness or at the end of the 430 days.  On fulfillment, this text will be fulfilled when the siege ends and the House of Yisrael falls.  From Ezekiel 13 to 23, the prophecies and House of Yisrael visits seem to come forth in sequence (except for the question over Ezekiel 16, as noted above). 

 

Chapter 15 of Ezekiel probably occurs just after the first embargo ends (after the 10th day of the 10th month of the 31st year).  The idea that the wild branch has already been singed (before it is finally burned up completely) would allow that this prophecy is delivered between the first embargo and the ultimate siege (Ezek 15:4).  Of course, the final fulfillment of this chapter happens at the end of the 390-day siege. 

 

As noted above, chapter 16 seems out of place though the age end prophet may deliver these words in sequence--either just before or during the siege on the House of Yisrael.  Certainly, they find their fulfillments later in Yechezkel’s 34th-37th years when Jerusalem falls to the Beast power.  Everything in Ezekiel 17-20 probably happens prophetically just before or during the siege on the House of Yisrael. 

 

The issues over the throne of Yisrael (Ezek 17 and 19:1-14, though Ezekiel 19:13 seems to be an enigma) likely happen just before the siege and shortly after the cited events/messages are mentioned by the age end witness.  Prophetically, Ezekiel 19 is rendered before the fall of the House of Yisrael (the lamentations in verse 14 comes before the events occur--per “Soncino Books of the Bible,” Ezekiel, p. 119). 

 

The events of Ezekiel 20:1-44 probably occur after the commencement of the 390-day siege on the House of Yisrael.  Seemingly, in this context, the House of Yisrael is divorced by YHWH. 

 

During the 40-day witness to Jerusalem/Yehudah, probably the age end witness makes the prophecies of Ezekiel 21-23.  The 10th day of the 10th month of Yechezkel’s 34th year (Ezek 24:1) seems to be a dated event which happens after the fall of the House of Yisrael and the Beast’s occupation of Jerusalem.  This event will be clarified in some commentary hereafter. 

 

The balance of the book (Ezekiel 25-48) was of course recorded by Yechezkel in the 6th century BCE.  It is questionable to what extent that these messages will be mentioned in the age end by the Yechezkel witness.  As a minimum, they likely will be fulfilled in the age end; and essentially, in accordance with the stated dates in the book of Ezekiel. 

 

 

Daniel 9:25-27 

 

Now, back to the dating--as cited above, Daniel 9:25-27 has a magnificent prophecy about a coming building of Jerusalem at the start or end of a 483 year mark off of time (in the sense of prophetic days for years). 

 

Most translators and commentators accept the meaning of Daniel 9:25-27 as being that there is a mark off of 483 years from the command to restore and rebuild Jerusalem to the coming of The MESSIAH.  This interpretation, as described earlier, sees the rebuilding of Jerusalem at the start of the mark off of the 483 years (or the 434 years, as also relevant in the prophecy). 

 

This writer agrees, in part, with this explanation and would not dare argue otherwise.  There is no argument that the proper decrees were issued and Jerusalem was seemingly rebuilt on schedule in the fifth century BCE, as described in a prior chapter herein.  But there can be another fulfillment on this. 

 

For an alternate view, Dr George M. Lamsa’s translation from the Aramaic seems to vaguely allow that this ultimate rebuilding or completion takes place at the “end” of the respective count offs of 483 and 434 years and not necessarily at the start, as is generally believed.  This option may take the count out of the fifth century BCE and move it forward to the age end. 

 

 

Suleiman and His Orders 

 

For years now, the former Dr Ernest Martin of Portland, Oregon had noted a decree by Suleiman the Magnificent for the Ottoman Muslim’s rebuilding of Jerusalem in the 16th century CE.  Martin used the year 1537 for his justification with the possibility that YESHUA can return 483 years later or in 2020 (by progressive counting). 

 

The writer of this study at hand has spend some time researching the rebuilding commands of Suleiman.  It appears that the Sultan Suleiman I did issue an order for the rebuilding of Jerusalem’s old city walls and city gates possibly in 1537 (the Temple Mount gates were seemingly built earlier). 

 

This construction on the old city walls and gates allegedly started that year and was completed in 1541 (“Encyclopaedia Judaica,” v. 9. p. 1426-1435). 

 

But there are some other points on this work which could be especially relevant.  Judaica notes that the Jaffa Gate, the first one built (per an inscription at the gate), was built in 1538-1539 and that an early Jewish historian (Joseph ha-Kohen) put the official start date of construction at 1540 (ibid, p. 1433). 

 

The Dung Gate was built in 1540-41, per an inscription on a nearby tablet.  Obviously, all of the construction took some time (several years).  Thus, there could have been some confusion in dating the event precisely.

 

The Ottomans seized Jerusalem in 1516.  Suleiman took power as the Sultan over the empire in 1520 (“Encyclopaedia Judaica,” v. 15, p. 503).  And the Ottomans evidently started a number of building projects in the city over the years.  But this writer is unable to date the exact command for this rebuilding effort--beyond the walls and gates, allegedly in 1537 (which could be the mark off of the 483 years count). 

 

A perusal of the Judaica article on Jerusalem suggests that Suleiman evidently began his rebuilding or restoration campaign for the old city, even before he began rebuilding the city walls and gates (which were completed in 1541).  For example, Suleiman rebuilt or restored the Sultan’s Pool in 1536 on the foundations of an ancient water pool. 

 

He rebuilt the public water fountains and repaired the conduits to bring water from Solomon’s Pools near Bethlehem.  While it is unclear when all of this construction was done, it’s not hard to suppose that it started as early as 1527-1536 or certainly before the time the Sultan gave the command to restore Jerusalem’s city walls and gates. 

 

 

But Some Problems Here 

 

In remarks to follow, the dates of 1537-1541 may not work out as they logically should.  Therefore, the question must be asked if there could be a problem with these dates. 

 

Most of these dates are very likely based upon historical data accumulated by the Muslims--based upon their lunar calendar which quickly becomes out of alignment with the Scriptural luni-solar calendar and the Julian-Gregory solar calendar.  Islam dates from about 622 CE, and the Muslim lunar calendar probably dates from then or earlier. 

 

In attempting to convert this Moslem historical information into the Julian-Gregory solar calendar used by Christians, it is very easy that there could be some calculation errors with the dates of 1537-1539.  Therefore, the case can be made that the date of 1540, supplied by the Jewish historian, Joseph ha-Kohen, is a better date. 

 

Too, there is the reality that several years were involved in the construction.  Therefore, the case can readily be made that the rebuilding took place over the years 1537-1541 or some slight variation of those dates.  This possibility seems to be the better option (as will be established below). 

 

 

Linking to Current Dates 

 

If his building order was as early as 1527-1532, some 483 years expire in 2010-2015.  In this context, the order and building of Jerusalem by Suleiman would have started the count of 483 years that ends in 2010-2015 (which is a most fascinating period of time, as will now be shown). 

 

If perchance, Suleiman did give his first and/or initial restoration orders as early as 1527, this opens the door for the return of YESHUA in 2010.  The basis for this projection is the 40 years of trial needed on Jerusalem (per Ezek 4:6)--as will now be discussed. 

 

The old city fell into Jewish hands in the spring of 1967 (year one in the Jubilee count).  Forty years by progressive counting for the trial ends in 2007 (which could be the mid point year when the Beast seizes Jerusalem and defiles the Temple).  Another 40 years can be marked off from 1973 (the last Israeli-Arab war) to 2013 by progressive counting.  The year 2013 may be the final Gog and Magog conflict over Jerusalem. 

 

Alternatively, some important things happened with the Jews in Jerusalem in all of the years from 1968 to 1979 which very easily could start the 40 years countdown on Yehudah (as will be discussed in comments to follow).  Thus, 2007-2018 could all likewise allow this forty years lapse. 

 

Since the Jubilee comes in 2015-2016, it well could be that 2015 is the acceptable year of YHWH mentioned by YESHUA (Lu 4:19).  Thus, The MESSIAH could come as late as 2015.  If the recovery of fleshly Yisrael happens at Sukkot in the fall of 2015 (to return them to Palestine), it might be that YESHUA comes in the fall of 2014. 

 

 

2023--A Key Year 

 

In any case, Suleiman’s rebuilding orders were all perhaps issued by (or perhaps even in) 1539-1540, which is also a most interesting time frame in the context of Yechezkel’s dating scheme. 

 

Counting 483 years from 1539, one comes to 2022 CE.  By counting from 1540, one arrives at 2023 CE (by progressive counting).  The year 2023 CE is some 20 years from 2003 (paralleling Yehoyakhin’s 25th year of captivity), if 2003 CE is Yechezkel’s 30th year and Yehoyakhin’s fifth year. 

 

Seemingly, Yechezkel’s 50th year is very relevant in the dating scheme because Ezekiel 40:1 dates a following series of events that seem to start to occur in the 25th year of Yehoyakhin’s captivity (which was about 14 years after Jerusalem was smitten by the Babylonians in the ante-type). 

 

If the type allows for the Beast’s final smiting of Jerusalem in 2009-2010 (as is possible), fourteen years (by progressive counting) takes one to 2023-2024 (or to 2022-2023 by inclusive counting). 

 

Thus, the series of events in Daniel 9:25-27 may focus on the measuring and possible restoration and/or rebuilding of Jerusalem in an obviously future time frame (as described, just before or in Ezek 40:1-44:31). 

 

Interestingly, the Maccabees also began a restoration of Jerusalem in about their 16th year (or possibly, in their 17th year, as there may be some confusion on this date), following the set up of the abomination of desolation (I Macc 2:1-14).  If this Satanic abomination of desolation occurs in 2007, sixteen years later (by inclusive counting) takes one to 2022 CE (by progressive counting, the date is 2023). 

 

While the books of the Maccabees are not in the Scriptural canon (per Judaism or Protestantism), they may be very important in defining the age end (as noted earlier). 

 

 

Nechemyah Too 

 

There is still one more important confirmation of this dating arrangement.  It concerns the ante-typical rebuilding by Nechemyah.  Nehemiah 1:1 opens with him in Shushan, Persia in the 9th month of Darius’ 20th year (which just happens to be the 49th year of the Jubilee). 

 

He became apprehensive over Jerusalem and obtained a commission to go there as the new governor.  He did so and took action to rebuild the wall by the 25th day of the 6th month--seemingly, of Darius’ 20th year (Neh 6:15). 

 

As discussed earlier, there are real problems with the dating process used by the Medes and Persians.  It would be easy to assume that Darius’ years ran from Ethanim to Ethanim, but this idea does not correspond to the dating in Haggai 1:1, 2:1, and 2:10 where the 6th month precedes the 7th and 9th months (which could be a statement of the dates in the vein of a Hebrew religious year). 

 

As a minimum, one must conclude that the difference from Nehemiah 1:1 and 6:15 covers almost a year in duration (as the Berkeley “Modern Language Bible,” p. 494-499, gives it as a matter of fact).  Therefore, the building in Nehemiah 6:15 might have happened in Darius’ technical 21st year. 

 

If Darius’ years would start in 2003, it might mean that his 20th year could occur in 2022 and his 21st year in 2023 (by inclusive counting). 

 

 

A Convergence 

 

The point here is that the “approximate” dates of 2022-2023 CE may offer a convergence for Yechezkel’s 50th year, Darius’ 20th-21st years and the Maccabees’ 16th-17th years (on the premise that 2007 could be Yechezkel’s 34th year, Darius’ 5th year and the Maccabees 1st year). 

 

Actually, it matters not at all if all of these dates only fall in the period 2020-2027.  They manifestly connect to the 483 years allocated to Suleiman’s rebuilding orders.  If this correlation has any relevance, it theoretically validates 2003 CE (or perhaps even 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 or 2008 CE) as being Yechezkel’s 30th year. 

 

Just as Yechezkel’s first witness covered seven years to the fall of Jerusalem to the Beast’s ante-type of the first fall (Yehoyakhin’s fifth to the twelfth years of his captivity, c561 BCE to 554 BCE), it seems that the final witness also may cover seven years to the final fall of Jerusalem to the typical Beast and the return of YESHUA (starting anytime from 2003 CE on forward). 

 

However, there still remains one possible fly in the ointment in this line of thought.  As noted above, many analysts try to date Suleiman’s command for the rebuilding in 1537 CE (though this date can be disputed).  As noted above, the best date of all is possibly the perception of the Jewish historian, Joseph ha-Kohen (who put the date at 1540). 

 

If, by chance, the 1540 date has a problem (again, as it may possibly have, per hindsight), the student of truth may easily fall back on the 1538 or 1539 dates as also offering possibilities. 

 

Obviously, actual events in 2000-2002 seemed to make those years out of the question for Yechezkel’s 30th year.  Hence, 2003 (or later) may be the better date for Yechezkel’s 30th year.  If 1539-1540 is correct (for Suleiman’s orders/work), it would then calculate 483 years as expiring in 2022-2023 (by progressive counting). 

 

 

Going On 

 

Remarks to follow have been compiled on the premise that 2003 and later (up to 2010) are plausible for Yechezkel’s 30th year.  In comments to follow, this writer will function and work on the premise that perhaps this correlation between Suleiman’s command and the age end does exist and does allow 2003 or later as Yechezkel’s 30th year. 

 

Also, as a product of hindsight, it is important to note that a number of calamities did come upon the age ending Yisrael on the 15th day of Bul and 10th day of Teveth in the year 2000 (as will be addressed in a later chapter herein).  These troubles must be significant and could be indicative of the “beginnings” or first signs of Yakov’s Trouble. 

 

With Yechezkel’s 30th year properly established, it is possible to go ahead and date all of Ezekiel as well as any other prophecies which are dated in respect to the kings of Yisrael and Yehudah (one must remember that the books of Samuel and Kings are both historical and prophetical). 

 

In the context that Daniel 9:25 might encompass a future rebuilding or restoration of Jerusalem, Ezekiel 40-44 clearly provides the epitome for such an event. 

 

In fact, it might be that the restoration of the old city and the walls and the gates, under Suleiman, was a preliminary, phase I effort which culminates with YESHUA and New Jerusalem, starting in possibly 2022 (with a gap in construction of 483 years) and running on until 2030 CE or later. 

 

If this is true, it also would allow that the Beast’s final smiting of Jerusalem could occur in Yechezkel’s 37th year (in possibly the fourth and fifth months), perhaps preceding YESHUA’s possible return to Jerusalem in Bul of that year.  With The MESSIAH’s return to Jerusalem, there will be some delay (to be discussed later) until the typical Gog and Magog event occurs (Ezekiel 38 and Revelation 20). 

 

The year 2022 could also be important for another reason.  As outlined earlier herein, Babylon, under Belshazzar, fell to Darius (the Mede) and the Medes and Persians near 500 BCE--after seeing mene, mene, tekel, upharsin (Dan 5:25--which adds up to 2,520 gerahs).  From 499 BCE to 2022, there are 2,520 years.  This close of a tie to Yehoyakhin’s 25th year and Daniel 9:25 could be significant. 

 

Alternatively, it must be said that Dan 5:1-30 could also be dated to 503 BCE as this writer has it on his chronology.  This would put the end of the Babylonian system in 2018 CE.  If this is true, it would date Belshazzar’s first year in 506 BCE (per Dan 7:1).  The context of Dan 7 could spell out the return of YESHUA and the establishment of His kingdom 2520 years later in 2015, the Jubilee year. 

 

 

The 390-395 Years, Revisited   

 

If the above cited dates are significant, they would seem to allow that the 390-395 years count-down on the House of Yisrael began in 1610 (when Jamestown was first abandoned and re-instituted, as outlined in a prior chapter) and could run to around 2005 (perhaps just before Yisrael’s final trouble commences). 

 

The differentiation between 390 and 395 years has been described in previous comments (in the vein that the 390-year count in the ante-typical Yehudah evidently started in the fourth year [or fifth year from the actual division of the kingdom, if the division occurred in Shlomo’s last year). 

 

Finally, it is important to note that publication of the famous King James or Authorized Version of YAH’s Word in English was completed and distributed in 1611-1612.  Historians generally give this date as 1611, but 1612 might could be a better date for its final completion and distribution to the public. 

 

The “Oxford Illustrated History of Britain” (p. 343) has a photograph of the title page of supposedly the first edition.  This source says that the KJV was printed “at London by Robert Barker Printer to the Kings most Excellent Marshal Anno Dom. 1612.”  An “Encyclopedia of World History” (p. 401) and other authoritative sources note that the KJV translators completed their work in 1611 and the first edition came out that year. 

 

Possibly, the translation went to the printer in 1611 and he may have even gotten a first edition out that year.  But his primary work and distribution was possibly accomplished in 1612--at whatever date and certainly by March 24th of the next year, which technically ended in 1613. 

 

Of course, 1611 probably is correct for the first edition and the title page in the “Oxford Illustrated History of Britain” was actually of a second edition, as there is evidence indicating that indeed the first edition did come out in 1611 (allegedly, the 1611 edition had many errors and mistakes which necessitated correction/revision, as came forth in the 1612 edition). 

 

Some 390 years elapse from 1611-1612 to 2001-2002.  But since there was a three to five-year grace period associated with Yisrael, in the count of 390 years, it could allow a slippage from 2001 to 2006 or even to 2007. 

 

In any event, this condition may authenticate the second mechanism suggested above in that the trouble in Yechezkel’s 30th year must start on Yisrael upon her completion of 390 years of accountable sin--which could be 2003 or evidently more correctly in 2004-2008 (following the completion of the grace period and 390 years of accountable sin). 

 

While this writer is using the 390-year prophesy as primary in dating, it must be said that the years 1607, 1610, 1611 and 1612 all also can be relevant in the sense of a 400-year time prophecy concluding in 2007, 2010, 2011 and/or 2012. 

 

Since the Pilgrims settled New England in 2020, it is interesting that 390 years later occurs in 2010.  So the 390-year prophecy can easily extend to 2010 and be absolutely compatible with the several 400-year prophecies. 

 

 

The Bottom Line

 

In view of the possibility that there will be a prophetic message or witness to Yisrael, starting in Yechezkel’s 30th year and concluding in his 31st year, it seems plausible that the primary effects of Yakov’s Trouble would not actually start until after the preliminary prophetic aspects of Yechezkel’s witness are completed. 

 

In conclusion, maybe any coming prophetic witness of Yechezkel runs from about Yechezkel’s 30th to 31st years.  Yakov’s Trouble may start in Yechezkel’s 30th year but intensifies and becomes more intense in the fall of Yechezkel’s 31st year. 

 

Maybe the final siege starts in the fourth month of Yechezkel’s 32d year and concludes in the summer of Yechezkel’s 33d year.  Thus, Yakov’s Trouble will run seven years (from Yechezkel’s 30th-31st years to Yechezkel’s 37th-38th years). 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 493--Yechezkel’s 30th Year II

 

 

The Daniel 11 Proof 

 

There are some more prophecies which also approximately authenticate 2003-2010 as Yechezkel’s 30th year (and Yehoyakhin’s 5th year).  All of these prophecies come together in the vein of an invasion of the Middle East by the Beast’s army--just before the return of YESHUA and the events associated with Jerusalem, right after YESHUA’s return. 

 

Daniel 11 gives an age end scenario of a series of confrontations between the age ending European Beast power (the King of the North), as opposed to a Southern Moslem alliance (called the King of the South).  This Kingdom of the South seems to include the Arab powers in Egypt, Saudi Arabia, North Africa, etc and possibly the non-Arab Muslim powers in South Central Asia--like Iran, Afghanistan, Pakistan, etc. 

 

Turkey, Albania and Muslim states in the old USSR may be associates of some sort (although some of these states, like Albania and Turkey, might end up as a part of United Europe).  In any case, this Muslim empire (in the sense of the daughter of the South--Dan 11:6) could be an enormous confederation and run the gauntlet of Islamic nations from Morocco in the West to Bangladesh and Indonesia in the East. 

 

In the age end environment, this Southern power (evidently, in connection with an Eastern Asian power, which later appears to join in or leads a revolt against the Beast government) seems to initiate some actions to break free of the world government, headed up by the European King of the North. 

 

This last big invasion of the South by the King of the North is outlined in Daniel 11:40-45.  Apparently, the South does something to upset the balance of power.  So the North sends her army down to invade much of the South, to include Egypt and the present state of Israel (this probably happens in Yechezkel’s 34th-37th years--Ezek 24-31). 

 

Edom, Ammon and Moab (modern Jordan?) will initially escape this thrust and Libya and Ethiopia seem to quickly abandon whatever loyalties or status they have had with the Kingdom of the South to evidently ally with or give support to the King of the North (possibly in the phrase “at his steps,” per the “Soncino Books of the Bible,” Dan 11:40-45). 

 

This revolt and invasion occur just before YESHUA returns.  Daniel does not seem to date it.  But the related Asian revolt is elsewhere covered in the sixth trumpet of Revelation 9:14-19 (or rather, just before the sixth trumpet sounds).  Zekharyah also seems to link into this last conquest of Judea by the Northern power, but does not date it--beyond making it clear that it is very near the end (Zech 14:2). 

 

However, in the sense that the prior Babylonian and Roman invasions and conquests of Jerusalem were ante-types for this final event, it is not hard to see that its last conquest of Jerusalem can take place in Yechezkel’s 37th year (maybe in the fourth and fifth months). 

 

Possibly, the Beast army invades in the fourth month and destroys the city.  The destruction of the Third Temple could occur in the fifth Scriptural month (in Yechezkel’s 37th year, just preceding YESHUA’s first return in the seventh month of that year). 

 

 

Verified by Yechezkel and the Yehoshua Ante-type

 

The book of Ezekiel seems to confirm the dates for this final conquest of Yisrael.  Per Yechezkel, the 390 days siege might unfold in his 32d year and end the next year when Yisrael falls and the Israelite people enter captivity.  But there seems to be some possible question about which year YESHUA returns (although it seems to actually be revealed in Ezekiel). 

 

The solution to this enigma involves the possibility that Yechezkel’s 30th year is 2003 and that the next Jubilee occurs in 2015-2016 (as established in preceding comments)--which must be compared with the situation with Yehoshua (Joshua) when he led Yisrael into the promise land to conquer it. 

 

Yisrael entered Canaan in a 41st year of a Jubilee.  Per the chronology of Yehoshua (Josh 14:10, with a note on Joshua in the “Soncino Books of Bible,” p. 83), the conquest of Canaan took seven years (from the 41st year of a Jubilee to the 48th year). 

 

If YESHUA returns in 2010, it would be interesting to anticipate that He will fight a long war with the various nations before He finally secures Palestine and the people of Yisrael for the distribution of land as possibly allowed in the Jubilee of 2015-2016.  The problem arises in that His return in 2010 will not permit a seven-year war before the Jubilee. 

 

 

The Maccabees 

 

The possible solution here is suggested in the books of the Maccabees where Judas Maccabees (who was an ante-type savior of The Coming YESHUA, I Macc 9:21) fights about a three and one-half years war (after securing and cleansing the Temple) with the nations before destroying the army of the Beast’s ante-type on Adar 13 of the Maccabees’ seventh year by inclusive counting (I Macc 6:38-7:43). 

 

In other words, instead of fighting a seven-year war (as happened with the OT Yehoshua on entering Canaan land), it might be that YESHUA will fight a three and one-half years war with the various opposing nations--culminating with the Gog and Magog invasion from the East). 

 

Therefore, YESHUA may accomplish the ultimate fulfillment of the prophecies of Yehoshua and indeed even the books of the Maccabees.  He will fight the nations for a period of three and one-half years before the Jubilee. 

 

Probably, there will be two purposes in these military attacks.  First, Satan will arouse the nations to attack YESHUA once He enters Jerusalem.  Second, YESHUA will do what Yehoshua and the Israelites always failed to do.  Yisrael was supposed to invade and conquer the land grant in the promise to Yisrael and kill or expel all of the mongrel peoples.  She failed to do this.  YESHUA will do it. 

 

When YESHUA returns, He comes to conquer the land grant to Yisrael so that Yisrael can be returned to her homeland.  The mongrel peoples from the river of Egypt (probably the Nile, although some suggest the Wadi el Arish) to the Euphrates will be upset.  This land can include all of Palestine, Lebanon, Jordan, the Sinai, the Arabian peninsula, Asia Minor and Syria and parts of Egypt, Iraq, Turkey, etc. 

 

YESHUA will surely kill all of these people or expel them from the land to make it ready for the grant to Yisrael who will soon be coming home.  YESHUA will do what Yehoshua and the Israelites all failed to do. 

 

This war of conquest by YESHUA will evidently last a total of three and one-half years (with a preceding Jewish revolt against the Beast for over three years to complete the seven years type and fulfillment of Yehoshua’a earlier conquest of Canaan).  Surely, the Gog/Magog conflict happens at or near the end of this period 

 

Manifestly, once YESHUA is in Jerusalem, it is probable that the various remnants of the Beast army and the remaining armies in the nearby Muslim states all attack YESHUA in Jerusalem (Ezek 25-31; Rev 19:11-15, 21). 

 

Evidently, these surrounding nations are aroused and motivated and maybe even led by Satan.  YESHUA will have to fight these armies, perhaps two years before Jerusalem is finally secured in a peaceful environment (I Macc 4:15-6:31).

 

 

Another Possibility 

 

There is another feature of this correlation with the Maccabees which might also be relevant in this discussion.  The Beast’s ante-type, Antiochus Epiphanies, commenced the great tribulation and defiled the Temple and set the abomination of desolation up in about the year 168 BCE (I Mac 1:41-59).  This was about his 9th year in power. 

 

The first year of the Maccabees, when they led the revolt against Epiphanies, occurred that year.  They fought the Greeks about three years before finally securing the Temple Mount and cleansing it (I Mac 2:69-4:52). 

 

They then fought their three and one-half years’ war against the Greeks before finally defeating the Greek Army on Adar 13 of about 162 BCE (correctly, in early 161 BCE, I Macc 5:1-7:43).  These two efforts seem to have encompassed about seven years (from 168 BCE to 161 BCE). 

 

There was a short peace and the Greeks resumed their attacks upon the Jews--which brought about the death of Judas Maccabees in about 160 BCE (I Macc 9:21).  In about 160 BCE, the Greeks put down the rebellion (which had lasted about seven years).  Thus, it might be that there is some correlation here to the age end. 

 

Maybe, the ultimate Beast imposes the great tribulation and sets up the abomination of desolation in the mid point of the last heptad (which would be 2007, if Yechezkel’s 30th year is in 2003 and the last heptad starts in 2003).  Maybe the Jewish revolt commences that year (in 2007, which is the 41st year of the Jubilee) and runs about seven years. 

 

By using the dates in Ezekiel, it is possible to relate them to the years from 2003 to 2015.  Yehoshua entered the land some eight years before the Jubilee.  Eight years before 2015 takes one to 2007 or Yechezkel’s 34th year (which might see the beginnings of the Jewish revolt).  

 

Ezekiel 33:21 reports that the fall of Jerusalem occurred (in type) before the tenth month of Yehoyakhin’s 12th year or Yechezkel’s 37th year (Ezek 33:21).  Of course, we know from history and the other Scriptures that the actual fall of Jerusalem to the Beast occurred earlier in the fourth and fifth months.  It just took some five months for the word to reach Yechezkel in Babylon. 

 

In the typical fulfillment, possibly the Beast’s final attack and smiting of Jerusalem also does happen in the fourth and fifth months of Yechezkel’s 37th year.  Of course, this reference in Ezekiel 33:21 to the fall of Jerusalem in the tenth month could well be a report upon the fall of Jerusalem to the conquering YESHUA (Who probably enters the old city around Bul 15 of Yechezkel’s 37th year). 

 

The Gog/Magog conflict happens still later and following the return of Yisrael to the land and likely near the end of YESHUA’s war with the nations.  Probably, much of the physical return of Yisrael to the land happens after YESHUA’s conquest of the Jerusalem area (after the 8th month of Yechezkel’s 37th year). 

 

Based on the Maccabees ante-type, it might be that fleshly Yisrael returns in Yechezkel’s 38th year (in c164 BCE, per the ante-type of YESHUA at I Macc 5:17-23). 

 

Putting these events to Ezekiel, it might mean that much of Yisrael’s physical return occurs in Yechezkel’s 38th-39th years and that the Gog/Magog conflict happens as late as his 40th-44th years.  While these years seem late, it must be noted that Yisrael has returned and dwells safely in the land when the Gog attack (with the Eastern army) takes place (Ezek 38:1-17; Zech 14:12; Rev 20:7-8; I Macc 6:38-7:43). 

 

With this basic outline, it is possible to find evidence of most of the key events associated with the age end in the book of Ezekiel and even in dating the events (although the messages are often obscured and quite complicated to interpret). 

 

If the final 390 days siege starts in Yechezkel’s 32d year, then the first embargo on Yisrael may come on the 10th day of the 10th month of his 31st year (to be described later).  Whenever this first embargo occurs, it may subside in 40 days or so (before erupting into the final siege in the next year). 

 

 

Alternatively

 

While the above example used 2003 for Yechezkel’s 30th year, it goes without saying that any year thereafter up to 2010 can also be very plausible. 

 

The year 2007 looks appealing since it represents forty years after the Jews took control of old Jerusalem.  Either 2007 or 2008 would allow the land of Yisrael to return to its real owners in the Jubilee of 2015-2016. 

 

 

Judging Satan 

 

Following the Gog/Magog attack, Satan is at last judged (Rev 20:10).  Very conveniently, Yechezkel records a coming judgment upon Pharaoh (who is clearly an ante-type of the water beast or Satan) and the various nations which attack YESHUA in the form of a funeral dirge that is uttered in advance (before all of the destructions actually occur, per “Soncino Books of the Bible,” p. 217, on Ezekiel 32:18).  

 

This dirge is dated to the first and evidently the fifteen days of the twelfth month of Yehoyakhin’s twelfth year--which could possibly fall around 2010-2017 (Ezek 32:1-32).  All of these dates are laid out in a sequential arrangement in Appendix E herein.  The point of them is that they collectively would seem to allow Yechezkel’s 30th year could perhaps occur as early as 2003-2010. 

 

 

Making the Connections to Darius 

 

It seems thinkable to correlate Yechezkel’s years to those of Darius, although the process seems to be somewhat complicated. 

 

With the fall of Jerusalem to the Babylonians, the dating methods in use with the Judean kings largely ended (except for Yehoyakhin’s captivity, discussed earlier).  In the context of the return from the exile, the dating switched to a series of dates used in conjunction with the Persian kings.  The first one mentioned is that of Cyrus, which has been briefly assessed in prior comments. 

 

But otherwise, the most important dates are associated with Darius in the books of Ezra, Nehemiah Haggai, and Zechariah, (and the focus upon building the Second Temple, which became the ante-type for the Third Temple). 

 

While the writings of Ezra, Nechemyah and Haggai are all prophetic from the standpoint of the dating and rebuilding of the (Third) Temple, Zekharyah is pregnant with enormous future events in the context of the last seven years (and particularly events taking place in the Jerusalem area). 

 

In any case, if Darius’ second year can be approximately dated, it lays out the rest of the essential age ending dates for the student of truth.  However, as outlined in the former comments on chronology, there are some problems in defining the Persian years or at least Darius’ second year (in terms of starting and ending dates). 

 

 

The Jubilee 

 

It is interesting and perhaps relevant that the first year of the reign of “Darius Hystaspes Artaxerxes” was about the 30th year in a Jubilee cycle (which had commenced earlier in Cyrus’ first year and his decree allowing for the return of the Jews to Palestine and the rebuilding of the Temple).  The second year of Cyrus actually saw the laying of the Temple’s foundation.  So it allows a thirty-year lapse to Darius 2. 

 

While the full ramifications of this reality might not be understood by this writer, it is fascinating that there is this focus upon 30 years in both the book of Ezekiel and in dating the events associated with Darius.  Possibly, this 30-year reality could be very significant and be the key factor to tie Darius to Yechezkel. 

 

In background on this course, it should be noted that Cyrus’ first year was the first year in a Jubilee cycle.  The Jewish Israelites returned to Canaan that year, built an altar (in the seventh month), resumed the daily sacrifice and started making preparations to rebuild the Temple (Ezra 3:1-7). 

 

The actual Second Temple foundation was laid in the second month of the next year (per Ezra 3:8-13, possibly in Cyrus’ 2nd year, depending upon how the Medeo-Persian years were defined under Cyrus). 

 

A later chapter herein will disclose the profound importance of this event prophetically.  Suffice to say, not only was the foundation of the Second Temple laid in the second Scriptural month, but the same thing seemingly happened with the First Temple (I Kg 6:1; II Chron 3:1-2)--evidently following an earlier building of an altar on the site, as also happened with the Second Temple (II Sam 24:25; Ezra 3:1-3). 

 

Importantly, the preparations for construction of both Temples were probably done the year preceding the year of actual construction of the foundation (I Kg 5:3-18; II Chron 2:1-18; Ezra 3:6-7).  Also, for the Second Temple, some of this preparation was possibly done in Darius’ first year, which was about the 30th year in the then current Jubilee cycle (as noted earlier).  The same thing may happen with the Third Temple. 

 

Thus, actual work on the Second Temple at its Jerusalem site commenced in the early part of possibly Cyrus’ second year (c483 BCE).  Then trouble began at the site by the Samaritans or evidently more correctly by genetic Amalekites, who were either geographical Samaritans or persons who had somewhat assimilated with the Cuthean Samaritans (Ezra 4:1-4). 

 

Work was stopped on the Temple and it remained halted for about 30 or so years.  It remained stopped until the second year of Darius (c454 BCE) when construction recommenced in about the ninth month of Darius’ 2nd year.  As just noted above, it appears that some preparation for this construction may have been accomplished earlier.  So, what is the significance of this 30-year gap in construction? 

 

 

Contemporary Times 

 

In background, the Temple Mount came into Jewish hands in 1967 as a part of the Six-Day War.  The Temple Mount complex was in their hands.  They could have immediately began rebuilding the Temple.  Many religious Jews pushed for the work at that time and in the immediate years following the seizure of the Temple Mount. 

 

But instead of proceeding to build the Temple, the Israelis were fearful of political repercussions and soon turned the site over to the Muslims (plus, the reality that many of the leading Jews were secularist Amalekites, who were fundamentally opposed to the idea of a Jewish Temple, insured no Jewish push for a Third Temple). 

 

The Aug 25, 2000, “Jerusalem Post” (p. 9) had an article by Michael S. Arnold on “Faithful to the bitter end?” which discussed the events after the Six-Day War that led to the Muslim control of the Temple Mount.  With that war in 1967, the Temple Mount was in the hands of the Israeli Army.  The Israeli flag flew for awhile over the Dome of the Rock on the mount. 

 

Soon thereafter, Defense Minister Moshe Dayan met with the Wakf Muslim leaders at the Al-Aksa Mosque and agreed to allow them to continue the administration of the Temple Mount.  However, Dayan set two conditions.  The first was that the Muslims would not allow any rabble-rousing Moslem talks/sermons against the Jews. 

 

And two, Dayan stipulated that the Jews would be allowed complete freedom of access to the mount without limitation or payment.  The Muslims agreed to both of Dayan’s stipulations.  Later that year (1967), the Israeli Army Chaplain, Rav Shlomo Goren, led Jewish prayers on the Temple Mount. 

 

Despite the presence of the agreement granting Jewish access to the mount, at some point in time, both the Muslims and the Israelis abandoned the provisions of the two stipulations promulgated by Dayan. 

 

Specifically, the Muslims adopted a rule that Orthodox or religious appearing Jews (wearing a hat or kippah [skullcap], beard, tzitzityot, etc) could only go onto the mount while accompanied by the Wakf and a police guard.  Even then, they were not allowed to worship or say prayers.  In fact, if they even moved their lips in what might be a prayer, the Muslims evicted them immediately. 

 

Significantly, the Israelis gave in to the Muslims and abandoned any option of religious Jews even going onto or praying on the mount.  This started to happen on December 19, 1968, when a group of religious Jews were arrested while praying on the mount. 

 

An Israeli Court on April 15, 1969, continued the restrictions in a civil suit against the arresting officers (“The Coming Last Days Temple,” p. 422-423).  An appeal of this decision was made to the Israeli Supreme Court; where, on September 9, 1970, the court decided not to adjudicate the case (ibid, p. 604).  Effectively, the court closed off any further legal efforts for religious Jews to have access to the mount. 

 

Yet, despite the police ban, Gershon Salomon of the Temple Mount Faithful group (discussed earlier) and some students proceeded to pray on the Temple Mount on March 11, 1971 (ibid, p. 604). 

 

On August 8, 1973, Knesset member Binyamin Halevi and Rav Louis Rabinowitz both prayed on the mount in defiance of the ban (ibid, p. 604).  This seems to be the last date that religious Jews prayed and worshipped on the mount in that time-frame.  The Yom Kippur war came in the fall of 1973; and from then on, the mount was off-limits to religious Jews. 

 

 

The Stoppage

 

The next series of important events occurred in 1976.  On March 8th of that year, Salomon and Rabinowitz tried to lead a group of worshippers onto the mount and were turned away by police (ibid, p. 604).  A March 17, 1976, District Court ruling upheld the legal right of Jews to pray on the mount if the Religious Affairs Office could regulate such and still maintain public order (ibid, p. 604). 

 

Since 1976, numerous groups of Jews have tried to pray on the mount.  They have been consistently turned away by police (although this reaction seems to have somewhat ended in 2003, as noted earlier herein).  Thus, events of 1973-1979 confirmed that religious Jews were manifestly prohibited from going upon the mount to worship. 

 

Not only did the Muslims stop religious Jewish access and prayers, but the Jewish Rabbinical authorities also took the same stance on the premise that Jews on the mount might inadvertently violate the site of the so-called “Holy of the Holies” where the actual Ark of the Covenant stood. 

 

 

The 30 Years 

 

Hence, Jewish religious access to the Temple Mount officially ended for all purposes in about 1973-1979.  Therefore, from the years 1973 to 2003 or 1979 to 2009 (by progressive counting) or from 1974 to 2003 or 1980 to 2009 (by inclusive counting), Jewish religious people and practices were not allowed upon the Temple Mount.  This period is approximately 30 years. 

 

Question, is it possible that this approximate 30-year period (in which Jewish religious access to the Temple Mount was halted) links in some way to the situation with Cyrus 2 and Darius 2 in about 484-454 BCE when Temple construction was halted?  At the moment, this writer suggests that there could be a possible connection in that the first event covering the Second Temple might be prophetic of the coming Third Temple. 

 

While there can be a difference between these two events in terms of the Jubilee years (Cyrus 2 was year 2 in a Jubilee--while 1973 was year 7 in the Jubilee), it is fascinating that both periods lasted around 30 years (it is hard to precisely tie this down because of the Persian king dating problems, mentioned in a former chapter). 

 

Anyway, the likely Christian trouble at the Temple (starting in the sixth month of Yechezkel’s 31st year or sometime thereafter--Ezek 8-9) indicates that the Temple probably has been or is being rebuilt by then. 

 

Since the events outlined in Darius 2 may correlate to Yechezkel’s 30th year, it is clear that they might occur in 2004-2008 CE.  Also, Darius 4 (Zech 7:1) seems to precede Yechezkel’s 34th year (when the Temple is defiled).  So Darius’ 4th year must be dated before Yechezkel’s 34th year. 

 

 

Darius’ Two and Yechezkel’s Thirtieth 

 

Actually, as things worked out in 2000 and in 2002, it seems that a later year might be the year that is nearest to Darius one.  By counting from the Jewish restrictions on the Temple Mount, from 1973 to 1979, it may allow a progressive counting of 30 years to produce Yechezkel’s 30th year and Darius’ 2d year. 

 

It appears that inclusive counting would be justified instead of progressive counting) if the event was predicated on a Jubilee count (as Darius’ 1st year was about the 30th year in the Jubilee, based on inclusive counting) and Ezekiel 1:1 is worded in a way suggesting an inclusive count (“in the thirtieth year, in the fourth month,” which implies an inclusive count to that point). 

 

If the count is made on the basis of the thirty years lapse between the laying of the Second Temple’s foundation in Cyrus 2 to the resumption of construction in Darius 2, the count would likely be by progressive counting. 

 

 

More 

 

Importantly, a later chapter will report that Jewish preparations to rebuild the Temple actually happened in 2000, 2001, 2002 and 2003 (which would allow construction to start in earnest in 2004-2008).  Thus, things are building up for Darius 2 to soon happen. 

 

The only apparent hitch in this sequence is the question of a red heifer (as discussed earlier).  One was born in Israel in March 2002.  She will not be ready for sacrifice until the summer of 2004 (which may limit the construction of the Temple till then or later).  Of course, the Jews may already have other red heifers on hand or can acquire one very quickly from overseas, if need be.  So this is not an insurmountable problem. 

 

If this dating holds, it allows one to almost date all of the other age ending events. 

 

The interesting thing about this possibility is that it makes sense and completely jives with all other necessary or relevant dates.  By researching the dates given for Darius after the exile, one is able to completely calculate all of the particulars associated with the rebuilding of the Temple. 

 

This includes the attainment of Jewish religious access to the mount, the completion of an approximate seven-year covenant between the Jews and a world power, the building of the altar on Moriah, the resumption of the daily sacrifice, the laying of the foundation, an interruption in the building, the resumption of work, the ultimate completion of the Third Temple, the possible work of two preliminary prophets, the certain work of two final witnesses, and the commencement of a wide-spread drought (to be later discussed). 

 

As briefly cited above, the final typical interruption in the Third Temple construction may come in Yechezkel’s 30th-33d years (after construction commences)--possibly as wicked Christians (condemned in Ezekiel 8-9, as elsewhere described herein) and/or the Muslims as they commence their work of evil against the workers at the Temple site--paralleling the acts of the evil Samaritans/Amalekites of some 2,500 years ago (Ezra 4:1-24).  

 

Just as the Amalekites/Samaritans interfered in and successfully stopped the work on the Second Temple in the days of Ezra, it seems clear in Ezekiel 8-9 that the same thing happens in the construction of the Third Temple; except it will be Christians (and possibly some Muslims in the first efforts at interruption), likely under the leadership of an Amalekite pope and other leading Amalekite Christians. 

 

The halting of construction in the fifth century BCE was an ante-type of what is to come--first as another ante-type, in the context of the 30 years delay and more importantly as the type to probably start in Yechezkel’s 30th year--after the altar is built/the cornerstones are laid (which could happen in Yechezekel’s 29th-30th years). 

 

This whole projection quite naturally places extreme importance upon the dates in Ezra and Nehemiah and the latter prophets.  What happened with the Second Temple could happen with the coming Third Temple (except that this last time, it may be fulfilled in the context of interrupted days for the years of stoppage during Ezra’s time). 

 

 

To Recap Some Dates on the End 

 

As allowed in former comments, the siege trouble coming on the House of Yisrael nations is described in excruciating detail by Ezekiel, chapters 4-7.  It could start in earnest in the fourth month of Yechezkel’s 32d year (with a preceding embargo on about the 10th day of the 10th month of Yechezkel’s 31st year). 

 

Ezekiel 8:1 is dated on the fifth day of the sixth month of Yehoyakhin’s sixth year (or Yechezkel’s 31st year).  Thus, this date may occur before the siege commences.  While the words of the prophet may be uttered then, the fulfillment of these prophecies probably happen later (perhaps after the siege starts). 

 

The next important date from Yechezkel (Ezek 20:1) is the tenth day of the fifth month of Yehoyakhin’s seventh year (Yechezkel’s 32d year). 

 

As outlined earlier, any age end witness to Yisrael ends now while the House of Yisrael nations are probably under siege.  This date may also be a signal to show judgment upon Yisrael and her leaders--which might occur in the summer of Yechezkel’s 33d year (after the House of Yisrael falls). 

 

Actually, the final fall of the United States and the White British Commonwealth nations probably happens prophetically in Ezekiel 7 and evidently in some prophecies in Ezekiel 13-20 (to occur in Yechezkel’s 33d year). 

 

With the US and Britain out of the way (as protectors of the modern Israeli state), Russia and her Islamic allies make their invasion of the Middle East and the state of Israel in an ante-type of Ezekiel 38.  This invasion will probably come in the fall of Yechezkel’s 33d year.  It will be disastrous for the invaders when YHWH intervenes to cut them down on the battlefields. 

 

The world will take this as Armageddon and be ready for the arrival of Satan Gee-Zeus and his Christian rule, to be discussed later.  The last three and one half years of the age end Babylonian world will be an enormous, ecumenical, religious world, headed up by the Christian pope--as the world’s pastor.  And for some part of this period, Satan, as Gawd, sits in the Third Temple. 

 

Even the Muslims and Asians will join into this Christian world government to some extent, before eventually breaking from the system in perhaps Yechezkel’s 35th-37th years.  It is this coming break which precipitates the Beast man’s final conquest of Jerusalem in Yechezkel’s 37th year (probably in the fourth and fifth months), and the destruction of the Third Temple (just before YESHUA returns).  

 

In conclusion, it might be that the years 2003-2010 (from Aviv 1 to the next Aviv 1) may see Yechezkel’s 30th year and Darius’ second year.  Yechezkel’s 30th year may open the door to Yakov’s Trouble. 

 

The final siege on the House of Yisrael  may start in the 32d year and end with a conquest of the House of Yisrael (at least Yosef Yisrael) by the 17th day of the 4th month of the 33d year. 

 

Actually, the first signs of Yakov’s Trouble likely happened in 2000-2003, as will be described in later chapters.  Much work was also done in those years on rebuilding the Temple, as also will be addressed in later chapters. 

 

It is very possible that this scenario has some flaws in it.  Because of reasons cited heretofore, Yechezkel’s 30th year could easily slip forward to a later year.  But even if so, the basic outline presented above may prevail, with only a slippage of the dates to another year.  This writer has been wrong on a lot of things over my life, and may be wrong on this thing. 

 

 

More on the Alternative 

 

Before leaving the issue of Yechezkel’s 30th and Darius’ 2d years, more on a slippage must be laid on the table.  At Matthew 24:34 and Luke 21:32, the Word says something to the effect that all of the troubles just cited for the age end must take place before the end of the generation then living.  While this surely occurred in the first century, in the 40 years following YESHUA’s words, something is also called for in the age end. 

 

Though this writer has toyed with the years 1967 and/or 1973 as offering the possible start of the 40-year ending generation, there may be another course here which this writer has not yet grasped.  And next, there is the reality that YESHUA opened His ministry by teaching about the acceptable year of YHWH (Lu 4:19-21).  Many believe that year has to be a Jubilee year (thus implying 2015-2016 in the age end). 

 

With this backdrop, let us suppose that Yechezkel’s 30th year and Darius’ 2d year occur at 2007 (with the end of 390 years on Yosef Yisrael in 2010 [which would then be Yechezkel’s 33d year], as dating from the religious settlement at Plymouth Rock in 1620).  The KJV witness would last 400 years from 1611 to 2010 by inclusive counting. 

 

Yakov’s Trouble of 7 years would take one to the return of YESHUA in the fall of 2014.  Per the Maccabees’ history, the recovery of the lost, dispersed Israelites would start at the Jubilee of Sukkot 2015.  If YESHUA fights a seven-year war with the nations to impose His government, this could involve 2014-2021 (if the abomination of desolation goes up around 2010 to kick off the anticipated Jewish revolt). 

 

This might make the 483-year prophecy of Daniel 9:25-27 run from 1538 to 2021.  The fulfillment of the ante-type of the Maccabean fight against the Greeks would run from 2014 to 2018.  In this case, Yechezkel’s 33d year would occur in 2009 with the fall of the House of Yisrael coming soon near the close of the preceding 390 years (or by inclusive counting).  The Beast’s invasion of Yehudah could come the next year--2010. 

 

This scenario would accomplish almost all of the prophetic needs outlined heretofore except for the situation with Yehoshua and his seven-year fight for the land from the 41st to the 48th year of the Jubilee.  YESHUA may still fight the nations for seven years--except it may not be the exact fulfillment of the Yehoshua ante-type, per the Jubilee.  Too, the recovery of lost Yisrael in the Jubilee makes a lot of sense. 

 

Of course, all of this could very easily slip forward one more year from 2007 to 2008 for both Yechezkel’s thirty and Darius’ two in the sense that YESHUA would return in 2015 during the Jubilee (the acceptable year of YHWH). 

 

Finally, a huge amount of time and work have been put into the researching and profiling of this possible future history of Adam for it to be as accurate as possible at this time.  At the moment, it seems convincing to this writer. 

 

However, the purpose of this outline is not to establish firm dates; but rather, to encourage the student of truth to study YHWH’s Word and make his or her own interpretations. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 494--The 390-Day Test

 

 

The 390 Days 

 

The earlier mentioned Clinton-Lewinsky sodomy scandal reached its first plateau of significance on the night of Jan 15, 1998, when the Starr investigators interviewed Monica for the first time.  Since this meeting was after sundown, it effectively must be dated to January 16th (a 6th day of the week).  By January 17th, “Newsweek” magazine knew of the scandal. 

 

That night (which again must be Scripturally dated to the next day, January 18th, in the sun worship mode), “Newsweek” talked to the Starr people and were asked to wait before publishing the story, since the prosecutors were talking to Lewinsky about cooperating with the investigation.  “Newsweek” made the decision that first day of the week to not publish the report. 

 

Although the specifics are lacking to this writer, William Kristol, editor of the “Weekly Standard,” also had the story about the same time.  Reportedly, Kristol is one of the first persons to publicly mention it (“Final Judgment,” p. 637). 

 

Apparently, that day, January 18th, Matt Drudge had the story.  He first broke it publicly over his Internet web-site, evidently on January 18th (or perhaps the 19th).  With the story out on the Internet, the “Washington Post” decided to also publish it on January 19th.  Probably, they got it from their sister publication, “Newsweek” magazine, and confirmed it from the Matt Drudge report. 

 

They went to press with it and very early that night (not long after the start of the new day), it was on the news-stands.  When the American people woke up on the morning of January 20th, the scandal was public knowledge across the nation. 

 

 

Clinton Wins 

 

Time passed and on February 10, 1999, several so-called Republican moderate Senators joined the bloc of Democrat Senators to publicly announce that they would vote to acquit Clinton in the Senate trial over his perjury and obstruction of justice actions.  It was quite apparent that day that Slick had prevailed and would be acquitted. 

 

As more Senators expressed their support for Clinton on February 11th, it was certain that he would escape any punishment for his immorality.  Finally, the Senate voted on the removal question on the afternoon of February 12th.  Clinton was acquitted with only 45-50 Senators voting against him.  The Senate had a brief interruption with a reported bomb scare which delayed further Senate business for awhile. 

 

In any case, the official Senate notification of its acquittal of Clinton was not prepared until after sun down, which would effectively make it the next Scriptural day--February 13th.  This official notice was sent to the Attorney General and the Secretary of State.  At this point in time, the trial was all over. 

 

Jan 16, 1998, to Feb 10, 1999, involves a count of 390 days (by progressive counting).  Some 390 days elapsed from Jan 17, 1998, to Feb 11, 1999, (by progressive counting).  Jan 18, 1998, to Feb 12, 1999, is 390 days (by progressive counting).  From Jan 19, 1998, to Feb 13, 1999, some 390 days elapsed (by progressive counting). 

 

And from Jan 20, 1998, to Feb 13, 1999, a total of 390 days elapsed (by inclusive counting).  

 

The point of this is that almost anyway a person might want to count the days, the Clinton-Lewinsky scandal lasted 390 days before it officially ended (certainly, from the release of it on the Internet by Drudge to the Senate’s acquittal).  

 

Is 390 days a significant number in the context of a trial?  Yes, it is.  As outlined in previous remarks, The MOST HIGH commences His judgment on Yisrael after a period of sin, covering 390 “yomim,” which can mean days or years (Ezek 4:5). 

 

 

A Test on America 

 

This writer takes the position that this 390 yomim cover the test on America over the Clinton affair from the standpoint of 390 days. 

 

As elsewhere noted herein, 390 also covers a 390-year test on this nation--possibly from the time of publication of the KJV of the Book in 1611/1612 to Yechezkel’s 30th-33d years (when YHWH’s judgment may commence--with trouble developing from a foreign alliance made up of Russia, Iran, China, Latin America, etc). 

 

There is no question about it.  Former President Clinton was a disgrace to this nation.  He is the worst American leader of all, in America’s 390 plus years of history since the re-establishment of Jamestown in 1610.  He is immoral, corrupt, deceitful, dishonest and assuredly a murderer (no wonder Linda Tripp continues to fear for her life). 

 

The people of the United States were granted a block of 390 days to take a stand for righteousness and impeach and remove the evil Clinton.  As discussed in former comments, the public opinion polls actually rose with the revelation of his immorality.  They stayed at around the 66-70% approval range throughout the 390-day trial. 

 

The American public had many opportunities to redeem themselves by removing the corrupt Clinton; but steadfastly, refused that option.  The elections in the fall of 1998 made it plain that Clinton had effectively won the battle.  The people went to the polls and refused to vote for Congressmen and Senators who would pursue the impeachment and removal options. 

 

The House acted swiftly with its old majority to vote out a bill of impeachment on two articles; though defeating motions for two more articles (that were just as relevant and deserving).  It then was up to the Senate.  At that time, the people could have responded and forced the Senate to convict and remove Clinton.  But again, the public collectively supported Slick and conviction in the Senate was a lost cause. 

 

Please understand that all of the way through this Clinton-Lewinsky debacle, the truth was that there were a multitude of good reasons on why Clinton should have been removed. 

 

While his flagrant sodomy in the Oval Office of the President of the US was one of them, there were any number of other reasons which were profoundly of more importance (for example, his treason with China and his routine practice of dictatorial rule over America by executive order). 

 

 

More Interesting Factors 

 

Incidentally, there are still some other very fascinating 390-day mark offs of time associated with the evil Bill Clinton.  They will be discussed below in subsequent comments. 

 

What this amounts to is that the American people could have acted over a period of 390 days to begin cleaning up their act--by at least cleaning up the top representative of the people, the president.  Instead, the people chose to consistently approve of his lying, cheating, sodomy etc, as national policies of the United States.  Evidently, in 2000, judgment was set and will commence at some point in time. 

 

In another strange little quirk on this issue, the public celebrated the so-called “President’s Day” national holiday on February 14, 1999--exactly two days after the nation dismissed all of the complaints against its evil, national leader. 

 

Since the President’s Day holiday honors all presidents, it honored Slick Clinton, as well as all the other dishonest, crooked and evil presidents (like Abraham Lincoln, Franklin Roosevelt, John F. Kennedy, Lyndon Johnson and Richard Nixon). 

 

There was absolutely no question about it.  It was not the wretched, evil Clinton who was on trial for this period of 390 days.  Assuredly, it was the collective, general, American people who were on trial.  The American people were weighed in the balances of justice and were found to be wanting.  Consequently, they collectively sealed their own death warrants. 

 

The people had plenty of time to take some action and begin to clean their act up, if they were in any mood to do so.  Manifestly, this clean up would have had to start at the top with the most important government leader of all.  The conclusion is quite evident and cannot be missed. 

 

The American people are ready for judgment in the form of destruction, as outlined by the Hebrew prophets (particularly by Hosea, Amos, Yirmeyahu and Yechezkel).  When the trouble surely strikes, swift and hard, no one can accuse The MOST HIGH of being unfair to the American population.  America will deserve her coming punishment! 

 

 

More Blocks of 390 Days 

 

Per the Prophet Yechezkel, the 390 days (or years) block of time must carry an awful lot of weight prophetically for the United States (in the context of the US being the lost tribe of Ephraim).  Beyond the incredible linkage of the Clinton-Lewinsky sodomite scandal to 390 days, there are at least a few other blocks of 390 days which appear extremely relevant prophetically. 

 

For instance, from Feb 12, 1999 (the day of Clinton’s acquittal in the Senate), to Mar 7, 2000 (Aviv 1 of the new year), there was exactly 390 days (by inclusive counting).  Thus, 390 days passed with the Clinton trial.  And thereafter, another 390 more days passed, as another sort-of grace period. 

 

From Mar 7, 2000, to Apr 1, 2001, another 390 days passed.  What occurred that day?  Surely, it must have been significant (like maybe the loss that day of the US spy plane and crew to China?).  In any case, further 390-day mark offs occur/occurred on Apr 26, 2002; May 21, 2003; Jun 14, 2004; Jul 9, 2005; Aug 3, 2006; Aug 28, 2007; Sep 21, 2008; Oct 16, 2009; Nov 10, 2010; etc.  Any of these dates can apply to Ephraim Yisrael. 

 

All of this is interesting, but there is more to come. 

 

There is another curious display of something near 390 days from the time that the US electors in the electoral college formally voted for Bill Clinton (the week of Dec 16, 1996) for his second term and officially notified Congress where the electoral votes were counted and Clinton was formally elected (likely a few days after Dec 16th [i.e. Dec 18th in 2000]) until mid January 1998 (when the Lewinsky scandal first broke).  

 

 

Some Possible Age Ending Dates 

 

As elsewhere established herein, there are some interesting dates occurring in 2002-2012 which could be relevant to the end of the United States (and the role of Slick Clinton in arriving at that end).  Based upon the pattern with the fall of Yehudah to the Babylonians, it is possible to date the 390-395 years of Yehudah to around Yechezkel’s 30th to 33d years (as discussed earlier, and to be detailed in Appendices D and E). 

 

Per the Jewish example, it seems very likely that Ephraim-Yisrael will face her final end on or about the 17th day of the fourth month (the Jewish fast day, in perhaps Yechezkel’s 33d year) when her conquerors raise their flag and the nation is totally secured. 

 

Per II Kings 25:3-4, it is probable that the nation is broken up and all resistance falls on or about the 9th day of the fourth month, some eight days earlier.  The coming likely nuclear attack (to be described in a later chapter) probably occurs one month earlier--around the 9th day of the third month. 

 

Finally, Isaiah 7:3-8 has an interesting prophecy that also could tie here--in that Ephraim joins in some type of alliance or confederation with the Arameans (possibly the Netherlands or maybe even the Germans, in some definition) to oppose the Jews in Jerusalem in some way. 

 

 

The 65 Years or Days 

 

In the ante-type, this event happened some 65 years (which can mean days, in the age end) before Ephraim found herself totally broken up.  Since Ephraim America, in type, will have no military capability for any conflict with anyone, the best guess here is that Yeshayahu’s prophecy could suggest a situation where the US joins in with--say the Netherlands, in a UN resolution or proposal to censure the state of Israel in some way. 

 

At this time, the US (and surely Canada as well) will be in the late days of her 390-day siege which would have started in the fourth month of Yechezkel’s 32d year.  The president (whomsoever he is at that time) will be anxious to try something else to break the siege upon the US. 

 

Since the state of Israel is the primary enemy of the Russians and Islamics (who have promoted the siege), perhaps Jewish Israel can be attacked diplomatically in some manner to try to pacify the Russians and Muslims.  If Clinton does regain power over America, it is highly plausible that he could turn against the Jews at that time (after he has finished blaming and oppressing the Christian right wing for the trouble). 

 

Anyway, by applying these Scriptural dates to age ending Yisrael, one comes up with these secular dates.  The final age end siege may start in Yechezkel’s 32d year and end in Yechezkel’s 33d year. 

 

The point of this is that the 390-day trials on age ending Yisrael (after 2002, as outlined above) could be especially pertinent, in conjunction with the dates associated with the final end of Yisrael.  As just briefly noted above, the one on April 1, 2001, saw the Chinese force down a US plane on their land--which was not returned until the US apologized.  Something relevant can likewise occur on any of the cited dates. 

 

For example, in other comments herein, this study mentions the possibility of Big Brother (especially Clinton, if he can regain power, or Hillary, Bush, Powell, Rice or whomever) turning upon (double crossing) the Amalekite bankers/masters and/or them turning against the president to try to create a civil war and their assumption of direct, outright power in the US--as happened in Jerusalem during the Jewish-Roman war of 66-70 CE. 

 

It’s extremely plausible that someone in the US presidency could decide to go against the US Amalekite Jews and the Israelis all in one motion (in a double cross).  If so, the Amalekite Jew media will declare war on him and try to induce a revolution in the US streets to remove him (whomever the president may be).  Civil war could then break out, before the Russians and Chinese launch their siege or the nuclear strike. 

 

 

The Fire of Ezekiel 5:4  

 

There is an interesting reference in the important book of Ezekiel (5:4) which seems to correlate and/or connect to a US Big Brother government and the coming judgment upon America.  In the Book, The ELOHIM often uses the word “fire” (Hebrew “esh”) for judgment (in the context of correction, punishment, trial and test) upon people. 

 

Sometimes, this fire can be totally consuming (as with Sodom and Gomorrah).  And sometimes, it is refining and purifying (as with Yisrael and the election). 

 

The context of Ezekiel 5:1-5 is that Yechezkel was commanded to use a barber’s razor (sword) and cut off all of his hair.  In the first instance, the razor (sword) was to represent the coming Babylonian conquerors and the hair represented the people of Jerusalem in the coming destruction. 

 

But in the second instance, this event was prophetic for the eventual House of Yisrael (as Ezekiel 4:3 indicates and since Yechezkel was a watchman or prophet for the House of Yisrael--not Yehudah). 

 

In the context of modern America, the coming conquerors (the razor or sword) appear to be the Russians and an Islamic and Third World alliance of America’s many enemies.  The hair are the Israelite people of the United States and White British Commonwealth. 

 

 

The Few Hairs 

 

Yechezkel was told to divide the hair into three primary portions (suggesting justice).  The first 1/3 of the people would be judged and die during the coming 390-day siege (from pestilence, disease, famine etc).  The next 1/3 would be judged and die from military action as they try to escape the siege.  And the final 1/3 would be scattered to the wind (into bondage and captivity in foreign lands) with a sword following after them. 

 

However, out of this last 1/3, Yechezkel was told to take a few of the hairs and bind or wrap them and put them into his robe or garment for security and protection.  From these few, he was told to take some of them and toss them into the fire.  And then, the wonderful fourth verse appears when YHWH says that “for thereof” or from them, the fire shall come forth upon all of the House of Yisrael. 

 

One of the important questions of interpretation of this text must focus upon the fire going forth upon the whole House of Yisrael.  From where does it come? 

 

The context and almost all translators seem to agree that it comes from out of the remnant (either the whole of it or just those few that went into the fire and which had been bound in Yechezkel’s skirt), although the “Soncino Books of the Bible” allows that it comes from the fire on the whole in verse two. 

 

Whether it is from all of the remnant or just those that were thrown into the fire has seemed to be unclear to many translators and students of the Word.  This writer has studied this text extensively and has come to some tentative conclusions.  Perhaps either or both interpretations could apply.  So one may not have to be dogmatic. 

 

 

More on the Few Hairs 

 

In terms of identifying the few hairs in Yechezkel’s garment, it appears to be an easier process.  Some might suppose it to be the total election (of 144,000 males).  But this writer would allow that it possibly is limited to the very elect (about 7,000 each males and females).  But either interpretation will take the student of truth to the same spot in time, in regards to the point this writer is attempting to make on the text. 

 

Certainly, all of the 144,000 are in the hands of YHWH for protection and safety until their later sealing takes place (Rev 7:3-8).  Though these 144,000 will be initially kept alive from the assault, trial and fire upon collective Yisrael, most of them will undergo judgment (by fire) themselves at some point in time.  At a subsequent time and place (after the sealing), many or most will likely die in this eventual fire of judgment.

 

Even in the context of the possible 7,000 or so males of Philadelphia, the fire of judgment starts “first” with them, as elsewhere described herein (Acts 8:1; I Pet 4:17; Jer 27:1-22; 32:1-36; 33:1; 34:1-3; 37:4-21; 38:6-28; Rev  6:9-11).  This condition supports the likelihood that Yechezkel’s small number of hairs are indeed the very elect. 

 

While the identity of these first 7,000 may be debated, this writer presently believes that they will be people largely in the right wing and Christian Identity movements with politically incorrect thinking and now hated the most of all by the Amalekites.  This is not to say that all persons in the right wing or politically incorrect status are of the Philadelphia religious persuasion.  Many are not. 

 

Examples include the Davidians of a few years ago.  They were murdered for being politically incorrect.  But there is no way that those who died could ever be a part of the very elect or indeed even in the election (precisely because they did die before the sealing of the election takes place--which is still future here in 2003). 

 

There are many so-called patriots in the militia and right wing groups who are not religious at all and may never be.  They will surely not be a part of Philadelphia.  Yet, they will be hated, persecuted, arrested and punished.  Many of these non-Philadelphia persons will be murdered by Big Brother (under the leadership of Amalek-Edomite bankers/masters). 

 

 

The Politically Incorrect Focus 

 

Regarding the overall election of the 144,000 males, most (perhaps 137,000) of those individuals will come out of the remaining Seventh day Sabbath groups--like the SDB, the SDA, Messianic Jews, and the Sardis Church of God and Sacred Name entities.  In the generic sense, almost all of these persons are now politically correct in the present mode. 

 

It is inconceivable that Big Brother will launch his attack upon such politically correct people initially (although probably, in time, he will).  As the days proceed, those persons perhaps will start becoming politically incorrect, as well, but not all at once.  Manifestly, Big Brother’s first focus will be on politically incorrect persons. 

 

Because of this reality, it is evident that the Philadelphians fit into this category so that they may become some of the first individuals to be judged by The HIGHEST (again, judgment starts with the people of EL). 

 

When Big Brother moves to impose martial law and suspend the US Constitution, as he will likely do by Yechezkel’s 30th-33d years, he will surely declare absolute and total war upon these politically incorrect people (to include both those who are religious and those who are not). 

 

 

Coming Trouble 

 

Under Amalekite leadership, both definitions will generally be murdered, oppressed, persecuted, tried, tested, arrested, imprisoned and hated by Americans generally (for the Philadelphians, it will be in the context of the fire on the remnant of Ezek 5:4). 

 

This fire on the very elect happens long before it starts on the collective Israelites in the US and White British Commonwealth and even before the fire on the rest of the election (although it certainly is coming later on them; surely, to some extent under Big Brother and in earnest after the fall of the US and White British Commonwealth). 

 

Anyway, the short of this is that it appears that the fire of Ezekiel 5:4 is the persecution and trial of the very elect which Big Brother will soon unleash upon them and long before YHWH’s fire of judgment comes upon the collective United States and White British Commonwealth at the hands of the Russians and their Third World allies.  

 

Big Brother’s ruthlessness, brutality and evil will be so great that Philadelphia will have to go underground and in hiding to survive. 

 

The state will pull out all of the stops to hunt down and oppress these people, using the full resources of government (just as it has spent $millions and used thousands of federal agents near Andrews, NC from 1998 to 2003 in attempting to locate one, single, right winger accused of some bombings in GA and AL back in the 1990s--like the Atlanta Olympics bombing (apparently at a site used for sodomy, interracial sex and general fornication), two abortion clinics and one queer bar. 

 

By the way, news reports of May 31, 2003, noted that a local, 21-year-old, rookie cop in Murphy, NC had captured this accused man, named Eric Robert Rudolph (previously mentioned herein), as he was caught raiding a dumpster in Murphy. 

 

The feds had a $one million reward out on him and it is unclear if this factor played a role in the arrest.  Manifestly, Rudolph will be tortured to no end by the feds in extracting information out of him on all of the people who may have helped him while hiding out in Western NC since 1998. 

 

Most or all of the largely innocent people who helped this man will be arrested and fully prosecuted by Big Brother.  Certainly, many people who helped this man were religious people who believed that they were doing the right thing.  But this is one of the fall outs in a dictatorial state.  For sure, this fate will await many sincerely religious people in the coming days as tribulation strikes them. 

 

As Big Brother will be assaulting, persecuting, hating and attempting to destroy politically incorrect people in the US, one can be sure that the United Kingdom and the remaining White, Anglo-Saxon-Celtic nations all face a similar indictment.  Assuredly, marital law will be proclaimed in those states as well and the politically incorrect will be hated, hunted, arrested and tried there--probably just as harshly as in the US. 

 

 

The Ultimate Cause? 

 

The point of this is that it appears that the coming persecution of politically incorrect Philadelphians by Big Brother will be the final catalyst to finally bring on YHWH’s judgment upon the collective peoples of the US and White, British Commonwealth nations. 

 

In the case of America, the generic population supported their leader Clinton all the way through the 390 days of test.  They could have stopped the process on numerous occasions and demanded (through their elected representatives and through the 1998 election) that Slick be removed. 

 

Instead, they closed their eyes and supported the depraved Clinton (and his lying, cheating, dishonesty, immorality, etc) throughout the trial.  What this boils down to is that America and the other White Anglo-Saxon-Celtic states, as well, have consistently chosen evil over good. 

 

When the government finally reaches the point of attacking and assaulting the “few” people who would speak out and support some measure of righteousness (the politically incorrect), YHWH apparently says “that’s enough!”  Judgment is then assured upon the collective people for their evil and wicked ways. 

 

After all, the problem has not been with Bill Clinton, Tony Blair, Colin Powell or George W. Bush.  The problem is with the Christian people who elected or chose such scoundrels and supported them all the way by looking in the other direction as these evil leaders led their nations into progressively more and more wretchedness.  In other words, it is the people’s fault. 

 

Before leaving this theme, there is one more possible view on Ezekiel 5:4.  A reader’s letter in the Jan-Feb 1999 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 78) suggested that the fire coming upon the whole House of Yisrael from the remnant could come because it will be this remnant which delivers (preaches, teaches and communicates) YHWH’s final judgment upon the people. 

 

Hence, the question must be asked--is it plausible that some portion of Philadelphia will have a part in any possible age ending Yechezkel and Yirmeyahu (or Yohanan or whomever) messages to Yisrael? 

 

 

The Final Destruction, Revisited 

 

Other presentations herein give the details of this final destruction coming upon Yisrael.  There is no need to try to repeat that material here as it is lengthy.  But it will be appropriate to look somewhat at the numbers of people to die and relate those figures to discussions heretofore on the pomegranates. 

 

Ezekiel 5:1-5, cited above, gives 2/3 as dying by the time the siege/embargo ends.  This is brought out in Ezekiel 5:2 in the clause “when the days are fulfilled” in the context of the siege/embargo.  This final siege/embargo will possibly start on America and Canada in Yechezkel’s 32d year. 

 

It will perhaps run 390 days to around the 9th day of the fourth Scriptural month in Yechezkel’s 33d year, when the nations are finally broken up (following the completion of a 30 day nuclear attack upon both of them).  Apparently, Yechezkel is saying that 2/3 of the Israelites living in North America and the Anglo-Saxon-Celtic nations will be dead by the time the test ends. 

 

This reference likely parallels the four seals of Revelation 6 which seem to give the area of this trial and war as covering 1/4 of the earth and/or possibly resulting in the death of 25% of the peoples in this area or over the whole earth, depending upon how Revelation 6:8 is to be interpreted. 

 

Certainly, the US and White British Commonwealth have millions of non-Israelite peoples present (like the ger and nokri aliens, behemah and chaiyah).  Just as millions of Israelites will be dying, millions of these other persons will die as well--although the Israelite percentages might be substantially higher because the slaughter will represent YHWH’s judgment upon Israelites for their sins. 

 

Amos 5:1-5 describes the fall of Yisrael and puts the total death rate at 90% of the Israelites.  Per Amos, only 10% will live to go into captivity.  Since some 67% of the Israelites die by the time the siege ends on the 9th day of the fourth Scriptural month, it means that another 23% or so must quickly die.  How can this occur? 

 

Per the history of Jerusalem (which is the model or guide for the modern House of Yisrael), the conquering army enters the fallen nation(s) starting possibly around the 9th day and puts down all remaining resistance.  By the 17th day of the fourth month, the land belongs to the conquerors and they run their flag up that day--so to speak.  For certain, many more Israelites will die between the 9th and 17th days. 

 

 

The Arrest and Trial of US War Criminals 

 

Also, before the division of the land (elsewhere discussed herein) and the final enslavement and captivity of the surviving Israelites, the conquering powers appear to commence three types of purges which will see the death of millions more.  In the first instance, the Nuremberg war trials in 1945 set a precedent for the future. 

 

What it amounts to is that the chickens will come home to roost in America and Britain (when they tried the leaders of Nazi Germany in 1945 for war crimes; although these prosecuted Germans argued that they were only following orders).  For years now, the leaders of America have been murdering politically incorrect people and the killers have all just “followed orders,” as at Waco, Ruby Ridge, etc. 

 

YHWH will soon turn the tables on these murderers and give them some of the same medicine that they have been dishing out to others for years.  They will be arrested by the conquerors and prosecuted for “war crimes” or crimes against the Moslem people or the Serbs or something else.  Many or perhaps most of the American and White British Commonwealth leadership will be convicted and executed. 

 

This process may start around the 9th or 10th day of the fifth month of Yechezkel’s’ 33d year (Ezek 20:1) and will likely include most key Washington politicians and officials, if the conquerors can capture them (although some US leaders may be executed earlier by the powerful Amalekites, when they make their play to seize control of the US government in the latter part of the foreign siege and just before the official end). 

 

In any case, this arrest and liquidation of America’s evil leaders will surely run the gauntlet from federal to state to local officials.  This trial and execution of the American and White, British Commonwealth leadership will cover many persons--apparently in the thousands and perhaps millions. 

 

 

Now 

 

Already, there is some evidence that such a motion is underway in the years 1999-2003.  

 

The “Spotlight” paper of August 2, 1999, had an article on “Former AG:  Clinton’s A Criminal” (p. 3,7) which noted that former US Attorney General Ramsay Clark and others have filed a complaint with the “International War Crimes Tribunal” charging Bill Clinton, Secretary of Defense William Cohen, General Wesley Clark and others with war crimes in the Balkans (Ramsay has appeared before a Commission of Inquiry asking for an indictment). 

 

In another focus upon the evils of the Christian President Bill Clinton, the “Spotlight” of Nov 29, 1999 (p. 2), had a news report from Athens, Greece on the state visit of Clinton to Greece on November 13-15, 1999.  Just before Clinton arrived, Greek protesters of Clinton’s visit held a mock trial of him and found him guilty of genocide and crimes against so-called humanity for his Balkan policies. 

 

As briefly allowed in a prior chapter, this motion to try Slick as a war criminal or something else is definitely proceeding along.  The Jul 22, 2002, “American Free Press” (p. 1) had a story by James P. Tucker Jr on “World Court Backfires on Globalists” which noted that charges have already been filed against Clinton with the International Criminal Tribunal. 

 

The complaint against Clinton also names his former aides--Anthony Lake (former National Security Advisor), Sandy Berger (the Amalekite former Deputy National Security Advisor), Ambassador Richard Holbrooke, and Peter Galbraith (former Ambassador to Croatia). 

 

The diabolical Clinton and some of his wretched cronies may have been loved and supported by the American people; but when the conquering Russians, Chinese, Latinos, Muslims etc arrive, he, his Democrat gang of crooks and the Republican crooks will all be arrested and prosecuted as war criminals (although, again, the Amalekites may execute some of  them earlier, before the Russians take over). 

 

Sometimes, YHWH has unique methods of imposing justice upon man.  Clinton, his colleagues and the other sorry American politicians will ultimately be judged by The HIGHEST.  Their days of getting away with and being rewarded for murder, evil and wickedness will come to an end. 

 

 

The Christians’ Great Tribulation? 

 

The next great purge and elimination of people occurs when the conquerors turn their sights on Christianity and particularly Protestant Christianity, as elsewhere described herein.  Some of the Catholics may fare well in land areas occupied by the Mexicans and Hispanic powers; but otherwise, the surviving Christians are going to bite the dust, as Yechezkel suggests (Ezek 6:6). 

 

This persecution will be perceived as the great tribulation for the surviving Christians (primarily in neutral Europe).  The conquering Russians and Islamic leaders are going to purge much of Christianity out of the House of Yisrael nations.  In time, the surviving Israelites will eventually wake up and realize that they have been on a wrong path. 

 

There is a third category of people which the conquerors will also soon eliminate.  The aged (perhaps over age 50 or so), sick, disabled and infirm will be slaughtered--not only because there won’t be any food to feed them; but because they are unproductive and will be useless in slave labor camps designed for work and production. 

 

But the first signs of serious economic trouble (which may surface or have surfaced in Yechezkel’s 20th-29th years) perhaps will surge forward in Yechezkel’s 30th-33d years.  But this will still be only in the beginnings of Yakov’s Trouble.  It will ultimately last about seven years, as it runs its course.  Millions more will die--not only of Israelites, but also other peoples as well, as outlined in the book of Revelation. 

 

 

The Numbers 

 

With this backdrop, it is possible to do a little arithmetic and calculate the probable numbers of Israelite deaths.  As elsewhere commented upon, it might be that the world’s Israelite population is now approaching 240 million.  The death of 2/3 of them during the siege means 160 million will die in a little over a year.  Mass burials in graves dug by bulldozers will be the only solution for most of the dead. 

 

Before the captivity commences, another 56 million or so will die to bring the survival level to 10% or about 24 million Israelites.  The final captivity could possibly start by the 9th or 10th day of the fifth month of Yechezkel’s 33d year.  Like Yechezkel wrote, the sword (of death and destruction) will follow the survivors into slavery.  More will die over the course of Yakov’s Trouble. 

 

In former presentations on the pomegranates, a calculation of the ultimate fleshly survivors of Yakov’s Trouble, entering the promise land, appears to be about 2.4 million people or roughly 1% of the beginning 240 million.  If this is true, some 21.6 million more Israelites will die in their captivity. 

 

What about those who supposedly escape the trouble by getting passports and leaving America and Britain.  Certainly, many of them will go to Jerusalem, as previously discussed.  With the exception of the very elect, the Word is clear.  The sword, slavery, persecution and typically death follow all of them. 

 

No Israelite (Christian or not) will miss this trouble--save the very elect.  In the summer of Yechezkel’s 33d year, there will apparently be no more United States or British Commonwealth nations.  They will likely be history.  The Scriptures are explicitly clear and precise on this coming doom and its ultimate outcome. 

 

In time, 90% plus of the Anglo-Saxons (Sac-sons or I-saac’s sons) will soon be dead.  The survivors (other than the very elect) will enter their final captivity and slavery to await the return of YESHUA The MESSIAH and His millennial rule. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 495--Prophetic Overview

 

 

General 

 

The evidence is substantial that everything taking place presently over the globe paves the way for and leads up to the establishment of the Messianic Kingdom and age over planet earth when YHWH YESHUA returns to establish that Kingdom. 

 

This eventually coming reality will be addressed in later chapters herein.  But for now, there is a need to look at the general subject of prophecy and particularly the existing signs, trends and motions in place to bring this coming Kingdom into being.  The following presentation will broach this theme. 

 

 

Christian Confusion 

 

One of the great difficulties in assessing and interpreting Scriptural prophecy is the fact that there is much confusion and particularly among Christians in their efforts at understanding the Book.  Much of this difficulty probably surfaces because Christians are so hostile toward the Word and disbelieve so much of it. 

 

Regardless, there seems to be two fields of thinking that prevail among Christians in attempting to broach prophecy and an understanding of the future. 

 

One of the most prominent schools of thought is that the understanding of prophecy is impossible because it simply is not stated clearly in the Book.  Some persons think that prophecy can only be understood by the Christian Church when the time comes for it to be fulfilled.  This view will be presented shortly below. 

 

Otherwise, there is also a contrary profile out there of believing that one has it all together right now.  The Jehovah’s Witnesses, Seventh day Adventists and many other denominations generally convey this image.  This writer must also admit to falling into this same trap periodically.  It is so easy to study the Word and develop some conclusions which may or may not be true at all. 

 

 

Hal Lindsay 

 

Perhaps one of the best known Christian spokespersons, who operates on the premise of having it all together right now, is the well know Christian writer Hal Lindsay.  Lindsay has written many books and some of them have become best sellers.  He is well known in the Christian writing field. 

 

In background, Lindsay seems to be a Pentecostal/Charismatic individual who might be termed a fundamentalist.  He believes that he is “born again” and has special insight into the Word, evidently because of that reason. 

 

While it appears that this man really doesn’t have it together and actually does not get the big picture, he has had brains enough to be able to read the Book and accept literally some of the statements on prophecy found therein.  

 

Thus, while he does not have the big picture, he has been able to read of certain predictions and relate those prophecies to modern times.  For example, he has read about coming earthquakes (which suggest enormous volcanic activity) and has been able to perceive extraordinary earthquake and volcanic activity in the age end.  Armed with these few truths, he has written about these earth changes. 

 

Actually, there are a host of things predicted in the Word which are clear enough and which take no genius to figure them out if one will but believe what the Word says.  Lindsay has done this in several instances with predictions about great social upheavals, increasing crime and violence, the demise of morality, the advances of science and technology, and so forth. 

 

When he writes about these coming events, in the general sense, his message seems good as these events are right now taking place.  However, despite seeing and understudying the coming of some of these occurrences, Lindsay is sadly lacking in terms of the big picture and understanding the relevance of most of the specific events he cites. 

 

 

With Art Bell 

 

Hal Lindsay was a guest on the Art Bell Coast to Coast AM radio program on April 29, 2002.  He related some of these “signs” of the times and Bell was obviously impressed.  Several times, Bell poured out some flattery on Lindsay for his supposed understanding and perception on these signs.  Bell agreed that the signs are there and we are likely entering a great period of transition to something new. 

 

One of the things emphasized by Lindsay was the situation in the Middle East.  Though he totally didn’t understand it, he seized upon Ezekiel 33-39 and Zechariah 12:1-14, and applied those texts to the Jews and Jerusalem right then in the year 2002. 

 

Importantly, the return of the House of Yisrael to the land of Palestine in Ezekiel 33-37 was taken by Lindsay as applying to the Jews (who have largely immigrated to Palestine since 1948).  Going on to Ezekiel 38-39, Lindsay anticipates an invasion of the Jewish state by a Russian and Islamic alliance (to constitute the Christian anticipated battle of Armageddon). 

 

As a prelude to this so-called final great war, Lindsay cites Zechariah 12:2-3 which predicts Jerusalem as being a burdensome stone and a cup of trembling unto all people.  He applies this message to the present situation in Jerusalem.  In his view, all of the armies of the world will soon be coming down to Palestine to fight this coming last great battle. 

 

While Bell and probably many of his Christian listeners were impressed with these remarks from Lindsay, Hal Lindsay had much of it all wrong.   The truth is Lindsay was projecting a Christian view and interpretation which is simply far removed from truth. 

 

 

The Better Approach 

 

There is no intent to attempt to broach the reality of these texts to any degree at this present time since they have been previously mentioned and will be more fully explored in later chapters and in Appendices D and E.  Suffice to say, Lindsay was wrong, as will be proven later herein. 

 

As already discussed extensively, the book of Ezekiel essentially pertains to the lost House of Yisrael and not specifically to the Jews, per se.   The return of Yisrael to the land in Ezekiel 33-37 concerns the coming (in the future) of the lost tribes of Yisrael back to old Canaan. 

 

Although there will be an ante-type of Ezekiel 38-39, the basic prophecy manifestly takes place after YESHUA returns to establish His millennial government over planet earth (as the context precisely communicates).  Lindsay and Christians in general completely miss the point of these texts (this writer also fell into the same trap in earlier years). 

 

One of the problems Lindsay and other prophetic interpreters like him have faced is that these persons approach the Scriptures involved from one of the traditional Christian viewpoints (of course, there have been several Christian interpretations associated with these texts and they are all wrong).  Lindsay and most of his fellow fundamentalists use just one of the theories. 

 

The essence of these remarks is that even the most shallow of Christians can read many of the Scriptural messages regarding the future and understand some of it simply by accepting and believing what the Word says.  If there is something which gets them into trouble, it is the fallacy of trying to rely upon previous Christian interpretations.  Generally, Christendom has had it wrong. 

 

 

More on Lindsay 

 

Before moving on to other themes on prophecy, there is one more issue on Hal Lindsay which must be cited.  The Jan 2003 “Herald of Truth Newsletter” (p. 2) points out that back in the 1970s, Hal Lindsay predicted that the “Countdown to Armageddon” would happen in the 1980s (as supposedly reported by Lindsay in his book “The Late Great Planet Earth”). 

 

This writer could not verify the quotation, but surely the “Herald of Truth” has it right.  Undoubtedly, Lindsay, like others, has went out on a limb and made statements or predictions because of simply having misunderstood the Scriptural dating reality.  This writer must confess this same tendency as well. 

 

The point is that while Hal Lindsay has been raking the money in from book sales to the uninformed Christian public, he has presented some bad material in some of his writings.  Therefore, one must be careful about blindly accepting what he says. 

 

 

Another View 

 

There is a contrary profile demonstrating the Christian attitude toward Scriptural prophecy.  It was well stated in the Jul-Aug 1998 “Believer’s Advocate,” in an article on “World Conspiracy and the Believer” (p. 5).  It said that “We have only a sketchy outline throughout the Bible, including Revelations, of what things will be like at this time...” 

 

Going on, the article said that the “reason that this subject (prophecy) is not completely clear to all Believers, no matter how much we study into the matter, is that we are not to know all the details until we actually need them...” 

 

The point of these comments is that YHWH’s Word doesn’t give the details of the future and/or a miraculous revelation is somehow needed at the appropriate time for those persons close to The ELOHIM to know and understand prophecy.  Actually, these ideas are a part of the traditional Christian approach to understanding, which simply won’t hold water. 

 

The truth is that The MOST HIGH has laid the entire future out in His Word in excruciating detail (though people like Hal Lindsay may not have the true picture).  YHWH has given us not only a lengthy presentation of coming events, but He has went on to date them.  Previous chapters herein and later Appendices D and E will offer an interpretation of the dating arrangement. 

 

Part of the problem which Christians face is that they disbelieve so much of YHWH’s instruction Book.  Too often, they start babbling about changes and an apparent lack of consistency.  Since Christians are so incredibly rebellious and hateful toward The ELOHIM’s Word, it is no wonder that they can’t understand the messages therein. 

 

The essence of this is that Christianity is not the religion of the Scriptures.  It is patently obvious that Christians aren’t supposed to understand prophecy.  Clearly, those people who constitute the very elect and who are supposed to understand will understand because they will believe.  The truth is that understanding is possible. 

 

 

Prophetic Writings--An Overview 

 

Some students of the Book have estimated that some two thirds of its contents focus on prophecy and the great bulk of that two thirds is still future here in early 2003.  This writer would readily agree with that estimate.  Even in the cases of prophecy which some would push for in an earlier, ante-typical fulfillment, there are reasons to believe that the age end will see a repeat of many of them in a final typical accomplishment. 

 

It goes without saying that the writings of all of the OT prophets are essentially prophetic, as well as the NT book of Revelation.  But that’s only part of it because all of the rest of the OT and NT Scriptures contain prophetic references--yes, even in the epistles of Shaul and the Psalms and other books as well.  One must recall that Moshe was a prophet and that the Torah has a host of profound prophecies. 

 

Many of the OT prophetic books have a number of dates recorded--like Ezekiel, Daniel, Haggai and Zechariah.  This writer is convinced that The MOST HIGH wasn’t just filling up space when He chose to date events--often by years and sometimes even by months and days of the month.  Those dates are relevant if one can just figure them out. 

 

 

Chronology, Revisited 

 

Beyond the fact that there are a number of fairly specific dates associated with various prophecies, there remains the larger topic of chronology which is supported with numerous dates (usually from an annual or yearly perspective).  Many of these cover long spans of time (like 1,260 or 2,520 years, etc, as noted earlier).  Former chapters and the later Appendices D and E offer some presentations on many of these time periods. 

 

Again, The SUPREME wasn’t just filling up space when He caused a record to be made of the ages of parents when their children were born (of the genealogical line of Avraham).  Those references are important, as pointed out previously. 

 

Therefore, a number of scholars have spent a great deal of time and effort to assemble the different chronological statements and arrange and interpret them into an overall chronology of history.  This subject has been detailed in former chapters. 

 

The importance of this research is that most Christian scholars, in particular, date creation at or near 4004 BCE which must be quite significant when one realizes that certain Scriptures suggest that Adam man has been allocated 6,000 years before YESHUA returns to establish His millennial rule of 1,000 years over planet earth (Gen 1:5-2:2; Ps 90:4; Ezek 4:5-6; Heb 4:8-9; II Pet 3:8). 

 

The point of all this is that so-called humanity is probably very close to witnessing the end of the age allocated to Adam.  There is an enormous amount of both Scriptural and secular evidence suggesting that this age (under man’s misrule) is about to abort and be replaced with the theocracy and the authoritarian rulership of YHWH YESHUA. 

 

 

The Importance of the Signs 

 

As outlined above, the essence of the end of this age is the return of YESHUA and the establishment of His Messianic Kingdom over planet earth.  This seems to be the ultimate or primary goal or consummation of the theme of Scriptural prophecy and the future which Adam must look for and anticipate. 

 

But preceding this eventual Kingdom and presence of YESHUA, there are a number of profound and extraordinary events or motions which must be accomplished or take place.  In a sense, these events or motions can be thought of as signs. 

 

Sometimes, they involve a single occurrence or a multiple number of occurrences and/or sometimes they merely involve a trend or motion which can be defined and recognized.  Regardless of the form of these prophetic events/trends as they unfold, they do constitute signs of the time which believers should be able to watch for, observe and understand. 

 

In Hal Lindsay’s discussion with Art Bell, as described above, it was a few of these signs which Lindsay commented upon and which whet the appetite of Bell.  Of course, some of them have been in the developmental stages as trends or motions for the last hundred years.  Certainly, the last fifty years has produced many of these signs or at least preparations for them. 

 

This chapter will bring together many or most of the more important signs which this writer is able to detect and understand.  Surely, there are some out there which will not be mentioned at this time for whatever reason--the incompetence of this writer or something else. 

 

Since many of these signs involve motions that can be spread out over many years, this listing is not meant to be necessarily sequential or chronological in presentation.  In fact, many of them are going on in the exact same time periods.  Appendices D and E and other chapters on prophecy hereafter will attempt to bring these signs together into a meaningful whole and correlate and sequence them as best as possible. 

 

 

Astronomical Signs 

 

The next two chapters and portions of Appendices D and E will be devoted to the question of heavenly signs.  Needless to say, comets, meteorite showers, events on the sun, alignment of planets, and so forth all represent signs which have primary roles to play in prophecy and the age end. 

 

 

Signs in Nature on Earth 

 

Some of the prophetic future signs on earth have already received some mention in prior chapters (and as mentioned by Hal Lindsay, as noted above).  Too, succeeding chapters and the later Appendices D and E will bring these events together and try to correlate them into a meaningful whole. 

 

For sure, earthquakes, volcano eruptions, climate/weather changes, droughts, locust plagues, etc all have prophetic implications and represent meaningful things here in the age end. 

 

 

Social Problems 

 

Preceding chapters have discussed at length many of the very powerful developments of great social problems and sicknesses which seem incomprehensible to the thinking mind.  Yet, over the ages, and particularly in the last 100 years, these trends have been set in motion to produce prophetic fulfillments and significant signs of the times that we live in on earth. 

 

It’s not hard to see that the explosion in sexual perversion, pedophilia, sodomy, miscegenation, race problems and conflicts, feminism, divorces, rebellious and disobedient children, a breakdown in morality, a surge in human carnality, advancements in technology, and on and on all represent signs of the times.  Most of these tragedies are spelled out in great detail in the prophetic Word. 

 

Though discussed at length in previous remarks, most of them will be further broached in subsequent commentary to mesh and/or correlate with other future events to define the age end.  Truly, they generally represent fantastic revelations for the coming of YHWH YESHUA’s government and Kingdom. 

 

 

Ecumenicalism and a One World Religion 

 

The Protestant Reformation dealt a severe blow to the Roman Catholic Church and her efforts to establish world rule via religion (as envisioned and propelled by the diabolical Simon Magus, probably in Rome, in about 42 CE). 

 

This theme has already been discussed and will be further covered in chapters to follow.  Suffice to say, it isn’t only a matter of bringing the Protestant daughters back to mother Rome.  But it also involves the bringing of all of the world’s man-devised religions under the same umbrella of a Catholic pope. 

 

 

Environmental Crises 

 

Right now, in the early 21st century, there are vast environmental problems--some of which could thrust the earth and its inhabitants into a crisis of unequaled proportions.  Probably, a total collapse will not surface before YESHUA comes, but surely many crises seem inevitable.  They have been discussed in previous chapters herein. 

 

 

Economic and/or Monetary Collapse 

 

One of the things which the evil Amalekite Jews have been experts on has been money.  The Amalekite Jews are masters on this question and cannot be challenged. 

 

As discussed in prior chapters, these parasites have learned that if they can gain control of a nation’s money, they can control the nation.  They did this in England in the 18th and 19th centuries.  With US independence, they tried for ages to permanently install their money power over America.  This goal was achieved by them in 1913 with the establishment of the privately owned Federal Reserve system. 

 

The Federal Reserve placed US money into the hands of private bankers.  Of course, these bankers have been more then willing to give or provide their private bank notes (i.e. Federal Reserve Notes) to the governing politicians in whatever quantity that was requested or needed by the prostitute politicians running the government. 

 

The only provision or drawback on this free flow of money to the politicians was that the nation had to pay the bankers interest (usury) on the money provided.  Thus, the money has come with strings attached. 

 

Along with providing this flow of money to draw interest, the bankers running the Fed have used their Federal Reserve Notes to manipulate the various stock and financial markets to allow the Amalekite bankers and their colleagues to make vast sums of profits on market transactions.  While this effort has required the expenditure of many of these bank notes, it has offered awesome profits to the insiders. 

 

The point is that since the Amalekites took over the US money supply, they have freely poured out vast sums of these private bank notes (in the trillions of dollars) to accomplish several things--making profits for themselves, perpetuating the politicians in office, etc. 

 

 

The Problem 

 

The downside has been that the United States taxpayers are liable for this money printed by the private bankers.  And as is always true, when more money is printed in comparison with the production of goods and services, it means inflation. 

 

Every nation in history which has tried to inflate her currency has ultimately had an inflationary collapse or bust to be followed by a dictatorial government.  It has always happened that way and assuredly seems to now be happening that way for America and Britain. 

 

Along with the money takeover in Britain and America, it is clear that history has insured that the bankers have been in the driver’s seat in terms of European money.  For sure, the new EURO European currency seems to be owned by Amalekite bankers.  

 

So, if the US and British moneys tank, it seems likely that the EURO will be used by the bankers to try to restore stability to the system in order to allow them to continue to use their money to rule and exploit the gullible goyim.  Whether the EURO and other world currencies will collapse or not remains a question.  But clearly, the US dollar and the British pound are doomed. 

 

When this collapse comes, enormous economic problems and upheavals will take place across the globe because of the international role that the dollar has played in world affairs for the past 60 years. 

 

 

Judgment on the House of Yisrael 

 

With the collapse of the money and coming droughts and other social problems in the House of Yisrael lands (America and the White British Commonwealth nations), Yakov’s Trouble of seven years will break out on the House of Yisrael countries.  This will be YHWH’s judgment upon the evil and depraved people occupying those lands.  It will be a good thing. 

 

Much of the book of Ezekiel and many of the other age ending prophecies focus upon this coming righteous judgment.  This subject will be more extensively assessed in succeeding chapters herein. 

 

 

The Coming Prophets/Witnesses 

 

One of the great prophetic messages in the Book concerns a marvelous presentation by YHWH of two or four inspired and directed men to come on the world scene and reveal some astounding things. 

 

As discussed in previous comments, and as will be further described in later chapters, there seems to be a reason to believe that YHWH will send two preliminary prophets to play a key role with the decline and collapse of the House of Yisrael nations (as just described). 

 

But more importantly, there will clearly be two powerful, final witnesses who will preach truth to the world for a period of 1,260 days.  These two men are known to believers as the “two witnesses.”  Their work will be truly extraordinary and profound in terms of so-called humanity. 

 

In terms of age ending signs, one or both pair of these men seem to make an appearance on the world scene around seven years before YESHUA returns.  Obviously, students of the Book who are watching the age ending events will be anticipating these prophets and their messages for man.  For sure, they are important signs to look for in the future. 

 

 

The Third Temple 

 

Previous chapters have already broached the subject of the work now on-going by religious Jews to build a Third Temple on Mount Moriah.  This Temple must be built, not only by a commandment from YHWH, but also to fulfill many prophetic predictions of this coming Third Temple. 

 

The building of this coming Third Temple will be one of the most extraordinary events in the last 1930 years.  It will profoundly affect everyone alive at the time.  It is on schedule and the Jews are making all preparations for it to come about.  And it is coming--complete with YHWH’s authority and blessing. 

 

Future chapters herein will further address the events now going on in accomplishing this important work in the age end. 

 

 

A Restored Priesthood 

 

Along with the building of this Third Temple, YHWH will take action to restore a legitimate Levitical priesthood over Yisrael in the age end.  This priesthood will be necessary to accompany the coming Third Temple.  The work of this restoration has been described in a former chapter.  It will be further noted in remarks to follow. 

 

 

A Restoration in the Apostolic Assembly 

 

As elaborated upon in some detail in previous chapters on the Seven Assemblies, there is much Scriptural evidence suggesting the restoration of the work of the Apostolic Assembly, in the vein of a coming Philadelphia congregation. 

 

This group will have a fantastic prophetic role to play in not only the age end; but also, in the future of Adam in the millennium.  It will be further commented upon in subsequent chapters and in Appendices D and E hereafter. 

 

 

World Government 

 

One of the great future prophetic events will be the establishment of a world government under man’s control and influence.  This motion has been underway for the past 90 years.  Already, a huge assortment of international organizations and efforts are surfacing all over the globe to bring this coming world government into fruition.  Though it will be grossly evil, it cannot be stopped. 

 

At the moment, it would seem that the United Nations will provide the nucleus and indeed the motivation for this coming world government.  It has been discussed previously and will be broached more fully in later chapters and in Appendices D and E. 

 

 

A Beast Ruler 

 

Along with this coming world government, a very evil and wicked beast-man ruler will arrive on the global scene.  As will be covered in later chapters, the evidence is that this man is already a reality on the world scene somewhere.  Soon, he will be revealed. 

 

The Scriptures are quite adamant in describing this coming world government and describing it in context of a coming time of great tyranny and persecution upon the election.  Believers have come to call this coming time of trouble the great tribulation.  Surely, it will be the greatest time of trouble for man in the history of Adam. 

 

Previous chapters herein have described the coming police state (complete with data on the mark of the beast and various methods of control over both the actions and thoughts of so-called human beings) which focus upon this coming time of tyranny.  It will be further commented upon in succeeding chapters and in Appendices D and E. 

 

 

Great Deceptions

 

The Scriptures are replete with illustrations and comments on the coming great deceptions in the age end.  As will be discussed in later chapters and in Appendices D and E, this deception will be most convincing to the bulk of the people--so good that if it was possible, the very elect could be mesmerized, confused and deceived. 

 

Actually, as covered in preceding chapters, there is already a huge dose of deception completely underlying the entire Western, Christian civilization.  Modern man (of all types, kinds, varieties and so forth) have been vastly mesmerized and zombiized into believing a host of lies.  Now, the lies emanating from people in leadership positions seem unending.  The world is flooded with lies presently. 

 

But some of the coming deceptions, as prophesied in the Book, will be the most fantastic of all.  Surely, one of these future deceptions will occur when Satan comes to earth as “Jesus Christ,” as will be addressed in some detail in later commentary. 

 

 

The Bottom Line 

 

While it is clear enough that the future hope of man is for YESHUA to return and establish His government over the entire planet for the millennium, there will be a huge number of preceding events, motions or trends which will lay the groundwork for YESHUA’s return.  In a sense, these events or motions become signs of the times to alert believers on how close the age end is to man. 

 

All of the above signs either have been addressed in previous chapters herein or will be further broached and assessed in comments to follow.  Suffice to say, believers and students of the Word must intensify their personal efforts at watching events.  Time surely is short! 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 496--Signs in the Heavens I

 

 

Background 

 

Ever since the days of the ancients and the earliest of times, men have been looking into and contemplating the heavens.  With this awe and fascination over the lights and manifestations in the sky, it is no wonder then that individuals have observed, watched, recorded and studied the heavens over the ages, sometimes almost to the point of obsession. 

 

The Psalmist offered a couple of priceless observations on the wonders of the heavens.  First, the Word declares that the heavens declare the glory of The EL and the firmament shows His handiwork (Ps 19:1). 

 

In another wonderful verse, David proclaimed “When I consider the heavens, the work of thy fingers, the moon and the stars, which thou hast ordained:  what is man that thou art mindful of him?” (Ps 8:3-4).  Truly, the universe is so awesome and so spectacular that little man cannot even begin to appreciate or understand it. 

 

 

They Can Become Dangerous 

 

For some individuals, the stars in space become so paramount in their lives that an attachment develops to the extreme that the study and adoration of the "stars" become their religion and "gods" of sorts.  One knows this stupidity as astrology. 

 

In ancient days, the practices of astrologers and astronomers were combined into one definition.  Hence, it is probable that many early astrologers were actually astronomers and not induced into the religious aspects of astrology. 

 

However, in today’s world, the two disciplines are decidedly different and separated.  Today’s generic astrologers are involved in the worship and adoration of the heavens in a religious sense.  Supposedly, astronomy is more on the rational, scientific level. 

 

Tragically, modern astrology has become a very popular and widespread phenomenon of our time, as one can easily tell by picking up almost any daily newspaper. 

 

Consequently, if a person does undertake an objective, rational look at the heavens, there is a need to be prudent and sensible about it and not succumb to the dangers of astrology which is categorically promoted and prompted by demonic powers, as this publication has elsewhere pointed out herein. 

 

Despite the inherent danger in contemplating the universe (to the extreme of a religious faith, as done in astrology), there are some very pungent Scriptures which tell one some good features about possessing various amounts of knowledge and understanding about the observable heavens.  In particular, the Word communicates that the heavens produce certain "signs" which have relevance on earth. 

 

For example, as cited above, the heavens declare the glory of The MOST HIGH (Ps 19:1).  And at creation, the sun and moon were specifically made to be "signs" for people on earth (Gen 1:14).  On this remark, Harold Hemenway, in his book on “Biblical Astronomy and the Calendar,” notes that the most precise and evident signs of the sun and moon are eclipses. 

 

 

Signs Are Important 

 

Obviously, since the Book itself attaches some importance to heavenly signs, one cannot ignore them or their relevance.  Except again, students of truth must express their interest and concern over these bodies in a Scripturally legal and proper way and not allow their mentalities to deteriorate into a state of occultic subversion by evil, demonic forces. 

 

Since the heavens do declare the glory of The CREATOR, it would be useful to pause here briefly and take cognizance of some of the more common signs there which man has recognized and considered over the centuries. 

 

In this context, perhaps the just mentioned solar and lunar eclipses have to be some of the most noticeable and apparent phenomenons observable on earth.  Likewise, planetary conjunctions and the birth and death (especially supernovas) of stars have intrigued man throughout recorded history. 

 

In addition, the study of the arrangement and constellations of the stars has been a serious matter for ages.  It is this focus which has produced and given rise to the so-called "signs of the zodiac" --viz:  Virgo (Virgin), Libra (Scales), Scorpio (Scorpion), Sagittarius (Bowman or archer), Capricornus (Goat), Aquarius (Water Bringer), Pisces (Fish), Aries (Lamb), Taurus (Bull), Gemini (Twins), Cancer (Crab) and Leo (Lion). 

 

Several recognized students and scholars of the Word, over the years, have suggested that some of these constellations are alluded to directly or indirectly in the Word (i.e. Virgo in Rev 12:1, per "Biblical Astronomy and the Calendar"). 

 

However, in mentioning this subject of the zodiac, please be aware that any serious fascination with this topic, on a religious plane, as is done in astrology, could represent a terrible sin which could link a person up with demonic agents. 

 

 

More Visible Signs 

 

Besides these various heavenly displays and presentations discussed so far, it would also be useful to next make note of possibly the most impressive and spectacular signs of all emanating in the skies.  Here, mention must be made of moving bodies like comets, asteroids, fireballs, meteors and meteorites. 

 

These phenomena can cause great excitement and concern in the world, not only because of their visible displays; but also, since they can and do impact with earth from time to time.  Obviously, the prospect of a heavenly body colliding with planet earth is enough to make anyone sit up and take notice. 

 

Finally, on this present subtopic, some recognition is due to some of the related possible signs in the heavens which would not fit into the category of natural events, as elsewhere commented upon herein. 

 

As elaborated upon to some extent in various other presentations herein, there is some evidence of space vehicles--besides modern airplanes and so called UFOs, as existing in historic times as well as today (as mentioned in a prior chapter).  At least, the Book seems to describe some of these manifestations (II Kg 2:11; Ezek 1:4-26; Acts 1:9). 

 

 

Linked to Events on Earth? 

 

For another significant point, there is much Scriptural evidence indicating that historically heavenly signs have accompanied some important events and time periods on earth.  Comets, in particular, have long represented a sign of real potential for the inhabitants of earth.  Many persons believe that they represent an omen of coming trouble while others look upon them as signs of coming blessings. 

 

In this regard and in terms of the Word, one can perceive great wonders, signs and movements in the heavens at the creation of Adam; the flood era (see Rom 1:17-20 and also Gen 9:13 on the rainbow); Yisrael's exodus from Egypt; the time of Yehudah's king Hizkiyahu (when the sundial reversed itself--Isa 38:8); and the advent, life and death of YESHUA The MESSIAH (see Matt 27:45 and Lu 23:44-45). 

 

The birth, life and death of The SON OF ADAM is intriguing because the student of truth can perhaps glean from secular historical sources some records of very important heavenly signs and motions which occurred then. 

 

For example, Halley's Comet passed earth in 12 BCE, about seven years before YESHUA’s birth.  Also preceding His birth, there was a significant conjunction of the planets Jupiter and Saturn three times in 7 BCE (May, Oct, Dec)--perhaps a year or two before the advent of The KING (Mar-Apr 2000 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 7). 

 

This type of conjunction only happens every 800 years.  It is believed to be the star of Yakov mentioned prophetically in Numbers 24:17.  In 6 BCE, the planet Mars joined the Saturn-Jupiter conjunction which made the whole event most extraordinary (Mar-Apr 2000 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 7). 

 

 

More 

 

Dr Mark Kitcher is a British astronomer of some notoriety.  He was on the Art Bell “Dreamland” program on December 19, 1999, and was interviewed by the guest host Whitley Strieber.  Kitcher noted the above conjunction of Saturn and Jupiter, but then went on further. 

 

He said that near Passover in 5 BCE, Korean and Chinese astrologers saw a giant “hairy star” in the East for about 2 1/2 months.  At one time, another smaller star was seen which seemed to connect to the larger one in a limited conjunction.  Kitcher says the hairy star was likely a giant nova.  From the earth, the smaller star appeared to almost touch the nova far out in space (thus, forming the conjunction). 

 

In an article on “And there shall be SIGNS in the heavens” in the Mar-Apr 2000 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 8), William F. Dankenbring mentioned that on Rosh Hashanah (correctly Yom Teruah, Day of Trumpets) in 3 BCE (Sep 11th), the planet Jupiter went into conjunction with the star Regulus, the brightest star in the sign of Leo the Lion. 

 

Per Dankenbring, Jupiter passed over the star and then eventually came back over it in a retrograde motion on February 17, 2 BCE.  It then reversed itself again to pass over Regulus a third time on May 8, 2 BCE. 

 

Also, near the birth of The SON of ADAM, there were three lunar eclipses--March 23, 5 BCE, Sep 15, 5 BCE and Mar 13, 4 BCE (per Dr Ernest Martin, formerly of Portland, OR). 

 

Finally, the destruction of Jerusalem in 70 CE was interesting because of many reported heavenly lights and signs over Palestine that year (per Josephus' “War of the Jews,” Book 6, Chap 5, Sect 3). 

 

Furthermore, in terms of the future, the book of Revelation and other writings convey the message that many heavenly signs and portends will accompany the age end.  Although some of these descriptions are both dramatic and extensive, it must be noted that in several instances there could be some symbolism involved which can be awfully complex and complicated to try to interpret. 

 

For example, one can perceive this difficulty by taking a look at the birth of SALVATION, around 5 BCE.  Seemingly, it was announced and located by means of a great light and star (Num 24:16-24; Matt 2:2-7; Lu 2:9-10). 

 

But while a star may be a real, physical star, it is also possible that a star symbolically can refer to a messenger or angel (Rev 1:20).  Obviously, this difficulty over definitions can extend to the matter of prophetic interpretations. 

 

 

The Age End 

 

However, notwithstanding the complexities involved, there are enough texts which do communicate sufficiently for us to accept the fact that the final countdown of time in this age will be preceded and accompanied by a host and variety of heavenly signs and wonders.  And while the purpose of this publication is not to study all of these texts, per se, a few will be shared to demonstrate the point. 

 

First, and just before the epic on Mount Moriah, YESHUA's disciples inquired of Him as to the sign of His coming return and the end of the age (Matt 24:3).  Now, while His response could have had some application to 70 CE and the destruction of the Temple (and probably did as an ante-type), there is sufficient evidence in the Book to suggest that the type of this whole prophecy is still future. 

 

In this regard, there is no need to cover all of YESHUA’s applicable remarks in Matthew 24 and its parallel presentation in Luke 21.  However, it would be useful to note that He does seem to clearly describe solar and lunar eclipses, as well as other portends in the heavens in respect to the termination period (Matt 24:29-30; Lu 21:11, 25-27). 

 

These same or related phenomenons are vividly outlined in many other pungent references.  For example, solar and lunar eclipses are linked to the age end repeatedly by numerous other prophets (Isa 13:10; Ezek 30:18; 32:7-8; Joel 2:10, 31; 3:15; Amos 8:9; Micah 3:6; Zech 14:6; Rev 6:12 and Rev 8:12, which could also involve an eclipse). 

 

Importantly, earth witnessed a most unique planetary alignment in the sign of Aries/Taurus--involving Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter and Saturn, plus the moon on May 5, 2000, as briefly noted earlier.  Some persons perceived this sign (with the sun, earth or some other seventh light) as a fulfillment of Revelation 1:12. 

 

Moreover, Venus went into conjunction with Jupiter on May 17, 2000, and with Saturn on May 18th (Mar-Apr 2000 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 3). 

 

As noted in previous comments, a fascinating conjunction of Jupiter and Saturn occurred on May 27-31, 2000, in the constellation of Pisces.  Some believe that this sign was the star (of Yakov) seen by the wise men in the East at the birth of YESHUA, as noted above.  Several expect it to announce the next return of YESHUA. 

 

In another unique occurrence, the five planets nearest earth (Mercury, Venus, Mars, Saturn and Jupiter came into a close alignment on April 20, 2002, and stayed that way until around May 15, 2002.  The crescent new moon passed through them to add to the interest. 

 

Finally, Dankenbring’s article (p. 16), just cited, says that around Aug 29, 2007, the planet Saturn will proceed to a conjunction with Regulus, the king star, mentioned above.  It will be near conjunction on Yom Teruah on Sep 12, 2007. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 497--Signs in the Heavens II

 

 

More on Comets, Meteorites, Meteors and Asteroids 

 

In what could be very important, there has been a series of comets seen on earth in the past several years--like Halley’s (1986), Shoemaker Levy 9 (1994), Hyakutake (1996-1997) and Hale Bopp (1996-1997).  Perhaps in the vein of an ominous sign of pending destruction, comet Linear was discovered in Sep 1999.  It became visible on earth in July 2000 in the constellation Perseus (significantly on July 22-25). 

 

The Art Bell Coast to Coast AM radio program had a news announcement on Mar 2, 2001, that a new comet was discovered on Nov 12, 2000.  It may rendezvous with earth in a future time period. 

 

Moreover, a possible meteorite shower must be contemplated in the age end (Rev 6:13, 8:10).  For example, earth passed through a meteorite belt on Dec 9, 1990, which produced a significant meteorite shower over the Midwestern portion of the United States.  

 

An AP report published in the Guam “Pacific Daily News” of Dec 9, 1990, described it as including one huge fireball which was one of the largest ever seen as it zipped across America.  The story went on to add that this exhibit was the trail of junk or remains of a comet which earth passes through each December in its travel around the heavens. 

 

As late as February 3, 1999, another large, bright, blue meteor was seen streaking across the US Western skies (Feb 3, 1999, “Spokesman Review”).  These signs are not unusual at all.  Some future ones may be particularly relevant. 

 

Meteors and asteroids abound in the heavens to not only produce spectacular signs, but can have far reaching significance if they should strike earth by chance.  In terms of assessing this possibility, a future chapter will quote Dr Rod Lewis and present efforts to analyze such a coming catastrophe, using the latest computer technology. 

 

A Reuters news report on Dec 4, 1990, noted that a crater on the edge of Yucatan Peninsula, with a 110 mile wide diameter, was the result of an asteroid hit there some 65 million years ago.  Scientists have speculated that this event may have caused the extinction of the dinosaurs then inhabiting this planet.  Similar craters have been found in Iowa and off the coast of California. 

 

A really big crash on earth could spell disaster for perhaps all or much of life on this globe.  By the way, and on this possibility, it is evident from a study of both the face of planet earth as well as the surface of the moon, that a large array of heavenly bodies have struck both globes many times over during the long ages of time.  Such an event should not be thought of as impossible or even necessarily rare. 

 

 

More Examples 

 

The December 1989 “Omni” magazine had an article on “Stars” by Jane Bosveld which noted that “Somewhere out there is an asteroid or comet that’s on a collision course with planet earth.  Someday it will fulfill its destiny, careening through our atmosphere and dealing a devastating blow.  We may never now what hit us.” 

 

Going on, Bosveld pointed out that in March 1989, asteroid 1989-FC barely missed earth when it passed some 450,000 miles away.  She said that this one comes by every 13 months and statistically should hit something (the earth or the moon) within 30 years.  

 

While 450,000 miles might seem to be a long distance, one must remember that earth travels 1.5 million miles a day in its orbit.  The 1989-FC asteroid was missed by just a few hours. 

 

On January 7, 2002, another large asteroid missed earth by 520,000 miles.  This 1,000 foot space rock would have wiped out a country the size of France if it struck the earth (Jan 18, 2002, “The Week,” p. 18). 

 

As late as Mar 12, 2002, an asteroid (2002 EM7) some 200 feet in diameter came unexpectedly out of the direction of the sun (and thus not seen on earth until four days before it passed earth) to pass within 288,000 miles of earth (Jul-Aug 2002, “Prophecy Flash,” p. 35).  Since the moon’s orbit is some 239,000 miles from earth, 2002 EM7 was very close! 

 

A more alarming possibility was mentioned in the Summer 1990 “Issues” magazine, in a story on “Meteorite Into the Sea.”  The question was asked--what would happen if one crashed into the ocean?  In regards to a possible answer, the point was made that a large tidal wave would result which could destroy ships and low-lying coastal areas. 

 

If one hits the Atlantic, it could mean the demise of the Eastern US seaboard, as well as large areas in Europe, Africa and Latin America.  This whole scenario sounds much like the second trumpet of Revelation 8:8; where a mountain of fire hits the sea and a third of the sea becomes blood (polluted?) and a third of the life (in the sea) and ships are destroyed. 

 

A 1999 Knight Ridder news report on “Space hazards” said that astronomers are discovering increasing potential killer asteroids which could strike earth, causing enormous damage and/or loss of life. 

 

The report said 55 new ones were found in 1998 and large ones are expected to come near earth’s orbit in 1999.  Scientists say that there are perhaps 2000 of them out there and only 8% are now identified (Feb 23, 1998, “Spokesman-Review,” p. A2). 

 

 

Strange Signs on the Way? 

 

The Art Bell Coast to Coast AM radio talk show program had a scientist named Richard Hoagland on for a discussion of peculiar signs in the heavens on August 18, 1999.  For a start, mention was made to the fact that astronomers have discovered and are tracking the light of a strange object far away in the Northern skies. 

 

During a solar eclipse a few days earlier, the same or another strange object was seen and photographed in the heavens when the sun was darkened.  Richard Hoagland believes the two objects are different.  He says that the first one might be the remains or remnant of comet Lee while the other might be from comet Inky which earth passes through twice a year (in Jun-Jul and early Nov). 

 

Finally, Art Bell talked to another scientist named Charlie Pylar in North Carolina who has discovered one of the same or another object in space moving toward earth by studying ultra low frequency radio sound waves, as the earth acts as an antenna to pick up these waves. 

 

What all these signs and possible coming events may mean was not clear.  Surely, as the age end unfolds, there will be more fantastic signs and displays in the heavens to convey some message to man. 

 

 

The Leonids 

 

On Nov 17, 1999; Nov 17, 2000; Nov 18, 2001; and Nov 18, 2002; the Leonids meteor belt (from the remains of a comet named Temple-Tuttle) was closest to earth and was more significant than most earlier showers.  The one in 1833 caused the developing Adventist movement to believe that they were in the age end, when stars seemed to fall.  Yes, “Stars Fell On Alabama,” as a later song would say. 

 

Earth passes through or near the Leonids annually.  But they are far more significant in a cycle of about every 33 years.  The 1999, 2000, 2001 and 2002 Leonids’ showers were all four extraordinary and especially in Europe and Africa in 1999 and in North America in 2000, 2001 and 2002. 

 

In 1999, the Southeastern US reported seeing some 1,700 shooting stars an hour which was impressive.  In 2000, one thousand shooting stars an hour were seen.  In 2001, some 15,000 were seen per hour (Jan-Feb 2002 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 24). 

 

And in 2002, up to 30,000 meteors an hour appeared to lighten the night sky somewhat during the Leonids’ shower.  Such a display as this one is not expected to repeat itself again until the year 2099 (ibid, p. 24). 

 

 

The Sun and Solar Eruptions/Flares 

 

Moreover, the sun started producing its periodic sunspot activity with giant solar flares and eruptions in the late summer of 1999.  This occurs every eleven years or so.  But by the sixth Scriptural month of 1999, it was apparent that this cycle would be extraordinary.  The current cycle may have peaked in 2001, but it is hard to tell for sure. 

 

Incidentally, the sun is going through several enormous changes.  It is getting smaller and brighter (hotter).  The Vol 3, 2003 issue of “Scriptures for America” (p. 24) quoted author Donald Patten that the sun is shrinking in diameter at the rate of 1/2 inch per hour.  This must be an important observation and especially if the decline should accelerate. 

 

The US and other governments have a host of satellites in orbit around the sun to continuously monitor it.  Apparently, scientists are concerned about the sun for some reason.  They should be so--because the Word describes the coming nova of the sun, as will be addressed in later comments. 

 

 

Something Fantastic 

 

An article from the Internet indicates that Rosh Hashanah in one year will present a unique sign called a “OTh B’Shamayim” (Sign-[OTh--Hebrew--aleph, tav] in the heavens). 

 

“Beithula (Virgo) will have within her a unique alignment of all the planets along with HaL’vana (the moon).  (L’vana represents Mashiach and Yis’rael.)  Beithula will be about to give birth to L’vana.  Above L’vana will be positioned the constellation ‘Bernice’s hair’ a crown of twelve stars (or alternatively, could the twelve stars be above the woman, per Rev 12:1?--ed)! 

 

“To have the possibility of seeing this unusual sign, Hama (the sun) will have to be at the horizon; thus clothing Beithula with the Hama.  To complete it all, positioned below the thighs of Beithula is TANAIM (Draco), also called Livi’than, waiting to devour the child -- The L’vana = Mashiach Yeshua = Yis’rael. 

 

“Ancient Jewish sources identified Tanaim (the dragon) and Livi’than with Mashiach Sheker (The False Messiah).  The Livi’than was known as a creature with 7 heads and 10 horns.  This ‘OTh’ has NEVER happened before and will NEVER happen again... B’Shem HaShem” (Jan-Feb 1998 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 86, Rev 12:1-5). 

 

This Internet report suggested that this wonderful, great sign would occur in 1999. However, there seems to have been some problems with 1999.  Although this apocalyptic sign will apparently be prophetic and come near the events signified, 1999 was seemingly not the year.  At least, there seems to be no reports that it was seen by anyone. 

 

Thus, the situation in 1999 seemed clear that the sign might come later--like perhaps in 2000 or even later, if it is to be observed some seven years before the end of this age (which may come in Yechezkel’s 37th year).  But there were apparently some problems in the year 2000, just as there were for 1999. 

 

The heavenly sign of the woman (the sixth sign of the zodiac) supposedly comes during the Julian solar period of Aug 23d to Sep 22d, which is said to be the time of Virgo the Virgin (“The Concise Columbia Encyclopedia,” p. 942). 

 

Howbeit, there may be some difficulty in seeing this thing as the Internet report said  because the “Concise Columbia Encyclopedia” notes that with the procession of the equinoxes, the equinox and solstice points have moved Westward about 30 degrees in the past 2,000 years. 

 

Therefore, the zodiacal constellations named in ancient times may no longer correspond precisely and correctly to the segments of the zodiac, as represented by their signs. 

 

 

More on When 

 

For sure, the sign being discussed involves a state of new moon.  In terms of 2000, another problem came up in that the new moon of Yom Teruah (Day of Trumpets) came around Sep 30th, per the Jewish calendar. 

 

The writer of this study at hand thinks that this late date was probably wrong and that Yom Teruah possibly could have come around Aug 31st-Sep 1st, which meant that the year started around March 7th in the spring. 

 

However, if the Jewish calendar is correct with the late date, the next question is--could the sign still have occurred in the sixth month, around Aug 31st-Sep 1st in 2000, as opposed to Sep 30th?  If so, even persons following the Jewish calendar could have seen the sign around Aug 31st-Sep 1st, just as other persons would see it who started the Scriptural year around Mar 7th. 

 

This 2000 possibility had particular appeal for a lot of reasons.  First, it more likely was close to YESHUA’s return (perhaps in Yechezkel’s 37th year, which is still future in 2003).  And there is the reality of the previously mentioned planetary alignment of Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter and Saturn--plus the moon on May 5, 2000, and the possible star of Yakov on May 31, 2000. 

 

In articles on the zodiac and virgo, “Encyclopedia Americana” notes that the sign of Virgo reaches its highest point in the heavens around May 25th presently.  Evidently, it is visible in the heavens for some part of the summer. 

 

So the possibility of seeing the sign of Revelation 12:1 can be extremely complicated.  It could possibly come anytime between May and October.  May 2000 was intriguing with the planetary alignment going on then, as just noted.  But there were no reports of the sign being seen, so probably 2000 was not the year. 

 

 

2001 and Later 

 

Otherwise, Yom Teruah was in the Virgo sign in 2001 and in 2002 (and will be in 2004). 

 

Since the new moon’s placement would seem to be in the zodiac sign of Virgo in the year in question, it is interesting that during the period of Sep 17-19, 2001, the new moon of Sep 18th was placed in Virgo (“The Old Farmer’s 2001 Almanac,” p. 78).  So 2001 looked enticing for the sign.  But it did not seem to materialize that year (or at least, there were no reports of the sign being seen). 

 

The next year on the burner was 2002 which also presented some interesting features.  The new moon of Yom Teruah occurred on September 7, 2002, which put it directly in the Virgo period.  “The Old Farmer’s 2002 Almanac” (p. 84, 227) placed the visible crescent of the new moon of Sep 7-8, 2002, directly in the Virgo constellation. 

 

In the year of 2003, the new moon occurred about Sep 26th which might be too late for the Virgo sign.  But the years 2004 and 2005 both seem to offer possibilities.  The year 2006 looks out with the new moon on Sep 23d.  The new moon in 2007 comes on Sep 12th, which is a possible date.  The years after 2010 look questionable since the sign would seem to be too late, if it is to be prophetic for Yechezkel’s 30th year by 2010. 

 

As a minimum, believers should be looking for this sign during the times of the new moon--which occur during the period of Virgo, starting in 2004 and continuing on until the sign is seen and identified. 

 

Whereas most interpreters accept the Man Child as YESHUA, this writer would allow that he could be one of the two prophets or the final two witnesses (like Eliyahu or even someone else of relevance, who may start his work by Yechezkel’s 30th year), as briefly noted earlier.  Or alternatively, this sign may connect in some manner to the organization or presence of the age ending Philadelphia assembly of believers. 

 

 

The Eclipse Signs--A Prelude 

 

Planet earth had a fantastic solar eclipse on August 11, 1999--which was seen across Europe and Asia.  It was extraordinary for many reasons.  Of great importance, it was to be the last one to be seen in Europe for the next 79 years. 

 

Author J. M. Sckrabulis called it the great millennial eclipse.  In some comments preceding the event, he said it would soar across Central Europe, the Middle East and India and that it would be a second coming like occurrence

 

He added that on this day, earth would be at the center of a cosmic cross, a rare configuration of planets that would symbolize the Book of Revelation icons of the Eagle, the Ox, the Lion and so-called humanity (the four faces of the cherubim--Ezek 1:10; 10:14-22). 

 

Finally, he said that earth would undergo a crucifixion in space as it was pierced by the heavenly lance of the eclipse shadow.  This sign was supposed to be the eclipse which presages the Great king of Terror--rising up of the Beast in full hideous horror like a hooded cobra (Apr-May 1998 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 16, Ezek 1:10). 

 

Turning to the moon, an eclipse occurred at the full moon on January 21, 2000, which was somewhat separated from the just described solar eclipse.  Interestingly, the January 21 eclipse outlined a blood red moon.  Another fascinating blood red eclipse happened on July 16, 2000. 

 

Moreover, there is one more possibility on the moon sign.  Immediately following the time of the August 1999 full moon, just after the solar eclipse (of Aug 26, 1999), there was a surge of wildfires in the Western US.  The smoke, fumes and haze from these fires were enormous and affected a large area in the Southwestern US for the following couple of weeks. 

 

This air pollution was so thick in some areas that the waning full moon similarly appeared to be blood red (discussed on the Art Bell Coast to Coast AM program of Aug 30, 1999).  So Americans have seen more than one recent blood red full moon.  With the eruption of more wildfires in 2001, this sign has had more fulfillments. 

 

Next, in terms of the North American continent, there was a unique combination of solar and lunar eclipses in the winter of 2000-2001.  A partial solar eclipse occurred across part of the North American continent on December 25, 2000.  It was followed by a total lunar eclipse across much of North America on January 9, 2001. 

 

Finally, another combination of solar and lunar eclipses occurred on June 21 and July 5, 2001.  How significant these events will be is not clear at the time of this writing. 

 

 

Putting This Together 

 

In “Biblical Astronomy and the Calendar,” writer Harold Hemenway put Revelation 6:12 (a black sun like sackcloth and a blood red moon) together as a prelude to the sign of the woman in Revelation 12:1-5.  Hemenway saw the Revelation 6:12 sign as a solar eclipse and a lunar eclipse, at least fifteen days apart, unless a comet was to enter the picture. 

 

However, if the Revelation 12 sign would have appeared in 1999, it well could be that the great millennial solar eclipse did blacken the sun (over Britain, Europe and Asia) and conceivably the case could be made that one of the blood red moons completed Revelation 6:12--at least in an ante-typical fulfillment and enough to excite some Christians. 

 

This option seems tenuous at best--since there was no evidence of the presence of the image of the woman in 1999, as mentioned in the Internet article.  But it does illustrate how these phenomena can come together.  While eclipses could be involved to produce these signs, they could also come about otherwise from natural phenomenons--like air pollution from natural or man-made events. 

 

The better view seems to be that this great solar eclipse might have significance at least in an ante-typical fulfillment of Revelation 6:12 (which the writer of this study at hand holds is still future in early 2003). 

 

Hemenway also mentions a meteorite shower--which could be the Perseids meteor belt that earth passed through on August 12, 1999, and there is the case of the Leonids’ showers in 1999, 2000, 2001 and 2002 (with an exceptional display in 2002, as discussed above). 

 

Again, this sign in 1999 could be ante-typical of a still future event (Isa 34:4; Rev 6:13).  Also, in terms of the US, the winter 2000-2001 and the summer 2001 signs appear to be very important signs which could be the ante-type of Rev 6:12.  In any case, the writer of this study looks for the actual fulfillment of Revelation 6:12 and 12:1-5 in the future, after 2002. 

 

Going on, author Hemenway gives some more details about the sign in Revelation 12.  He mentions a “great eagle” (Aquila of Rev 12:14?) and “water like a flood” (Aquarius in Rev 12:15?).  The annual time of Aquarius is January 20th to February 18th.  Otherwise, New Agers and various occultists claim that the earth supposedly entered the astrological age of Aquarius around the year 2000. 

 

In mentioning these astrological signs, this writer is not endorsing the occultic attraction to astrology.  Astrology, as it is practiced today, appears to be demonic--through and through, as noted above.  Perhaps many, long, millennia ago, astrology was thought to be akin to astronomy.  But that is no longer true. 

 

 

Dating the Book of Revelation? 

 

In mentioning above the several possible astronomical fulfillments from the book of Revelation, conditions are falling into place that they will be fulfilled starting by Yechezkel’s 30th year.  This possibility has some confirmation from a unique source. 

 

The “Dreamland” radio program with Whitley Strieber had author Adrian Gilbert of England on as a guest on July 2, 2000.  Gilbert seems to be a person attracted to the study of ancient archeology, events and mysteries.  He has written several books on the Great Pyramid of Egypt and other fascinating sites. 

 

Apparently, in recent times, Gilbert made a study of one of the shafts or vents in the pyramid which focused upon the constellation Orion (as addressed in other remarks herein).  He went on to say that other visible sightings into the heavens from various angles in or on the Egyptian pyramids also project to various interesting heavenly configurations. 

 

One astronomical phenomenon which excited him was of  seven planets of our solar system (presumably all of them, but Mercury and Earth) visibly around or surrounding the Orion constellation (three on one side and four on the other) on June 29th in some years.  He claims he saw this sign in Jerusalem on June 29, 2000. 

 

He says the sign is a sign associated with The NT MESSIAH.  Specifically, he thinks that it is the astronomical sign described in Revelation 2:11-20 of seven stars (planets) around the mythological Orion constellation.  He thinks that in ancient times, this sign would have been important to the Magi who came to see the newborn YESHUA. 

 

As was pointed out above, this writer is not endorsing the implications of astrology in any of these remarks from various persons and students of the heavens.  It is also true with the Great Pyramid and many other structures (like Stonehenge in Britain) that they may have had implications of sun worship for the local sun worshipping people which must be avoided like the plague by students of truth. 

 

Nevertheless, the evidence is massive that some astronomical signs have had relevance in announcing important events in past history.  Clearly, the NT record associated signs with the coming of YESHUA in 5 BCE and likely in the age end.  Therefore, the student of truth must be careful to consider astronomical events and not reject them outright. 

 

Significantly, if the sign mentioned by Gilbert is valid to confirm the occurrence of Revelation 2 on June 29, 2000, then it means that the early 21st century may see the beginning of the fulfillment of the book of Revelation (and the book of Ezekiel, as noted elsewhere herein).  This is something to watch and be alert about. 

 

 

Super Novas 

 

A very interesting situation is also building up right now in the great Milky Way galaxy which could prove to have a spectacular affect on life on planet earth.  The star Betelgeuse is a red, super giant at the edge of the galaxy, so large that if it were at the location of the sun, its presence would reach out to Mars in this solar system. 

 

However, Betelgeuse is now on the path to death when it is expected to implode or explode and produce a super nova as it terminates in the next few years.  When this happens, it will give off a billion years of energy all at once--more energy than all the stars in the Milky Way.  It will be so visible on earth for a few weeks as to cast shadows on earth during the day or night. 

 

There has been another recent report of a likely coming super nova and one which is much closer to earth than Betelgeuse.  The Jun 14, 2002, “The Week” (p. 20) says that a white dwarf called HR 8210 (1.15 times the size of our sun) is preparing to become a super nova.  It is only 150 light years from earth and would have extraordinary implications for earth (as it strips away the ozone layer). 

 

Even in time, our sun will undergo its death and nova in the age end’s fourth vial, as this production describes in various comments herein (Isa 24:20-23; Rev 16:8-9).  Will Betelgeuse and/or HR 8210 explode before or after the nova of our sun?  If before, either could be one of the greatest astronomical events in the history of Adam.  If after, either or both may provide some light for awhile on the darkened earth. 

 

 

Something New 

 

A news report in October 1999 said that astronomers had found an object which could be a burnt out star or a new planet far beyond Pluto (Oct 12, 1999, “Spokesman Review”).  Some astronomers speculated that this object could explain why there is a warp of comets in our solar system. 

 

Apparently, some astronomers viewing this thing expressed their view that it was, in fact, a burnt out star (a mini-star or brown dwarf) located some three trillion miles away.  If it was once a star, astronomers believe that it could have been a sister star to our sun. 

 

But there has been a contrary profile from many astronomers who thought the object was actually another planet in our solar system.  If a planet, it would be number ten. 

 

In the volume viii, number 1 issue of “Christian Media” (p. 1, 4), Christian writer James Lloyd broached this subject in an article on “The Return of Planet X.”  Lloyd says that he became interested in a “Planet X’ over six years ago, apparently because of some theoretical work that was done at Lawrence Livermore Laboratory, some 24 years earlier (in the year 1972). 

 

Lawrence Livermore scientists were studying Halley’s Comet and the data suggested that the comet’s trajectory was being gravitationally interfered with by a large unseen body.  If a planet, it would be number ten, somewhere past Pluto, and possibly four or five times larger than earth with a revolution around the sun of about every 1,800 years. 

 

Anyway, in his 2002 “Christian Media,” Lloyd claims that when he first studied this thing six year ago, he concluded that there was a Planet X out there which, when sighted, would announce that the Great Tribulation was upon so-called humanity. 

 

He went on to specify that Revelation 8 was associated with this Planet X (this writer has looked at Revelation 8 and cannot envision the connection.  Thus, it is mentioned for whatever it might be worth to students of the Book). 

 

Possibly, the astronomical announcement in October 1999 on the new planet or burnt out star must have whet the appetite of Lloyd.  Something motivated him to write his current article on this possible Planet X which, indeed, may one day have some impact upon the inhabitants of earth in some way. 

 

 

More Signs 

 

Actually, a host of Scriptural references very powerfully declare that in the age end, the heavens will produce and exhibit great signs (Rev 15:1), fearful signs (Lu 21:11, 25--meaning awesome and terrible), and wonders (Joel 2:30-31; Rev 12:1).  And it is in this precise context that The SON Of ADAM charged that evil people can't discern the "signs of the times" (Matt 16:3). 

 

The volume 9, number 3 issue of “Bible Light on the News” had a supplement from John Stembrige, dated May 18, 2002, which had some comments on signs.  Stembrige noted that an attorney friend from Washington, DC had seen a “double rainbow” the prior week.  Stembrige also related that in December 1975, while flying near Moscow, he saw a complete round rainbow.  

 

Stembrige, his attorney friend and some others saw a prefect circle around the sun later that day in May 2002 (actually on Shavuot) while out of doors (according to a local meteorologist, the circle was possibly from ice crystals above the earth reflecting sun light).

 

 

Psalms 8:1-4 

 

The bottom line on all of this was summed up for man by the Psalmist long ago with these words:  “O Lord our Lord, how excellent is thy name in all the earth!  Who hast set thy glory above the heavens.  Out of the mouth of babes and sucklings hast thou ordained strength because of thine enemies, that thou mightest still the enemy and the avenger. 

 

“When I consider thy heavens, the work of thy fingers, the moon and the stars, which thou hast ordained;  What is man, that thou art mindful of him?  and the son of man, that thou visited him?” (KJV, Ps 8:1-4).  This last verse was quoted earlier.  But it is so wonderful that it needs mention here again. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 498--Cataclysms in Nature I

 

 

The Flooded Earth, Revisited 

 

A study of geology provides some interesting facts on the history of planet earth.  Wherever one may go over this globe, it is most fascinating that all visible land areas on this body were once under water. 

 

Not only was it possible that in Noah’s day that a worldwide flood “may have” ensued, but it is quite clear from Genesis 1 that the earth was covered with water at its evident reforming just before Adam’s creation. 

 

As was elaborated upon and conclusively proven earlier herein, the first two verses of Genesis open with a description of an original creation which was perfect and good and where the angels shouted for joy (Gen 1:1; Job 38:4-7).  It was not created without form (Hebrew tohu--see Isa 45:18 where the KJV gives tohu as vain) and void (Hebrew bohu), but it became that way in Genesis 1:2 (also, per Jer 4:23). 

 

Former remarks herein have also established that in the tohu/bohu state, the globe was covered with water.  While there may be some doubt about the extent of the water covering the earth in Noah’s day, the coverage in Genesis 1:2 is very certain and cannot be disputed. 

 

It’s very likely that when the water was separated to provide the firmament (atmospheric heaven or space), some of the water went into space orbit around the earth much like the bands of ice/water now apparent around the planet Saturn (Gen 1:2-9). 

 

Manifestly, this tohu and bohu condition, outlined in Genesis 1:2, involved a catastrophic event on earth.  There is no question about it.  Obviously, too, the next big geologic event described in Genesis (of Noah’s flood) is another record of an enormous, catastrophic occurrence, which engulfed part or all of the earth’s surface. 

 

In terms of both of these records of earth floods, one must remember that Genesis is both historical and prophetic.  The type still has some future relevance! 

 

The wording of Genesis 1 and 6 plainly suggests that the water in orbit around earth from the Genesis 1:2 crisis, came down as rain water in Noah’s day, as will be proven below (Gen 7:6).  As discussed in the former chapter on this subject, there is some real question about whether Noah’s flood was global or not. 

 

Regardless, it is important to note another record of water on the earth beyond the initial water coverage in Genesis 1:2 

 

 

The Future 

 

Some students of the Word have suggested that in the age end, much of the earth’s water (now in the oceans and seas) will go back up once more to reform bands of ice, as existed in Genesis 1 (based upon Rev 21:1).  Again, Genesis is prophetic! 

 

This belief of a band of water and/or ice surrounding earth after Genesis 1 has a lot of support from several sources.  In the first place, it is quite logical in the sense that it readily explains the mass of water that came onto earth during Noah’s flood and particularly in conjunction with waters from the fountains of the deep (Gen 7:11).  It would appear that this flood of water ran off to form the great oceans. 

 

A discussion on the Dreamland radio program on Sep 10, 2000, by Whitley Strieber and his guest, noted that geologists have now confirmed that the ocean levels were once at least 300 feet lower than they are today.  Obviously, part of the present ocean waters came from somewhere.  The most logical option seems to be that they came from the heavens in rain to cause Noah’s flood. 

 

Therefore, it might be that there was some semblance of the oceans in the context of the early chapters of Genesis.  But surely, much of the surviving ocean waters after Noah’s flood came from the flood.  This fascinating truth has some most unusual support from modern science (as will shortly be shown). 

 

 

Modern Geology 

 

As allowed in a former chapter, this writer used to struggle with the belief that the quantity of water (however much it was) in the 40 days rain of the flood (Gen 7:4) could not have covered the world’s highest mountains--like the lofty Mount Ararat which towers 17,260 feet high and some 10,000 feet above the table land it stands upon (“Davis Dictionary of the Bible,” p. 50). 

 

Even if much of the water came from orbiting bands of water/ice, as described in preceding comments, there still must be some question of how this water could cover such high mountains for a year’s time without quickly running off into the ocean basins.  Water rapidly does seek its own level.  Rain water hurriedly runs off to the oceans even today. 

 

The answer to this dilemma has now been answered by modern geology in the context of “plate tectonics,” as currently taught and believed by contemporary geologists. 

 

The gist of this thinking is that the earth’s exterior crust may be made up of a number of floating blocks or plates of mantle rocks.  These plates are presumed to be floating on a molten core of lava and similar materials in the earth’s interior or core (or these plates could be floating or moving upon an inner crust or shell depending upon what does directly cover the magma). 

 

As these plates jostle against each other, they can cause earthquakes and erupting volcanoes.  Many people are familiar with the famous San Andrea’s fault extending up the California coast almost into Oregon.  This is a case of a continental US plate pushing against and actually over-lapping a Pacific plate.  This phenomenon extends North to Canada and from the Western US coast to just East of the Cascades. 

 

As discussed earlier, the evidence is that a post-flood earth had one giant super continent which divided in the days of Peleg (Gen 10:25).  In this division, the North and South America continents have been drifting West and pushing against the Pacific plates over the last 4,500 years.  The continental plates have pushed so hard that they have actually overlapped the Pacific plates in the Western areas of the Americas. 

 

This push has created a so-called circle of fire around much of the Pacific Ocean.  This circle has produced many of the famous volcanoes and earthquakes (which will be shortly addressed). 

 

The short of this is that as the continental movement continues, the pressure is intensifying to cause more and more volcanic and earthquake activity all around this circle of fire. 

 

Another feature of these floating plates (or the floating crust if that be the case) is that the plates can apparently move vertically up or down as well as laterally. 

 

There is the obvious reality of the Western United States where from Washington state to Southern California, the continental plate has pushed itself over the top of the Pacific plate inland past the Cascades, as just noted above.  But otherwise, the plates can still float up or down for possible other reasons. 

 

 

Former Land Areas Now Under Water? 

 

The importance of this floating plate concept is that there are probably areas right now under water which reflect the architecture, construction and civilization of man.  A good illustration of this theory exists in the Caribbean area where the Atlantic Ocean covers the semblance of man-made works (including a long rock road) under several feet of water (off Bimini Island). 

 

Is it plausible that the Caribbean portion of the Atlantic once was a land surface where humans dwelt and constructed a long rock road which now seems visible under water?  In the context of plate tectonics, it is indeed very possible and must not be ruled out.  Very easily, a plate once above water can now be below water (plus, there is the clear reality of earth floods which covered former land areas). 

 

Another extraordinary find supporting this idea occurred as recently as May 15, 2001, when news reports (from Reuters) said that scientists have found the possible remains of a civilization/city in the ocean floor just off of the Northwest portion of Cuba, not far from Havana Bay (as reported by Art Bell on the Coast to Coast AM radio program that day). 

 

Part of this possible city is buried under sand.  But much of it seems identifiable by advanced sonar means at about 2,200 feet down (this depth is substantially lower than other reports of structures under water).  Reportedly, roads, building structures, maybe a  pyramid and other evidence of a civilization now seem evident.  Further research will be needed to identify the site. 

 

There is also evidence of the remains of underwater cities in the Atlantic off of England and Northern France (discussed by Whitley Strieber on the Dreamland program on Sep 10, 2000).  Obviously, there is evidence that there are some physical aspects of geology and geography in the Atlantic Ocean floor--which remain a mystery to this day. 

 

 

Egypt 

 

This writer has long supposed that probably the Great Pyramid in Egypt was built by Iyov and Israelites (possibly Israelite slaves) in Egypt around 1700 BCE (as suggested in a previous discussion on Iyov and pride and vanity).  And this thinking may still be the truth.  However, the May-Jun 2002 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 35) had a report which does raise some questions about this thinking. 

 

Per the “Prophecy Flash,” there is some evidence suggesting that both the Great Pyramid and the nearby Sphinx were built in pre-flood days (presumably before Noah and the pre-flood era of Genesis 6).  This article claims that when Abdulla Al Mamun broke into the Great Pyramid in 820 CE, he found the walls and floors encrusted with ocean salt as much as an inch thick. 

 

The exterior of the Great Pyramid showed watermarks up half way of its 500 feet height.  Silt sediments around the base of the edifice contained many seashells and marine fossils.  The nearby Sphinx supposedly shows much vertical erosion from rain/water (however, some persons claim that the erosion now in evidence is from the wind). 

 

Thus, the conclusion in the story was that both edifices were built before the days of Noah and the flood--although the question must be asked on why these findings are not in evidence today, in terms of the Great Pyramid?  

 

 

The Mediterranean 

 

A former chapter herein also offered actual geological evidence that the floor of the Mediterranean Sea was once a visible land area free of water. 

 

The remarks of Lambert Dolphin on “The Great Mediterranean Desert” were quoted in a previous chapter.  As Dolphin reported, the Mediterranean Sea floor contains salt deposits which could have been caused by Noah’s flood.  This finding has led to speculation that some part of the Mediterranean was once dry land. 

 

In support of this possibility, the Mediterranean island of Malta has an interesting road which runs into the sea--or rather that comes out of the sea onto dry land, however one may wish to characterize it.  In recent years, archeologists have discovered the remains of an ancient city under the Mediterranean just off of the Northern coast of Egypt. 

 

The Aegean Sea inlet of the Mediterranean Sea lies between Greece and Asia Minor.  There is substantial evidence of man-made construction under portions of it.  Many think that the fabled continent of Atlantis, as mentioned by Plato (c400 BCE), could have been in the Aegean Sea or somewhere in the Atlantic Ocean.  Wherever it may have existed, it is apparently under water today. 

 

The earlier mentioned report by Bruce B. Auster on evidence of a great flood in the Black Sea Basin some 7,500 years ago also suggests that the sea/ocean levels were once substantially lower than they are today.  In this find, the once coastline is now 550 feet beneath the current surface level of the water.  A Sep 13, 2000, news report said that the remains of a city (now under 300 feet of water) has also been found there. 

 

This Black Sea find is interesting because today the sea contains salt water which connects to the Mediterranean.  The ancient sea did not connect and was a fresh water body.  Too, the find can likewise be suggestive of the role of earth tectonics in raising or lowering land areas (although the flood of water from earth orbit could have covered this land area during Noah’s flood, as discussed in a former chapter).  

 

 

Ararat, Revisited 

 

The reverse of this phenomenon is probably true over portions of Asia and particularly in the context of Mount Ararat and its surrounding chain.  Apparently, this area must have been substantially lower than it is today.  It is very likely that during the latter part of the flood that this plate began rising so that Mount Ararat projected above the water and the ark lodged on it at about the 14,000 feet or higher level. 

 

This vertical movement of the involved plate would not have altered the previously allowed band of water around earth in the pre-flood environment.  It is primarily this band of water which came down massively to flood the earth.  But as noted earlier, it must be pointed out that there are Scriptural allusions to water also coming from the earth in the context that the fountains of the deep broke up (Gen 7:11). 

 

Thus, it appears that this massive amount of water from the flood probably ran off to form the present oceans which means that some portions of the ocean and sea floors were once dry land areas.  This precise situation could be the reason that the historic Garden of Eden might now be under the Persian Gulf (as discussed earlier), as well as accounting for the just mentioned Atlantic, Mediterranean and Aegean phenomena. 

 

It is no easy matter to be precisely certain of exactly which land masses were up or down in the pre-flood environment.  But there is a good chance that much of the earth’s land crust was above the water though there surely were some presence of oceans to provide a habitat for salt water fish and mammals that must have been present from the (re)creation of Genesis 1. 

 

 

Other Catastrophes, Revisited 

 

Former chapters have also focused upon some of the Scriptural accounts which categorically disprove evolutionary uniformitarianism.  Of course, the two floods outlined above were both catastrophic beyond description.  But there were other events almost as awesome and far reaching. 

 

For example, Genesis 10:25 describes what seems to be a once, great, super-continent which was divided in the days of Peleg (as also allowed in Gen 1:9, discussed earlier).  As noted earlier, geologists now understand this former, huge, super-continent.  The evidence is overwhelming that the present continental land masses were once joined together in one great continent. 

 

During the period of the Exodus, YHWH entered some judgments upon Egypt--like the rivers, ponds and bodies of water of Egypt becoming blood for seven days (Ex 4:9; 7:17-25); epidemics of frogs, lice and  flies which caused the land to be corrupted and stink (Ex 8:5-31); the death of the animals of Egypt (Ex 9:3-7); boils upon the humans/humanoids of Egypt (Ex 9:9-11); a great thunder, hail and electric storm (Ex 9:12-34); a locust outbreak (Ex 10:4-19); darkness over the land of Egypt for three days which could be felt (Ex 10:21); and the death of Egypt’s firstborn (Ex 12:29). 

 

On leaving Egypt, there was the cloud of darkness which came between the pursuing Egyptians and the Israelites while the Israelites themselves had light (Ex 14:20).  Moreover, the Israelites miraculously crossed the sea while the pursuing Egyptians were killed by the water (Ex 14:21-23). 

 

As discussed earlier, this could have occurred if the sea became ice.  At a first glance, a massive freeze in the Egypt-Sinai area seems impossible--based upon today’s climate and weather pattern.  Of course, not only could there have been a climate change, but there could have been a single extraordinary event at that time to cause the water to freeze. 

 

Incidentally, the earlier quoted May-Jun 2002 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 35) also had some remarks indicating that a number of chariot wheels, axles and hubs have been found encrusted with coral in the Red Sea area--possibly in the flour of the Gulf of Aqaba (which is across the Sinai from Egypt proper). 

 

This find was made recently by Dr Leonard Moller of Sweden and a team of researchers.  Could these finds date from the Exodus? 

 

 

More Catastrophes 

 

Then there was Yehoshua’s long day when the sun stood still so that Yisrael could have a military victory over the Amorites (Josh 10:8-14).  A question must persist as to what happened in the heavens to twist the earth and sun around in some manner that there was an extra long day in that area of earth. 

 

Last, there was the situation with King Hizkiyahu when he was given a sign from the shadow of the sun dial when it reversed itself by ten degrees (Isa 38:8).  Again, there was some fantastic alterations in the heavens in terms of earth and the sun to cause this phenomenon.  Or alternatively, perhaps a great comet of light passed by or a nearby star went through the nova process to provide extraordinary light on earth. 

 

Incidentally, in mentioning these two incredible events involving the sun or something else (in relation to earth), both would likely have necessitated some extraordinary preparations over vast eons of time.  To set the heavenly bodies in motion to cause the desired results at the right time may have required millions of earth years in lead time. 

 

If this is true, it means that The SOVEREIGN RULER of the Universe knew that those prayers (by Yehoshua and Hizkiyahu) would be made and that He would intervene to answer them.  This is awesome to think about. 

 

The essence here is that the Book describes some fantastic and far reaching events on planet earth which could be thought of or described as catastrophic.  In other words, there have been some great catastrophes over the years.  What man has seen in the last several centuries, in terms of earth changes, has not been the story over the last several thousands of years. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 499--Cataclysms in Nature II

 

 

Pole Reversals and Shifts

 

There is today quite a body of geologic evidence existing to suggest a number of complete reversals of the poles.  This evidence is in the form of striations found in rocks in various places around the globe (especially near the equator).  These striations present some very persuasive proof that the North and South Poles have completely switched places several times over the eons of time. 

 

In this switch, it appears that the magnetic North Pole has been located where the South Pole is today and that the South Pole is where the North Pole is presently.  This switching must have been an awesome event involving the magnetic axis of the earth.  All of this is quite fascinating in view of contemporary evolutionary thinking about uniformitarianism. 

 

Around June 26, 2001, a caller on the Coast to Coast program offered a few comments on the earth’s magnetic field, which was interesting, though questionable in substance--since they might be pretty far out.  In fact, the show’s host, Ian Punnett, was so opposed to the ideas that he was rude to the caller and cut him off. 

 

The caller said that in his years of studying the earth, he has come to the conclusion that crude oil actually provides the fuel to the core of the earth for the burning and production of magma (some of the remains of which can come out as lava in volcanic eruptions).  This man suggested that with man’s use and consumption of fossil fuels, less of this stuff is now available to fuel the production of internal magma. 

 

Per this caller’s view, there is now two fallouts of this process.  First, the earth’s electro-magnetic field is being reduced (with a reduction both in the weight of the earth and the production of magma) and the earth’s revolution around the sun is slowing down (which is altering the orbit slightly and moving it closer to the sun--thus, meaning a warming earth). 

 

While the writer of this study at hand is not technically qualified to evaluate this revolutionary thinking, the whole idea did fascinate me and justify at least mentioning.  Maybe, the production of magma and the expelling of it in volcanic activity might could affect the earth’s magnetic field and revolution or rotation in some manner. If this happens, who knows what might ultimately occur. 

 

 

Immanuel Velikovsky 

 

Some years ago, a Russian Jew named Immanuel Velikovsky entered the arena and came out with several writings which raised questions about enormous catastrophic changes in earth in the past ages.  One of his books, “Earth in Upheaval,” theorized that the present glacial cover of ice at the poles was because of a shift in the earth’s pole axis in a past age (a lateral shift and not a pole reversal). 

 

In 1950, Dr Velikovsky published another most fascinating book on “Worlds in Collision,” which also postulated that this globe had been subjected to some great upheavals and catastrophes in past ages.  Specifically, Velikovsky suggested that in the time of the Israelite Exodus, the planet Venus passed near the earth to cause some of the strange events associated with the Exodus. 

 

His thinking was revolutionary because it destroyed the stupid theories of evolutionary uniformitarianism (yes, evolution is all wrong and cannot be scientifically supported).  Though the Russian counted Albert Einstein as his personal friend, much of the evolutionary oriented population was to reject his work and attempt to discredit him.  He quickly became a very disliked person--despite his brilliance and credentials. 

 

In more recent years, Christian author and publisher James Lloyd of Jacksonville, Oregon (quoted earlier herein) has suggested that the planet Mars once had an orbit which came extremely close to earth.  Supposedly, Mars passed so close that the red planet could have contributed to some of the earth catastrophes in past ages. 

 

Over the years, various scientists have offered evidence suggesting that the North Pole was once in other areas of the earth.  Some persons have raised questions about the possibility of an earth axis and spin involving the Bermuda Triangle area and its direct opposite coordinate in the so-called Devil’s Sea area between Japan and the Philippines.  So Velikovsky’s work must be taken seriously. 

 

Incidentally, historians are aware of the existence of ancient maps (16th century) of the earth’s land surfaces which show the land area of the continent of Antarctica (in an obvious state of being free of ice and in a very accurate presentation).  As far as modern science is concerned, the continent of Antarctica was discovered in 1818 and it has been covered with ice from its modern discovery. 

 

 

Hugh Auchincloss Brown 

 

Moreover, in 1967, another thinking scientist named Hugh Auchincloss Brown produced a most fabulous book on “Cataclysms of the Earth,” which established that this spinning globe indeed has had more than one pole shift of its axis over the ages, based upon a study of an abundance of physical evidence readily available in our time. 

 

Brown said (p. 2-3) that “Although the earth has continued to rotate on the Axis of Spin that passes through Polaris in the northern sky and the Southern Cross in the southern sky, it has in the course of time turned sideways or ‘careened’ in its spinning, the geographical positions of the poles, the Equator, and the various zones of the globe, have been redefined in respect to the surface terrain. 

 

“During such careening the Equator tilts, and the poles, defining the Axis of Figure, rotate away from the Axis of Spin.  All areas of the globe, except those two points directly on the Axis of Careen, are altered in relation to the Axis of Spin, and hence in relation to their previous climates. 

 

“A land mass or ocean once in an equatorial zone, is shifted towards a polar position; the poles shift around towards the equatorial zones.  The previous Axis of Figure is then replaced by a new one, determined by the new geography of the earth.  At the beginning of each epoch, the Axis of Figure and the Axis of Spin coincide.” 

 

Brown described the possible trigger for such an event by saying that “The rotating equilibrium thrown off balance by the weight of the growing ice caps (at the poles), causes the spinning globe to roll over on its side.  But such an event does not occur lightly.  The oceans, like water in a bowl that is suddenly moved, are cast from their basins to flood the land. 

 

“The winds, previously settled into patterns dependent upon a stable globe, are whipped asunder by the sudden shifting of the globe.  The sudden meeting of warm and cold air creates great pressure zones that spawn new rains and hurricanes to sweep across the earth.  The forces of nature, loosed from their equilibrium, rage wildly in search of a new equilibrium.” 

 

Thus, as the polar ice caps grow and become imbalanced, their imbalanced weight overcomes the gyroscopically stabilizing influence of the slight equatorial bulge of the earth.  When this occurs, the law of centrifugal force precipitates a near 90 degree capsizing of the globe, with a cataclysm of incredible consequences.  The weight of the imbalanced ice would be thrown toward the strongest area of spin--the equator. 

 

With capsizing speeds that can reach 3,000 miles an hour, the whole episode can be quite fast.  It would be just like a spinning top which loses its balance and goes out of control. 

 

 

More From Brown 

 

Otherwise, Brown indicated that the North Pole was once in the Hudson Bay area of North America (which would account for the continental glacier which covered much of the US Midwest) and that the earth experiences a pole shift about every 3,000 to 7,000 years.  He additionally went on to assert that Noah’s flood was due to the last shift of the earth’s axis. 

 

In support of these conclusions by Brown, it is useful to be aware that numerous geologic finds support the previous pole changes.  For example, coral reefs have been discovered in Alaska.  Well preserved trees (thousands of years old) have been found under the treeless Arctic tundra--some with fruit and leaves still intact.  There have been, too, the finds of woolly mammoths, quick frozen while eating tropical plants. 

 

Conversely, in rocks near the equator, other extraordinary finds have been made of glacial striations which show a pole-ward movement of the glaciers, suggesting an extremely cold climate for some time in that now hot, humid territory. 

 

Although this finding is now subject to debate, Brown suggests that the polar caps are currently growing rapidly and that “when the present polar areas move away from the earth’s Axis of Spin,” and the “Poles of Figure move to latitudes of ten to fifteen degrees, or about 5,500 miles from the North and South Poles of Spin,” the earth will tip over (flip-flop) and flood (ibid, p. 10-11). 

 

Per his research, Brown suggests that one of the pole changes and shifts in the earth’s axis occurs about every 3,000 to 7,000 years, as just noted.  He believes that the flood of Genesis 6 involved such a manifestation.  Obviously, much of the land mass will move; and for certain, islands and lower lying areas will immediately flood. 

 

Perhaps the Scriptures have such an event in mind (Job 9:5-6; Ps 18:7-15; 29:8; 46:2-3; 60:2; 68:8; 77:18; Isa 2:13-19; 24:1-20; Ezek 31:16; Amos 8:8; 9:5-6; Hag 2:6-7, 21; Heb 12:26-27; Rev 6:12-17; 8:8-9; 16:16-21).  Future chapters will assess these possibilities and especially in the sense of a certain duality in their accomplishment.  

 

However, there may be some melting of the polar ice in the last couple of years.  It is unclear what might happen if this melting ice is not uniform and if it creates an imbalance.  So, even if the flip of the earth doesn’t happen from accumulated ice, it may happen just from the melting ice and any resulting imbalance (like with a spinning washing machine). 

 

Hugh Brown confirmed this by saying that it isn’t only the matter of the quantity of ice, but it also the balance of that ice over the pole.  Brown estimated in his day that the actual point of rotation was more than 300 miles off the estimated center of gravity of the polar mass.  An off-axis placement creates a situation which could promote a serious wobble or vibration in the earth’s rotation. 

 

Therefore, even if the ice caps do not build up much more presently because of the warming earth (or at least, the warming oceans), the planet could still capsize because the polar meltings might throw the weight distribution out of balance in some significant manner. 

 

In 1885, astronomers first discovered a slight wobble in the earth’s spin of a fraction over an inch.  In the 1930s, it had increased to over six feet.  And in 1967, Hugh Brown estimated that it was at about 50 feet. 

 

 

Other Views 

 

Scientist Walt Myers has suggested that in the last few years, earth has already had one significant magnetic swing of the poles of several degrees.  So something is wrong (per his video, on “Technology and the Mark of the Beast).  Myers’ work and findings will be further assessed in later chapters on climate and weather. 

 

Two Japanese scientists, Shigeyoshi Matsumae and Yoshio Kato, said in 1976 that there was a relationship between atomic explosions and pole shifts.  They said that every time there is an atmospheric or underground test of nuclear weapons, there is an abnormal meteorological phenomenon, such as earthquakes and fluctuation of the earth’s axis (in a cause and effect manner). 

 

They added that whenever explosions of 150 KT or larger occur, the North Pole slides radically--up to one meter.  Actually, this makes sense that an explosion of such magnitude would impact upon the earth’s spin in some manner. 

 

In an article on “Cataclysms in the Year 2000,” appearing in the May-Jun 1980 “Second Look” magazine, John White said “Nuclear testing is the preparation for nuclear war.  What would be the effect, in an all-out atomic conflagration, of megaton jolt after jolt to the earth’s axis?  Assuming, of course, that there is anything more than an asteroid belt remaining of our planet. 

 

 

Pole Shifts from a Land Mass Shift 

 

On January 25, 2000, the Art Bell Coast to Coast AM radio talk show had an author on named Richard W. Noone to talk about what might could have happened on May 5, 2000, when there was an interesting planetary alignment (or later, from something else).  This event was described in previous comments. 

 

The point of Noone’s remarks was that this phenomenon could possibly have served as a trigger to cause a crisis in nature which could produce a pole shift with a new magnetic pole and perhaps enormous flooding.  Not only could the planetary alignment be influential on earth, but the year 2000 also faced enormous sun spot, solar flare and solar wind activity--which supposedly peaked in 2001/2002. 

 

Who knows what all might would happen, given these strange events coming together in a particular configuration.  As a minimum, earth’s communication systems (especially, for those using earth satellites) could have become disrupted or interfered with in some manner. 

 

Of course, Noone recognized the possibilities of an alteration in the centrifugal force from the ice at the poles--in the sense that it is building up and/or is melting in some fashion to cause an imbalance.  But Noone went further with another possible projection of what might could happen. 

 

His research pointed to the possibility of a complete land mass shift.  As he noted, the interior of the earth is supposedly a molten liquid magma which is possibly enveloped in a floating crust or shell.  The geologic plates of the earth either float on this core or are supposedly attached together in some manner to form the crust. 

 

Whether the actual crust is one floating mass or whether the different plates individually float is probably not settled.  Some geologic evidence suggest that the plates form the crust and are floating individually (as discussed above on plate tectonics).  In this case, the land shift Noone projected could involve just some of the plates and not necessarily the whole crust. 

 

 

More From Noone 

 

Regardless, Noone feels that the land mass either in total or in sections (perhaps the plates) could be displaced by any imbalance of the ice at the poles.  In other words, the centrifugal force at the poles could lose its balance to cause a land displacement. 

 

Richard Noone seems to allow that this land displacement might be the cause of  previous pole changes.  He discussed the situation with the woolly mammoths in Alaska and Siberia which were quick frozen while eating tropical plants, as noted above. 

 

This whole scenario spells out something which can come swiftly upon the earth.  All that is needed is a trigger which Noone thought might happen with the planetary alignment and sunspot activity or some later phenomenon.  Since this shift did not occur in early May 2000, it may still happen later from some other trigger. 

 

One of the interesting possibilities in assessing Noone’s earth displacement scenario was that his description seems to parallel one aspect of the sixth seal of Revelation (Rev 6:14) in that every mountain and island is moved out of its place.  As noted elsewhere herein, there is already some possibility of movement of some islands in the South Pacific.  Such a movement could easily materialize. 

 

If this phenomenon should occur by Yechezkel’s 30th-32d years, the dating seems perhaps a little early for the real fulfillment of Revelation 6:14 (which should logically come in Yechezkel’s 33d year, following the end of the national governments of the House of Yisrael nations).  Nevertheless, Noone’s projection is interesting to think about. 

 

If it should occur in 2004-2010 (as remains a possibility), then it surely will be convincing to much of Christendom, in the context of the sixth seal of Revelation.  This writer would take the stand that if it does happen in Yechezkel’s 30th-32d years, it most likely will represent an ante-type of the real event to occur perhaps later in Yechezkel’s 33d year. 

 

 

Ice Ages 

 

There is much evidence of a number of ice ages upon much of the earth’s surface in the past eons of time.  Perhaps the last most significant one was the one that covered much of the North American continent just a few thousand years ago.  Upon receding, this one leveled the American Midwest and deposited a huge quantity of rich surface soil over the area (making Iowa, Illinois, etc very rich farmlands). 

 

If the North Pole was once in the Hudson Bay area of Canada, as suggested by Hugh Brown, it is a good possibility that the ice cap covering much of North America was because of the location of the pole.  Brown says that if the North Pole was in North Dakota, it would cause a continental glacier over much of North America. 

 

Here, in the age end, any number of informed people are now talking about the possibility of a new ice age and one which will come suddenly upon planet earth.  This option was or will be addressed in other comments herein on climate and weather.  Already, the North Atlantic drift has changed (as discussed elsewhere herein).  This could spell a dramatic alteration in Europe’s present warm climate. 

 

 

Earthquakes, Revisited 

 

In any attempt to study the age end and age end prophecies, the student of truth is immediately struck with the huge number of earthquakes which seem to regularly surface in connection with the climatic events described--especially in the Revelation (Rev 6:12; 8:5; 11:13, 19; 16:18).  Like YESHUA predicted, there would be earthquakes in divers places (Matt 24:7). 

 

While there have been earthquakes over the centuries since 30 CE, when YESHUA spoke, it is well to appreciate that they have accelerated in occurrence since WWII.  Now, they seem to be fairly common--which is not the way it used to be.  The outlook for catastrophic earthquakes increases daily.  There are some powerful proofs of this assertion. 

 

In his book on “Christ Returns by 1988,” Colin Deal gives these earthquake totals by centuries:  84 in the 13th century; 115 in the 14th; 137 in the 15th; 174 in the 16th; 258 in the 17th; 378 in the 18th; 640 in the 19th; and 2119 in the 20th century, up to 1975. 

 

Here are some more recent statistics.  For 6.0 quakes, the “1999 World Almanac” gives these totals:  1940s--3; 1950s--5; 1960s--7; 1970s--17, 1980s--16; 1990s to mid 1998--35.  For 7.0 quakes, the National Earthquake Information Center said on Oct 29, 1998, that they had increased from an average of 12.2 per year in 1971 to 21 in 1997, almost doubling (Jul 1999 “Prophetic Observer,” p. 2). 

 

The above statistics on earthquakes, in the range of 6.0 and 7.0 on the Richter scale, mean that the increase was not due to improvements in detecting equipment, as some persons have tried to claim.  Thus, there has been a surge of so-called reports in the controlled national media that earthquakes are not increasing, as some suggest. 

 

 

Some Clarification 

 

To debunk this false theory being pushed by the deceptive media, the November 1999 “Prophetic Observer” (p. 2) had some year by year earthquake totals from the US Geological Survey National Earthquake Information Center which show that earthquakes are indeed dramatically increasing.  

 

For instance, this chart offered the following totals of all classes of earthquakes, as follows:  11,290 in 1987; 12,711 in 1988; 14,585 in 1989; 16,612 in 1990; 16,516 in 1991; 19,548 in 1992; 21,476 in 1993; 19,371 in 1994; 21,007 in 1995; 19,938 in 1996; 19,872 in 1997; and 21,688 in 1998. 

 

The point of this is that the extraordinary reports of earthquake activity in the prophetic age end now seems to be reality.  Current earthquake statistics prove it conclusively.  Not only are there more and more earthquakes; but they are growing in size and destruction.  Something is happening to the fault zones across the earth to cause this increase in activity. 

 

The problem is compounded because technology has now reached the plateau where man can cause earthquakes--through electro-magnetic energy releases and even detonating a small nuclear device at a critical underground location on a fault-line.  The Russians, in particular, have been looking into this option in the event of WWIII. 

 

In terms of America, it is a fact that the San Andreas (especially in Southern California) and Madrid faults are both long overdue for a significant break (to be discussed below and in later presentations).  The probability of a serious US earthquake increases dramatically with each passing day. 

 

The Dec 6, 2002, “The Week” (p. 22) had a report on “The big one is overdue” which assessed the situation in Southern California.  Geologists now say that a major earthquake along the San Andreas is way overdue.  By digging trenches into the earth, scientists have found that since 534 CE, there have been 14 earthquakes (of at least 7.5 magnitude) with an average interval of 105 years. 

 

It has now been 145 years since the last big one in 1857 (between Parkland and San Bernardino, as discussed elsewhere herein).  A large quake in Southern California could kill thousands and cause up to $50 billion in damage. 

 

 

Art Bell, Revisited 

 

The Art Bell Coat to Coast AM radio program on April 11, 2002, had an interesting discussion on earthquakes.  Art’s guest was Sean David Morton and they talked about a host of things.  At one point in time, Art mentioned a news report that night of an earthquake in Afghanistan. 

 

Actually, for much of early 2002, there have been regular reports of earthquakes in Afghanistan and the killing of many people in them.  Both Art and his guest agreed that this phenomenal and regular occurrence of Afghanistanian earthquakes was no coincidence. 

 

Morton was very adamant and said that these quakes are being induced by the US military authorities in order to collapse the huge tunnel networks in Afghanistan which have been used by the various Muslim fighters for years now.  Morton did not reveal where the source of his information was coming from, but his analysis and comments made total sense.  Certainly, the US has this technology. 

 

Art’s guest also went on with another interesting observation.  Just like there has been a tremendous upsurge in Afghanistanian earthquakes, Southern California too has had more than a fair share of small quakes in the last several years. 

 

Per Morton, these Southern California earthquakes are being triggered by US authorities in an effort to relieve the pent up stress on the California fault lines.  This stress is strong and there is great fear of a huge earthquake in Southern California which would cause enormous damage and death (as cited above, Southern California is long overdue for a large earthquake). 

 

Since US authorities have this capability of setting off earthquakes, it makes perfect sense that they are using this technology in both Southern California and Afghanistan for clearly defined purposes.  The fact that these quakes kill some people is no big deal as long as the overall objectives are met. 

 

Obviously, if there were any public statements on this situation or acknowledgment of the use of this technology, there would be a huge outcry from the public.  Accordingly, this type of work is covered in Black projects and classified as Top Secret.  So only a limited number of top officials understand what is happening. 

 

There is a final idea on this use by man of man-made technology to cause earthquakes.  Is man tampering with forces of nature which he simply does not understand?  If so, is it not possible that the ultimate reality of using these powers will backfire and cause enormous hurt upon man (like in the case of the use of HAARP, as discussed earlier, and now man’s mixed up weather)?

 

 

Volcanoes 

 

Some of the above comments mentioned the Westward push of the North American geologic plate against the Pacific plate (the North American plate has actually overlapped the Pacific plate).  In any case, this push has created a fascinating ring of fire around the Pacific Ocean, as noted heretofore (covering the Western North and South American continents and East Asia down to Australia and New Zealand). 

 

This so-called ring of fire has become famous in our time for the enormous amount of seismic activity in the form of earthquakes and volcanoes (both of which are closely connected because of the tectonic plates jostling against each other). 

 

Just as there has been a significant upsurge in earthquake activity, the same can be said for volcanoes.  The prophetic relevance of the volcanoes is that the ash, dust, smoke and gasses spewed from them can cause exceptional changes to the atmosphere--even to the point of making the moon red or darkening the sun in daylight. 

 

While this whole ring of fire around the Pacific is active, it is interesting that right now in early 2003, many of these volcanic mountains in the Western US are bulging and threatening eruptions--like Mount St. Helens (again), Hood, the Three Sisters, Baker, Rainier, Shasta, Lassen, Yellowstone and so forth. 

 

A May 9, 2001, AP story said that a huge bulge has developed over the last four years in Central Oregon (near the famous Three Sisters).  The bulge is 9 to 12 miles across and about four inches high (May-Jun 2001 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 31).  It may be a signal of coming eruptions. 

 

In the Mount St. Helens eruption in 1980, the ash was especially bad in Washington and Oregon as it fanned out to the East and as the jet stream pushed it Eastward.  If any of the present mountains explode, this will be one of the bad fall-outs.  The skies will become so polluted that people down wind will face enormous problems. 

 

 

A Revisit to Asteroids, Meteors, Comets and So Forth 

 

A former chapter discussed heavenly signs and phenomena.  Suffice to say, there are a lot of planets, comets, moons, asteroids, meteors, meteorites and on and on out in space.  Sometimes, some of this stuff does come into our solar system and sometimes some of it has actually struck the earth and/or the moon. 

 

Modern astronomers no longer laugh and make fun of the idea of earth being hit by something from space.  Some have went on record and declared that it is not whether on this future, but only one of when. 

 

As outlined earlier, there is even speculation that one of these hits on earth was so catastrophic that it destroyed the dinosaurs and perhaps many other life forms as well eons ago.  Obviously, if it has happened before, it can happen again. 

 

But beyond the possibility of a great loss of life, a partially flooded earth (if a large asteroid hit one of the oceans--Rev 8:8) and other more direct possibilities, there is another unique feature of this discussion. 

 

Falling meteorites can very easily appear to man as falling stars.  Almost any significant amount of this space material coming to earth can cause the sun to be darkened, the moon to not shine or the earth’s atmosphere to be covered with dust and other particles.  Even the prospect of a wormwood star striking the oceans or rivers and streams is extremely plausible (Rev 8:10-11). 

 

The point of this is that the Word describes some coming phenomenal events which can easily be caused by material from space striking the earth or coming into the earth’s atmosphere.  The relevant Scriptures are not far fetched at all.  Other commentary herein has or will assess some of these possibilities.  

 

 

Dating the Past 

 

In a way of summation, it might be that while chronologists can number the years of this planet in terms of Adam and his descendants (which by the way is at about 6,000 years here in the early 21st century, as proven in former chapters) the truth might be that there is a gap between Genesis 1:1 and 1:2 which would allow for the creation of the physical earth much earlier. 

 

Therefore, the creation of the physical earth could possibly have happened in the distant past, long before Adam.  In the Book, this original creation does not seem to be dated.  So maybe, the physical earth and its pre-Adamic life forms (like the so-called ape-men finds by the Leaky family and others) were quite ancient.

 

But regardless of the dating questions, the Scriptural records of the earth’s recreation or reforming in Genesis 1, of the flood in Noah’s day, of the events and plagues associated with the Exodus, and the reversal of Hizkiyahu’s sundial are sufficient to prove that the earth has had a long, complicated history with some very profound, catastrophic events which dramatically changed the face of the earth. 

 

In other words, all of the modern scientific charges about some humanoids and/or other life forms (like dinosaurs--which were supposedly wiped out in a catastrophe) living on earth tens (or hundreds) of thousands of years ago could have some merit. 

 

Hence, historically, great changes have occurred on this globe over the ages.  One can see vivid evidence of such changes on an examination of the frozen remains of prehistoric mammoths and other animals found in Siberia and Alaska in this century.  Again, these animals still had tropical plants and grasses in their mouths and digestive organs--just as they were instantly frozen alive as they were eating tropical plants.   

 

 

Evolutionary Uniformitarianism Won’t Hack It 

 

The evidence cited above is sufficient to go on record that earth has undergone enormous catastrophic changes over the vast eons of time.  Many of them came upon earth very swiftly and only lasted a short time. 

 

The point is that modern geology and science proves conclusively that the evolutionary theory of uniformitarianism is wrong.  Yet, evolutionists try to hold onto it for some illogical reason. 

 

When the Art Bell program had Richard Noone on, as discussed in the preceding comments, a geologist called in to dispute Noone’s hypotheses.  The caller explained that he was a graduate geologist of some years ago.  Then, in his burst of pride and vanity, he declared that rapid earth changes were impossible and that Noone’s words were all wrong. 

 

This supposed scientific mind used the familiar argument that the present is the key to the past (what we now see happening is what happened millions of years ago).  The man could not accept that even modern science is beginning to look at and dispute these former beliefs (as Noone tried to point out to the caller).  What will these great scientific minds do when they are one day proven wrong? 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 500--End of the Dollar I

 

 

Two Quotes 

 

Per Thomas Jefferson, in 1800, “Everything predicted by the enemies of banks...is now coming to pass.  We are to be ruined by a deluge of bank paper” (Dec 2002, “Radio Liberty,” p. 1). 

 

In 1850, Thomas Webster added:  “Of all the contrivances for cheating the laboring classes of mankind, none has been more effective than that which deludes them with paper money” (ibid, p. 1). 

 

 

Leviticus 26:19 

 

In the presentation on the punishment or curses coming upon Yisrael in the age end, the final series starts with a proclamation about the breaking of Yisrael’s pride in her power (Lev 26:19).  The way this thing was written by Moshe, there is the first impression that this pride is broken in the ensuing drought which comes next in sequence. 

 

But this writer has looked long at this text and has opted for another explanation.  Possibly, the pride in Yisrael’s power is broken as a separate action from the drought and perhaps even preceding the drought. 

 

Prophetically, Ephraim (the modern US) often represents Yisrael.  If there is one thing or system which the US has had for most of her history which represents both power and pride, it has been a strong currency--the dollar. 

 

As long as Yisrael has had money, the threat of war, drought, disease, pestilence or whatever has mattered little.  The reason is that with money, one can buy food and water (when a drought is underway) and even hire mercenaries to fight wars.  Money has offered power and strength which otherwise would never have been justified. 

 

 

Some History 

 

The story of banking and paper money started with ancient goldsmiths (who were often Amalekites).  In the early days, it was a known truth that gold particularly (and silver and other precious metals and stones) were recognized as things of value and could be used for exchange purposes.  Accordingly, goldsmiths appeared on the scene to provide some services for people with gold. 

 

One of the services provided (for a fee, of course) was that goldsmiths would accept gold for deposit or storage from people possessing it (because gold was bulky and was a problem for storage, safekeeping and exchange).  Goldsmiths would give the gold owner a receipt for his gold. 

 

As time passed, people in society with these receipts began exchanging the receipts as money without converting them to gold.  Since the goldsmiths would pay off gold when the receipt(s) were presented, the receipts were as good as gold (and thus, became a medium of exchange and the beginnings of paper money). 

 

The goldsmiths quickly learned that most people would never bother to surrender their receipts for actual gold (since it was bulky and a problem for storage and safekeeping, and since the receipts were as good as gold in making exchanges).  Accordingly, many of the early goldsmiths decided to write more receipts than they had gold.  The goldsmiths then could issue these receipts for goods, services and investments. 

 

The only problem with this system was that when the goldsmith issued more receipts than there was gold, he ran the risk of facing a run on his operation and would not be able to cover all of the receipts he had issued.  Of course, people not receiving gold for their receipts would get mad and often hang the goldsmiths.  Goldsmithing could be a risky business whenever the goldsmiths tried to cheat the public (which was often). 

 

 

Banks and Paper Money 

 

Seeing the success of goldsmiths, banks developed and started issuing their own receipts in the form of bank notes (yes, individual private banks could issue their own money in the form of bank notes).  Soon, nations and national governments got in on the act by issuing paper money as well. 

 

Because of the history of backing gold receipts (with gold), much of this early paper money being issued came out with a provision to allow its conversion to gold (or silver, as happened eventually in the US).  Again, the paper money was as good as gold (or silver, in some cases). 

 

Since there was a possibility of issuing more paper money than justified by gold on hand, some banks and even nations decided to follow this route to increase their wealth.  But again, there was a risk factor involved if the people ever became suspicious over their money and made a run on the bank or national bank in the case of nations. 

 

This was one of the problems in France in the late 18th century.  King Louie was persuaded by Amalekite bankers to issue huge quantities of paper money which was not backed by gold or hard assets.  Inflation (as discussed earlier) took off and the people ultimately got fed up with conditions.  They rose up in rebellion and proceeded to chop Louie’s head off (along with numbers of other government leaders). 

 

But the conniving Amalekite goldsmiths (bankers) were not exactly stupid.  They were ever watching and plotting on how they could have a money making banking business which didn’t carry any risks for themselves. 

 

 

The Solution 

 

Ultimately, they came upon a wise and crafty solution which only required the concurrence and agreement of the people and/or the national leaders in a given nation (the king, politicians or whomever was in charge). 

 

The idea was simple.  Create their own privately owned central or national bank which had the exclusive right and privilege in the nation to issue paper money.  By government fiat, the whole nation could be made to accept and use this central bank money exclusively with no other options. 

 

Given time, the next step up in this plan was to completely abolish any connections which these bank notes had with backed gold, silver or other precious stones or metals.  In other words, back this paper money with nothing. 

 

The third big need for the private bankers to make barrels of money was to conduct all banking operations in the central bank in absolute secrecy.  While some decisions can be allowed out publicly (de facto, after they were in effect), the idea was that no one in the public domain could ever know what the banks were doing--except the people on the inside in the operation or the behind-the-scenes owners. 

 

Once these three provisions were in place, it would allow the goldsmiths or bankers an unlimited opportunity to issue all of the paper money that they desired without restrictions or limitations.  If there were any runs on the bank, the goldsmiths (bankers) would never be held accountable.  Instead the people could get mad at the king or governing politicians.  If anyone was hanged, it would be the government leaders. 

 

This scheme was sold to the kings and governing politicians on the premise that the owners of the central bank would supply the leaders with all of the money that they wanted (this involved the first stage of the concept of an elastic currency--that is one without limitation or restriction). 

 

The next facet of this elastic currency idea was that if the people became upset and tried to make a run on the private bank or banks (owned by the same bankers who owned and controlled the central bank), the elastic currency would come into play and make more paper money available to whomever in power desired it, and in almost any reasonably wanted or needed quantity. 

 

From the banker/goldsmith point of view, this would be a perfect banking situation.  All that was needed was the presentation of whatever conditions that were necessary to sell this plan to the king or the governing politicians. 

 

 

Moving in on the US 

 

Starting with the time of the naive George Washington, the fat cat bankers tried to sell this plan to the new American government (by working through their agents--like John Adams and Alexander Hamilton [an Amalekite named Levine in the West Indies]).  Success came with the First US Bank and then later a Second US Bank. 

 

However, men like Andy Jackson came along and stopped their efforts in the 19th century.  They had to sit on the sidelines and wait.  In order to hasten the day of success, the bankers were always busy taking steps to achieve their ultimate goal.  They would routinely cause depressions, economic dislocations, money panics, etc in order to encourage the US government/people to adopt their plan. 

 

Finally, in 1913, their chance for success came when they elected their own man, Woodrow Wilson, to the presidency (and they have continuously elected all presidents since Wilson).  They moved fast with Wilson and created their dream in the form of an all-powerful, privately-owned, central US bank. 

 

In order to fool the people, they chose to put the word federal in the name of their private bank (to make the people believe that it was a part of the federal government when, in fact, it was not).  Thus, was born the Federal Reserve Bank (called the Fed and actually made up of 12 member banks which were all directly owned and managed by private bankers). 

 

The next step needed to sell this thing was to allow the president to appoint a seven member overall board of directors.  But wisely, the bankers organized their system by making this board a figure head operation when they wisely created an entity called the Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC) to make the actual decisions for the central bank. 

 

While the seven member board of directors were members, the FOMC wisely provided that all 12 participating private bankers were full participants in all meetings, discussions, plans and activities of the overall Fed--although only five of these private bankers could vote on Fed actions. 

 

 

The Power of Money 

 

So while the private bankers were in absolute control of the 12 member banks, they also were in de facto control of the seven member board of directors.  This came about because the 18th century Amalekite banker Mayer Amschel Rothschild said to permit him to control a nation’s money and he cared not who wrote its laws. 

 

Obviously, once some person controls a nation’s money, the door is opened that he also gains control over its law-makers and laws (to insure that the law-makers never get bold and try to pass restrictive laws to interfere in his operation). 

 

With this control, the US president always appoints bankers or people acceptable by the bankers to the seven member Fed board.  Alan Greenspan, the present chairman of the board, is a perfect sample of a banker’s man placed within the board.  The bankers love him because he works for them.  Thus, the president must appoint people to this seven member board who are acceptable. 

 

Hence, in 2001, Bush was prepared to nominate Country Bank CEO Terry Jorde to the Fed board.  Per columnist Robert Novak--she was vetoed by Fed Chairman Alan Greenspan, the banker’s man (per the Jun 29, 2001, “The Week,” p. 37, in a news report on “No dissent allowed in Greenspanland”).  Thus, Bush is in the position of having to have his nominations to the Fed board cleared in advance with Greenspan.  

 

Since appointments to the board are for 14 years and since board members cannot be removed except in case of personal misconduct, it really is academic to talk about the question of independence by the board.  Once members are in there, they always go along with the bankers (who, with their money, wield a big stick in American politics).  And since the board has no power on its own, it matters not anyway. 

 

In offering the governing politicians unlimited supplies of money, the plan sold to the US was that the Fed would always buy any US Treasury bills, notes, bonds or paper which could not be sold to the public.  This is called monetizing the debt when the Treasury simply hands a stack of interest bearing paper to the Fed in exchange for Fed money or bank credits (which are available in unlimited quantities at the Fed). 

 

This means that the Fed itself is one of the largest holders of US debt.  With this huge inflow of interest annually, the Fed offered a solution to satisfy the concern of politicians by transferring any unspent sums of interest back to the Treasury at the end of the year (and they do this annually so no one can claim that the Fed is out to make money on its own operations or from interest on US paper). 

 

Of course, there was never any plans for the Fed, itself, to be a money making operation.  It doesn’t need to make money because it was created for other purposes. 

 

In fact, the Fed does not need to make money because it already has unlimited supplies of its own money and can issue this money in a virtually unchecked and unverified manner (because its operations are carried out in secret and there is no checking or auditing of what it does--even the CIA does not have this secrecy since the CIA has to ask the president and Congress for money and must accordingly accommodate them.  With the Fed, it asks no one for money since it already has all of the US money). 

 

So, although the Fed carries on its operations in secret and although it is never independently checked or audited (by anyone), the Fed chairman does occasionally testify before Congress on what the Fed is doing.  Because of a lack of verification, the Fed Chairman can tell the Congress about whatever he wants to and no one will be the wiser. 

 

 

Two Needed Things 

 

In putting this thing over, the private bankers (who would become the private owners of the Fed) wanted four more benefits or offerings from the US.  One, they wanted the United States to transfer all or almost all US gold to the Fed--which is what happened.  The US gave up its primary gold supply to the Federal Reserve Bank. 

 

And second, the bankers wanted the Fed to have complete power and authority to control US interest rates at all levels and to be able to make money available to whomever/wherever it chooses at a given point in time.  These provisions were given to the Fed. 

 

By controlling interest rates, it is an acknowledged fact that the Fed can enter and participate in the buying and selling of US notes, bonds, bills, etc.  And she does.  She enters the allegedly free markets and either buys or sells US or other paper to control interest rates (thus, the Fed insiders always know in advance which way interest rates and bond prices are going to go). 

 

The second thing that the Fed has been doing (but is doing in secret because if the word was out, many people would get mad) is to enter and participate in the buying and selling of gold, silver and perhaps other commodities as desired.  These markets are not free or market responsive based upon supply and demand.  They are subject to the wishes of the Fed to control them. 

 

 

More 

 

Some years ago, the Fed created something called the “Exchange Stabilization” fund or system to use a vast sum of Federal Reserve Notes to influence, control and participate in the currency markets (whether this thing was approved by Congress is not clear to this writer--but its existence is well known in US financial circles). 

 

Thus, the Fed can enter the different currency markets around the world to control the value of various foreign currencies.  Thus, the Fed can make the Mexican peso (or any other foreign currency) go up or down (and especially, in collusion with other privately owned central banks in Europe--like the Bank of England, the Bank of France, etc). 

 

The last item that the Fed can do (or rather is doing since it is being done in secret and evidently illegally) is to rig and control the US stock market by entering the market with unlimited supplies of dollars to make selected stocks go up or down.  Though gullible and uninformed US stock market investors believe that the markets are free and market responsive, they are not.  They are totally controlled. 

 

The Fed and the Treasury collaborated on this and created something in the 1980s called the “Working Group on Financial Stability” (popularly known as the Market Control Unit or the Plunge Protection Team).   This unit operates in collusion with the market-makers (the stock brokers making the markets on the major stock exchanges) to buy or sell certain stocks at certain times. 

 

 

Acts to Make Money for Its Secret Owners 

 

All along, there was no plan that the Fed itself had to be a profitable operation because it has all of the money it can possibly use in the context of the printing presses and the huge inflow of interest annually from the US Treasury. 

 

Actually, the plan always was that the Fed would do things and carry on its buying and selling options in ways to benefits its secret owners, managers and other insiders.  The Fed itself does not need to make money in its buying and selling operations in the various financial markets.  All it has to do is to keep its owners and other key selected insiders aware of what it is doing in secret. 

 

Can the reader possibly begin to understand the benefit that would come to an investor if he had prior knowledge that the Fed would enter the bond markets tomorrow to buy or sell US government bonds to alter bond prices and/or to drive interest rates up or down? 

 

Or how about the benefits to a trader in gold on the commodity exchanges?  What if the trader had advance knowledge that the Fed would enter the gold market at a given point in time and sell huge quantities of gold to drive the price down (which can be either long or short sales since the Fed has unlimited money to play with)?  Would this type of information allow an investor to make absolutely gobs and gobs of profits? 

 

Working the stock exchanges is even more enticing.  Suppose you are a stock market player and you have advance information that the Fed will buy (or sell) Dow-Jones stocks on a certain day--like maybe GM or whichever.  With your advance information, you can buy (or sell) these stocks in advance and then later sell (or buy) them back with fantastic profits. 

 

For sure, the plan was never that the Fed itself had to make money--because with the printing presses and the inflow of interest, the Fed always has unlimited supplies of money to play with in the financial markets to make the markets go up or down at a given moment in time. 

 

If the Fed loses five or ten billion dollars in Fed notes in the markets, it is no big deal because the Fed can simply print more of them (although it should be obvious to anyone above the idiot level that this squander of money belongs to the taxpayers of the US who will have to pick up the liability for all of these Federal Reserve Notes and bank credits liberally distributed around the world--to make profits for the Fed owners and insiders). 

 

This type of Fed information on Fed actions is highly secret and no one knows much about it except the Fed’s secret owners and people on the inside in the Fed. 

 

Of course, it goes without saying that these insiders do tip off and keep some of their friends, relatives and colleagues apprised of what all is going on.  Thus, Fed owners (like the Rockefellers, Warburgs and Rothschilds), agents (like Kuhn, Loeb and Company, and Goldman-Sachs) and friends (like the Amalekite crook George Soros) will always know in advance which way things are going in order to make huge profits. 

 

 

The Incidentals 

 

Besides these four primary functions, which allow the Fed to manipulate and control various financial markets to benefit its secret owners and insiders, the Fed also has other powers.  The Fed can establish banking reserve requirements (which determine how much money banks can loan out to customers) and the discount rate (which is one more important barometer governing US interest rates). 

 

As a backup for its member banks (US national banks and some state approved banks), the Fed always stands ready to accept discounted notes and paper from banks in an emergency.  This means that if there is a run on a local bank, that bank can come to the Fed and get some immediate money to bail itself out. 

 

Finally, the Fed has the power to establish margin requirements in the stock and commodity markets (in other words, the credit levels allowed purchasers) and to act as a clearing house for most checks drawn on US banks. 

 

While these incidentals are extremely important and represent enormous profit opportunities for member banks, they are not as important to the overall profitability of the operations to the Fed owners, as is realized in the ability of the Fed to secretly enter the financial markets and manipulate and control them (within reason and to a point as long the US dollar has value and acceptance) in any desired direction. 

 

 

The Last Two Problems

 

In 1913, everything was go for the big bankers.  But there were three remaining problems. 

 

First, the US Constitution set the power to coin money and to regulate the value thereof with the US Congress.  How could all of this power be placed in a privately owned corporation?  Well, the solution was that the US Treasury would print all of the paper money wanted by the Fed and charge the Fed for the cost of printing.  Hence, the Treasury prints the Fed notes and sells them to the Fed for pennies on the dollars. 

 

The next big issue for the bankers was the possibility that the dumb, gullible public might become informed on what all was happening to their money and the secret actions of the Fed to use the US money in ways to make profits and gains for its secret owners and insiders.  In other words, the people could get riled up against the bankers. 

 

The last big issue concerned the possibility that the Fed (and especially, in collusion with certain other privately-owned European central banks) could conceivably lose control of events or precipitate a collapse of the historically strong dollar.  The stock market crash of 1929 almost brought about the end of the system.  But massive federal spending by FDR saved the process for the Fed owners. 

 

 

Controlling the Media 

 

Well, with the development of the privately owned US central bank, there has been a simultaneous process underway where virtually the same people who own or benefit from the Fed also own or control the US media powers. 

 

Thus, the people who control  or have access to the Fed (i.e., the large international banks and bankers, like the Rockefellers, Rothschilds, Warburgs, City Bank of NY, J. P. Morgan-Chase, Bank of NY, Kuhn Loeb and Company, Goldman-Sachs, etc--but this list does not include most of the small town local banks which are not privy to this operation) also own or control the US media powers (like ABC, CBS, NBC, CNN, AOL-Time-Warner, the Washington Post, Newsweek, etc). 

 

With this dual control, the masses can be forever kept in perpetual ignorance about what all is going on behind the scenes. With an ignorant public, the status quo would continue and the big bankers would make vast profits. 

 

This is why people like Katherine Graham (now deceased, and one of the former owners of the Washington Post and Newsweek magazine) could go to the secret Bilderberg meetings once a year (where plans were laid on in secret by the plutocrats to make profits and install a world government) and nothing about the meetings would ever be made public in the US media. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 501--End of the Dollar II

 

 

Expansion 

 

The fantastic success of privately-owned central banks in England, France, the US, etc, prompted the banking plutocrats to decide to branch out in a world configuration.  The plan was simple, the bankers joined arms with numerous other peoples who wanted the implementation of world government.  The bankers wanted to own and operate the world’s central bank (to make incredible profits). 

 

To bring the bankers’ plans into fruition, the bankers chose a two prong attack.  In the immediate here and now, the bankers caused the globalists to organize and develop three preliminary international banking operations--the World Bank, the Bank for International Settlements (BIS) and the International Monetary Fund (IMF). 

 

The BIS clears checks and keeps track of the financial status/accounts of the various nations, relative to other nations.  The World Bank makes loans and the IMF manipulates currencies and financial markets around the world on behalf of the leading international bankers.  All of these big global operations are financed by gullible taxpayers in the Christian West and not by the benefiting rich banks/bankers. 

 

 

The Second Big Push 

 

Realizing that the above just cited international operations would take some time to evolve into a one world central bank, the banking plutocrats began working with other globalists, wanting world government, on a transitional process to create regional central banks and currencies to rule supreme in certain regions. 

 

The first of these regional operations transitioned in Europe when the fat cats there started the European Common Market in the post WWII era.  While the common market idea started with trade, it has slowly progressed to all kinds of things in the way of creating a single European government in the form of the European Union (EU).  This entity is moving to encompass politics, religion, commerce, money, sociology, etc. 

 

Of course, the bankers came on board and organized their own EU central bank and issued its own currency (the EURO) to phase out all national currencies in Europe. 

 

 

More Than Europe 

 

But the regional plan is greater than just Europe.  There is also an organization of African states which is bringing all of the Black African nations into one entity.  The plan is that the EU bank and EURO will eventually cover both Europe and Africa.  The planners and shakers have a similar idea in mind for Asia where the Bank of Japan and the Yen will become the common financial operators in Asia. 

 

The last area under consideration is the Americas.  Just as the EU started on the basis of commerce and trade, the North American plutocrats pushed through NAFTA (North American Free Trade Association). 

 

NAFTA was sold to the gullible American people on the premise of opening up markets to the US.  Actually, the reverse has happened.  Before NAFTA, the US had a trade surplus with Mexico and Canada.  Now, the US has a deficit with those nations.  But the American people simply never understood what this game is all about.  Therefore, they have went along with it (in their state of ignorance). 

 

Not only is there a plan to create a single state in North America (that’s why Vicente Fox of Mexico and George W. Bush of the US are both working for the removal of the US-Mexican border to allow free movement of people between the two states), the same  things are underway in South America where there is a unity movement in progress. 

 

Right now, the plans of the plutocratic bankers is that both the North American and South American regions will come under the money control of the US Federal Reserve Bank.  There is hope that eventually the US dollar will become the currency in both continents (Canada and Argentina have both addressed this question). 

 

So the question must be--will the bankers succeed in creating these three regional central banks and three regional currencies in a step toward their ultimate goal of a world central bank and one world currency?  Since the plutocratic bankers are in the driver’s seat at this time (with all of their wealth, money and profits), the answer would at first seem to be yes. 

 

 

Something Else is Needed 

 

But while the plans for a future world central bank seem assured in time (which the big bankers can control through their political lackeys and prostitute politicians in the various nations), the international bankers may not be able to completely implement their planned transitional operation of the three regional banks (though they may partially achieve this--at least in Europe)  Thus, there remains a fly in the ointment. 

 

The story of Colonel Edward Mandell House was told in former chapters.  Suffice to say, he was the de facto man in charge of America in the years 1913 to 1921 under Woodrow Wilson.  As noted earlier, House said that great reforms seldom materialize except during great upheaval.  Obviously, the big boys want a great upheaval right now to bring forth more of their plans for world government and a world central bank. 

 

There is substantial evidence suggesting that they elected George W. Bush in the US to bring about a great upheaval.  This evidence would suggest that this upheaval can take place in two manifestations--a coming WWIII and a coming great economic and monetary collapse. 

 

Probably, the international bankers want their three regional currencies and central banks in place before the coming world central bank and currency arrive.  They are almost to the point of having the three regional banks and currencies right now.  But once a great upheaval occurs, it will be a simple matter to complete the work of the three systems and immediately begin work on the one system. 

 

Even under the one coming world system, perhaps the big boys will still allow some regional and national central banks (in order to use them to exercise control over the coming one world system).  So likely, there will be some transitional days in the move to world government and a one world bank and currency. 

 

Howbeit, there is one critical problem present right now which may prevent the US Federal Reserve Bank from ever becoming the regional central bank for the Americas.  The US has fantastic debt which is about ready to destroy the whole US economic, political, governmental and social systems (as will be discussed in remarks to follow). 

 

 

The US Debt Problem 

 

Thus, here is probably the place to take a hard look at the US debt in place since the Federal Reserve system came into play in 1913. 

 

The “World Almanac 2002” (p. 114-117) gives these US debt  figures (as of Sep 30, 2001):  state governments--$510.486 billion (as of Sep 30, 1998), and outstanding currency of $596,746,736,495 (as of Sep 30, 2001).  Even more terrifying in 2001, total consumer household debt was at $8 trillion (Aug 27, 2001, “Newsweek,” p. 34-37, as discussed earlier)

 

On Dec 31, 2001, corporate debt was at $4.9 trillion (Mar-Apr 2002 “Philadelphia Trumpet,” p. 5), and US farm debt was at $103.520 billion (“World Almanac 2003”). 

 

US government debt is assuredly the most dangerous of all at $6.2 trillion on Sep 30, 2002 (per Michael W. Hodges on “America’s Total Debt Report” in the Grandfather Economic Series--http://mwhodges.home.att.net).  But this $6.2 trillion may not include the more than $2 trillion raided by the government from some 42 public trust funds (May 26, 2003, “American Free Press,” p. 15). 

 

Because of the problems in reporting and identifying all of the debt, these figures are assuredly understated.  Too, they do not include all the political sub-divisions of the United States; nor do they address all business debt (they also do not take note of bank deposits/accounts/stocks which can become US indebtedness when in the hands of foreigners). 

 

With the recent Bush push for war and military expenditures and the various Bush tax cuts, massive US government debts are now projected for the future.  Already, the FY 2003 budget deficit is expected to hit a record $455 billion (Jul 19, 2003, “Idaho Spokesman-Review,” p. A1). 

 

Otherwise, the total US government figure of $6.2 trillion is probably as correct as government will admit.  For sure, this calculation does not include the huge US liability for outstanding loan guarantees--both in the US and abroad (which is pegged at $70 trillion--Apr 8, 2002, “American Free Press,” p. B4-5).  If America ever has to start paying off on these loan guarantees, the debt will explode into unfathomable levels. 

 

The just cited M. W. Hodges puts the total US debt on Sep 30, 2002, at over $32 trillion (ibid).  Hodges indicates that some 52% of this debt occurred in the 1990s.  As a matter of information, the total debt was $4 trillion in 1957 (in inflation adjusted 2001 dollars).  So it is exploding upward. 

 

On Jul 10, 2003, Congressman Ron Paul put the total US government obligations at $43 trillion (Oct 2003 “Radio Liberty” newsletter, p. 2), which suggests that there is substantially more debt than the government is admitting.  Paul adds that the total net worth of all US households is just over $40.6 trillion.  So the US is manifestly bankrupt. 

 

Recent US Treasury estimates suggest that now projected, future, budget deficits may total $44 trillion (Jun 23, 2003, “American Free Press,” p. 2).  Per this story, the Bush administration has taken steps to suppress this information--lest the gullible public get excited and concerned. 

 

The essence of the problem was stated by Al Martin in his article on “‘Bushonomics’ Plays Dangerous Games With Solvency, Deficit Spending, Shady Accounting, Social Security” in the May 26, 2003, “American Free Press” as briefly quoted from above (p. 14-15). 

 

Martin wrote:  “Under Bushonomics, all economic growth is a fallacy.  It only exists on paper.  The total debt of the U.S. government exceeds its total assets.  The total debt of all business and industry also exceeds their total assets.” 

 

 

The Foreign Problem 

 

NPR (Market Place) on Jan 31, 2003, had a news item which said that 35% of the US debt was in foreign hands--about half of it was with banks and the other half was in the hands of individual people and businesses (Michael Hodges says that foreigners hold 43% of the US Treasury bonds and T-bills, 24% of corporate bonds and about 33.3% of the Fanny Mae home mortgages  So maybe, the 35% is an average of all US debt). 

 

It the overall debt figure is now over $43 trillion, it would allow that foreigners hold some $15.05 trillion.  Additionally, foreigners hold about $1 trillion in US banks accounts (Feb 17, 2003, “American Free Press,” p. 7) and some 13% of US stocks (per Michael Hodges).  With the passage of time, it is becoming clear that almost anything could bring on a panic and collapse of the dollar. 

 

Probably, the international bankers running things hope to contain the collapse when it comes and preserve the Fed.  

 

But maybe, things will get out of hand and they will lose control (as they almost did in 1929).  In fact, maybe the US government and nation will be totally and completely destroyed in the coming upheaval.  If this happens, there will be no Federal Reserve Bank or dollar to run things in America for any period of time. 

 

Frankly, at the moment, this writer believes that the big boys expect to keep the status quo on the Fed and the dollar.  But YHWH is in charge and He has pronounced judgment upon the US and her system.  If He brings this judgment to bear, the dollar and the Fed both will go down the tubes--along with the US national government. 

 

 

The Consuming US

 

An NPR news report on Jan 31, 2003, suggested that around 70% of the economic activity in the US is consumer driven.  Actually, it should not take too many brains to figure out that the American social welfare state has created a lazy unproductive society which largely will not work and produces virtually nothing of real value (of course, the US is perhaps the world’s largest producer of weapons of war). 

 

A person can go into almost any American town and the biggest and most important businesses are stores which sell consumer goods (Walmart is now the nation’s largest company).  Many of these consumer goods are foreign produced (even much US food comes from overseas). 

 

The result is that the US has been running a huge international trade deficit for years now.  In early 2003, imports were exceeding exports by $40-$50 billion monthly ($2.6 trillion in accumulative total through 2002). 

 

 

More Big Outflows 

 

But that’s only part of the money problem because the US government and actions of the Fed to control the financial markets also send billions of dollars overseas annually. 

 

US government aid, gifts, payoffs, bribes and expenditures to foreign nations could be another $100 to $900 billion annually.  In early 2003, Israel asked for an extra $15 billion which she probably will receive in part--in addition to the five billion that she now receives each year. 

 

In his Jan 2003 state of the union address, Bush wants billions more for all kinds of things--including $15 billion to fight AIDS in Africa.  But besides what US politicians publicly admit, many of these funds going overseas are hid from the gullible, voting public (lest the voters get mad and cut back on these funds). 

 

The Bush administration’s Feb 3, 2003, budget request (in the appendix of the $2.23 trillion plan) additionally asked for $2.5 billion for “economic support funds” for the Middle East, $4.4 billion for “foreign military financing” (evidently not for US forces, but for foreign armies--like the mercenaries on the US payroll in Afghanistan), $5.5 billion to forgive some outstanding “economic and military grants” and $1.3 billion for the “Millennium Challenge Account” plus the more clearly defined foreign aid of $18.8 billion and perhaps another $12 to $14 billion more for Israel (Feb 17, 2003, “American Free Press,” p. 1). 

 

Actually, the foreign expenditures also indirectly include billions more to maintain US military bases, government bureaucratic offices and embassies and traveling US dignitaries abroad.  These expenditures are usually never identified as foreign, but that’s where the money is spent.  Too, there are the vast payments made to the UN, the IMF, and other international agencies and functions (most of which ultimately goes overseas). 

 

In order to manipulate and control the financial markets, the Fed also sends billions of dollars overseas whenever it so decides.  This writer is unsure of how many dollars the Fed has shipped overseas because the Fed keeps these numbers secret.  For certain, it has been billions or trillions (which could now be held in US debt instruments or in deposits in US banks). 

 

Beyond the huge debt acknowledged, there is also the matter of loan guarantees of $70 trillion, cited above.  The US government directly or through the US Exim (Export-Import) Bank guarantees vast sums of loans made overseas--usually, by US banks and businesses.  What will happen if many of these loans fail and the US must pick up the tab (the answer is that the US will print worthless paper money and pay them off)? 

 

 

The Iraq War 

 

In addition to the already vast US debt to foreigners throughout the world, the Bush war against Iraq is expected to cost from $50-60 billion on the low side up to $300 billion on the high side (Jan 28, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A5).  A later Mar 7, 2003, “The Week” (p. 2) put the low side of this cost at $100 billion.  Later estimates reached $1 trillion.  So the price tag keeps going up. 

 

Assuredly, these numbers do not include the many bribes and payoffs around the world that the US has made or will make to foreign nations for support--which will also number in the hundreds of billions of dollars. 

 

The Mar 31, 2003, “Time” magazine (p. 10) quoted Dan Rosen, a reader, who said:  “A postwar occupation of Iraq would be devastating to the U.S. economy and to our armed forces as they tried to control a ‘liberated Iraq.’”  Rosen may be on the mark.  Even as the US supposedly conquered Iraq (as happened in early Aviv 2003), the continued US occupation will cost a barrel of money and hurt the US economy. 

 

 

Two Cartoons 

 

The Mar 7, 2003, “The Week” (cover and page 24) had two most fascinating cartoons about George Bush and his spreading around of US dollars to support his war against Saddam and Iraq. 

 

One cartoon was of a huge US transport airplane (perhaps a C130 or C5).  The back tail section is depressed (opened) so that there is a huge bag of something waiting to be unloaded--obviously dollars since the bag is labeled $32 billion--in reference to the US plans to give Turkey at least $32 billion or more if she would just allow US military forces to use Turkey as a staging area to attack Iraq. 

 

A couple of American soldiers are tugging on the bag of money.  Another soldier has a writing in his hand.  He says “Let me be sure I’ve got this straight...we drop the LEAFLETS over Baghdad and the CASH over Turkey.” 

 

However, the best cartoon that week in the “The Week” was on the cover.  It showed a George W. Bush in Arab clothing and riding a camel.  George had a bag of US money ($100 dollar bills).  He was throwing this money out in all directions.  The air was full of these bills.  And surrounding the camel, one could see a huge assortment of people with hands outstretched, trying to catch the money. 

 

Yes, these two cartoons tell it like it is.  George W. Bush is trying to become number one in the give away of US money worldwide to support his ambitions to control the Middle East (so that the Bushes, Rockefellers, Standard Oil, Halliburton, and the Amalekite plutocrats will get to steal huge sums of money from the Muslim oilfields). 

 

 

The Point 

 

The point is that the US dollar is in a very precarious position.  It is backed by nothing except the goodwill of the American people to work and pay it off.  And that condition is simply not out there (as Americans generally won’t work for anything, since they have been spoon fed by the welfare state for generations). 

 

Thus, the essence here is that the United States and the Fed have flooded the world with dollar bills.  Foreigners are holding vast sums of US money, debt instruments, accounts, etc.  And the US simply has virtually nothing of value to redeem these multiplied trillions of dollars now overseas. 

 

While foreigners have bought up much US land with this huge outflow of money, even this possibility is limited.  The reason is because of the fear of exorbitant taxation from a society which is totally and completely bankrupt.  As the US goes down the tubes, the states and counties will place enormous tax burdens on land owners (since that will be about the only thing of value that can be taxed). 

 

Of course, the stage has been set for a total and complete meltdown of the US financial system (and when it falls, the bankers who created it will get in their private jet planes and flee to their hideouts and secret bank accounts in other nations of the world).  The primary issue remaining is what will cause or bring about this meltdown? 

 

 

Crashing the Dollar? 

 

For some time in late 2002 and early 2003, rumors surfaced that if the US proceeded with an attack upon Iraq, there would be a Muslim attempt to crash the dollar.  In view of the vast sales of oil to America and the West and the fact that the oil-rich Muslim states have been placing this money in US dollars in New York banks, this possible course of action must not be ruled out. 

 

In fact, months earlier, Iraq started making some or all of her oil sales in EUROs (that might be one part of the explanation on why Bush wanted an Iraqi war while much of Europe was opposed to it).  Anyway, it certainly would be no problem for the oil producers (like in OPEC) to make their sales in EUROs or some other world currency. 

 

In any case, the Jan 27, 2003, “American Free Press” (p. 6) had a report by Jack Ross on “Mideast Money Reform Draws Western Ire” which noted the quest by some of the Muslim governments (particularly Iraq under Saddam Hussein) to gain financial independence from Washington by promoting an alternative currency. 

 

The report noted that Iran had adopted the gold-backed dinar as its currency.  The dinar was expected to be integrated within the Russian system.  With the US destruction of Iraq, the future of the dinar is in doubt.  Of course, it goes without saying that the Iraqi promotion of the dinar could well be one of the contributing reasons for the GWB war upon Iraq in 2003 (surely, the dinar made the NY banks mad!). 

 

Countries like Malaysia and Saudi Arabia are also looking into the issue of an alternative currency.  Is it possible that if the oil producers abandon the dollar that the US dollar could tank?  If the Muslims abandon the dollar, will other nations follow the same path? 

 

 

2003 Realities 

 

Regardless of what might be happening behind the scenes, it is a fact that the US dollar has been slowly falling in value in the foreign exchange markets.  The May 23, 2003, “The Week” (p. 3) took note of this situation in a story on “Should the U.S. lift the falling dollar?” as if the US can stop the fall (now down some 17.3% over other currencies). 

 

Per the report, foreigners own far fewer US assets than usual (only about 6%).  “The worry is that, with their U.S. holdings worth less and less in terms of their home currencies, foreigners may decide to bail.”  If they do, the US dollar will go into a free fall.  The conclusion from the London “Financial Times” was that Europe, not Washington, will decide the fate of the dollar. 

 

 

Radio Liberty and James Dines 

 

The Nov 2002 “Radio Liberty” (p. 4-5) quoted financial advisor James Dines who wrote:  “Money is modern society’s most important commodity:  the fulcrum of every financial transaction. 

 

“Those who corrupt money are corrupting society right down to its most basic level, as cancer corrupts the cells of the body at the genetic level...the Eastern Roman Empire founded by Constantine lasted 1,000 years beyond the fall of Rome, probably because the bezant maintained the same value for over 800 years without inflation.  Destruction of this currency in 1282 A.D. coincided with the Eastern Roman Empire’s downfall.” 

 

“Radio Liberty” adds to the above:  “Europe wants to overhaul the international monetary system and make the EURO the reserve currency of the world.  The Islamic countries want to use the ‘gold dinar.’  If that happens, several hundred billion dollars held in other countries will flood our country and destroy our currency.” 

 

Though not mentioned by “Radio Liberty,” the real problem is that the US has flooded the world with worthless dollar bills, bonds, and notes (IOUs) to buy consumer goods (which are not competitively produced in America) and make bribes and payoffs around the world to benefit America’s secret plutocratic rulers. 

 

Yes, the real problem has been and is with the American political leaders who have willingly debased and corrupted the American money system (in order to get votes and be re-elected). 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 502--The Zombie Society

 

 

A Recent Event 

 

Just after the pagan Christmas holiday of 2002, this writer became involved in a discussion of sorts with a local rural route mail carrier at the Calder, Idaho post office.  The carrier was twenty years younger than me; and thus was raised in an entirely different period of time (after WWII) which profoundly affected his thinking, just as my much earlier raising profoundly affected my thinking. 

 

The carrier was an ultra liberal and leftist person, educated and trained in the sick and depraved times following WWII.  In his remarks, he conveyed the image that he was a classic, leftist Democrat.  But he did later suggest that he voted for the Libertarian presidential candidate in 2000 as he wasn’t an Al Gore fan. 

 

Like all leftists, he completely hogged the so-called dialogue (thus, it was more in the vein of a monologue).  If he would have just had something to say, which this writer had not heard before, it would have been marvelous and his remarks would have been totally absorbed by me as something useful and beneficial. 

 

But in fact, he was fairly uninformed and knew nothing beyond the manipulated, twisted and slanted news that the White House and the controlled media spouts out to the gullible, uninformed public. 

 

 

More on the Man’s Mentality 

 

This man apparently is in full support of all the things wrong in big government and in modern America today (he loves the multi-racial and multi-cultural society and the flood of Colored immigrants, legal and illegal, into the US in the last several years; and he has no problem with the explosion of sexual perversion, licentiousness and depravity so common throughout modern America). 

 

He talked on and on and rudely interrupted me on several occasions whenever this writer tried to get in a point.  In general, as noted above, he echoed the same nonsense and warped remarks that a person would expect to hear over the TV nightly news from the controlled media.  Clearly, he knew nothing except what he had been spoon fed over the controlled media or from the Clinton and Bush White Houses. 

 

He was fully devoted to the merits and benefits of leaders like Hillary Clinton, Bill “Slick” Clinton, etc.  About the only thing we really had in common was that the carrier was no big fan of George W. Bush (although in a later discussion with the man, he came out in full support of the Bush move to a new war in Iraq). 

 

He blindly defended US aggressions and wars fully and followed the zombiized approach of repeating the false atrocity stories which Bush senior and Bush junior have both disseminated to try to build up public hatred of Saddam.  The only problem with these atrocity stories is that they are generally lies.  Admittedly, the controlled media repeats them religiously. 

 

But this barrage of lies and deception proves nothing.  Like Adolf Schicklgruber said, years ago, tell a lie and keep repeating it over and over and the people will come to believe it.  Yes, tell a lie, furnish no proof and parrot it over and over and the people will come to believe and accept it (as has happened with this rural mail carrier). 

 

However, in our first discussion, we could have talked all day long about some of the other evils of GWB and the Republicans and been in basic agreement (like the liberal Democrats, the man had no problem with the US wars and aggression--but surely, he would not support Bush on the collapsing US economy). 

 

But one of his primary problems and differences arose if any criticism from me focused upon the liberal, leftist Democrats, like Slick and Hillary Clinton, whom he manifestly loved and really supported (other than Al Gore, whom he may not have liked). 

 

Since this man had completely grown up, developed and matured in the present warped society; and had been trained, indoctrinated, mesmerized and zombiized by the controlled media and the educational systems in evil and depraved Sabbatian thinking and philosophy (which was described in a former chapter herein); he simply could not intelligently discuss politics in general (except from his biased viewpoint which was essentially a parroting or a repeat of what one hears from the controlled nightly TV news). 

 

 

The Problem 

 

Frankly, this writer understands the difficulty in trying to talk religion or politics to most people.  It is virtually impossible to broach these two subjects above all else with zombiized persons (which include the vast bulk of the American society and people who have been raised in the post WWII environment). 

 

Unquestionably, people become demonized by religious and political demons (especially those associated with Sabbatianism).  They then enter a trance state where they lose all capacity to think intelligently.  In trying to have a discussion with such demonized people, it is impossible to communicate with them.  Religious and political demons are extremely powerful. 

 

 

Hearing Different Thinking 

 

Nevertheless, this writer does try to share whenever an opportunity arises.  If nothing else, it allows people out there to hear ideas and opinions that they will never get from the controlled media airways (although the above mentioned men was so rude, arrogant and unfair that he cut me off every time i tried to say something which was different from the controlled spin that he was accustomed to hearing). 

 

Of course, a pro-Democrat and Clinton lover or supporter can periodically hear words about the evils of Clinton from Republican opponents of Clinton (especially, in Idaho, as the Republican party is strong here). 

 

But how often can a pro-Democrat and pro-Clinton person actually hear criticism about both the Democrat and Republican parties.  Actually, this writer is apolitical and i have no motivation to justify or support either of the two major American political parties because they both are wrong in comparison with the Scriptures (which are my concern). 

 

 

Some Background 

 

Back before the November 2002 elections, the local owner of the Calder store (which is mainly a cafe and bar) accosted me and wanted me to vote against the local county assessor in the hands of the Republicans.  His argument was that the assessor was discriminatory in making assessments for individual people owning land and the huge Potlatch Corporation (which owns a lot of timber land locally). 

 

Per the cafe owner, the Republican assessor gave huge tax breaks to Potlatch and hit small land owners hard.  Frankly, this writer cannot dispute this point one way or the other because of a lack of information to me on how the assessments are handled. 

 

But despite my lack of information, it is a truism that the rich rule over the poor.  That’s the way the game has been played for thousands of years. 

 

Years ago, this writer was totally ignorant and did not understand or appreciate this true feature of the real world.  But after becoming religious, somewhere along the line, someone introduced me to the fantastic revelation of Proverbs 22:7 in that the rich rule the poor. 

 

So the gist of Proverbs 22:7 was mentioned by me to the cafe owner.  Actually, he never grasped the fantastic revelation in this text and fired back at me some of the Scriptures that he had memorized over the years (possibly from his mother or in Sunday School years ago or wherever).  Maybe his ability to quote a few Scriptures must have proven to his mind that he knew his “Christian Bible” too. 

 

Anyway, this writer went on to explain that i was apolitical and had no involvement in elections.  In other words, i could not and would not vote for the local Democrat in order to get rid of the incumbent Republican.  Our conversation ended and that was supposedly the end of it. 

 

 

Back to the Mail Carrier 

 

The mail carrier eats lunch at the cafe just mentioned.  My guess is that at some point in time the carrier and the cafe owner had a discussion on local politics and the cafe owner must have mentioned to him that this writer does not vote.  This fact must have stuck in the carrier’s craw. 

 

One of the hallmarks of the Sabbatian Communist system was that everybody was required by law to vote.  There really was no system of free elections since there was only “one” approved party--the Communist party.  The voter had to vote for the Communist candidate. 

 

 

The Iraqi System 

 

In 2002, Iraq had a presidential election.  There was only one candidate on the ballot--Saddam Hussein.  But in fairness, the Iraqi people were allowed to at least vote either yes or no for Saddam (this point was mentioned to the rural mail carrier, but he had to argue on it since he was so extremely anti-Saddam). 

 

The mail carrier tried to say that no one in Iraq could dare vote the no option.  Too bad, but the carrier had no facts on this allegation.  He was merely parroting the controlled media and the Bush White House spins with their nonsense and lies. 

 

In America, we do not even have the benefits of the Iraqi system (of voting yes or no).  If the Iraqi system prevailed, one could at least go into the voting booth and vote no.  But here, the US system is much like the Communist system.  The voter is given a choice of the two candidates selected by the plutocrats (which are now in the hands of the Amalekite bankers/masters). 

 

So this is hardly any choice.  It is merely an act of rubber stamping one of the Amalekites’ choices. 

 

Here, someone may try to argue that there are primaries which allow a number of candidates to run in the two major parties.  But the truth of this system is that these candidates are all professional politicians with proven track records.  The Amalekite bankers/masters in charge of US elections are familiar with all of these candidates and know in advance which ones will be suitable for their purposes. 

 

Anyone who might upset the apple-cart is either ignored or attacked in the Amalekite controlled media (like with George Wallace in 1968 or Pat Buchanan and Ralph Nader in 2000).  In all of the controlled media presentations, these non-approved people simply are not given the time of day.  And whether they receive any media attention or not, the whole thing is academic since they are only on a few state ballots. 

 

Whenever there is to be a presidential debate, the non-approved people are always locked out.  In other words, the debates take place with the approved candidates.  Thus, the non-approved candidates are largely ignored.  Since they are not on many ballots, it matters not what they say or what their positions might be.  They will not be given the time of day and they won’t get many votes. 

 

 

Me a Non-Voter 

 

In any case, it would appear that the mail carrier had been alerted that i was a dirty dog because i did not vote.  Just like in the old Communist USSR, everyone is expected to vote.  In America, it is almost the same thing.  A non-voter (who only has an opportunity to vote to continue the presently controlled system) is an evil person. 

 

So, when this writer lashed out criticism at both parties and the general problem in US politics (of media control, which pretty well call the shots), the carrier responded that more non-voting people, like me, need to start voting.  In other words, if the huge non-voting population would vote, the system could be changed (liberals always believe that things can or will get better under man’s government). 

 

Of course, this is utter nonsense.  The non-voters can’t change anything.  The entire system is already fixed in support of the status quo (which is owned, directed and managed by the Amalekite bankers/masters).  Whatever one’s position is will not force states to list anyone on ballots except the approved candidates (as approved by the Amalekite bankers/masters). 

 

This writer did point out that my status on being apolitical was based on religion.  Actually, were it not for the religious issue, i still would never go to the polls and vote for one of the “approved” candidates.  Like George Wallace said years ago, there’s not a dime’s worth of difference between the Democrats and the Republicans.  i agree with that assessment because they both are owned and controlled by the plutocrats. 

 

While one party is sometimes a little better than the other, it still devolves to voting for the lesser of two evils.  i will not vote for the lesser of two evils (yet, most Americans do so).  i will not be a party to the plutocratic controlled system and affirm any way my acceptance of its candidates. 

 

Thus, in terms of the local county assessor (of concern to my neighbor in Calder), this writer is not going to vote for either the Democrat or Republican candidates because they both are bad. 

 

Frankly, this writer voted for George Wallace in 1968.  i have not voted in a presidential election since then. Besides the religious factor, none of the candidates have represented my views.  If i voted, it would only involve a return of a blank ballot.  i will not be a part of their evil. 

 

 

Back to the Primary Discussion 

 

Omitting the implications of me not voting, a few other remarks were shared with the carrier.  He thought that Hillary Clinton was a good person, leader, senator, or whatever.  i thought that she was bad and was elected by vote fraud in NY (but he argued that vote fraud was common throughout the US and that both parties were equally guilty; and thus, the resulting fraud was offsetting). 

 

The carrier loved the sodomite Clinton and saw nothing wrong with open sodomy going on in the oval office of the president of the US.  He was a totally dedicated Sabbatian and understood nothing about questions of morality, sexual licentiousness, perversion, etc.  Of course, this writer was in a totally different ballpark. 

 

The place we came to was that there was little or no common-ground between us.  Literally, we were in different worlds. 

 

 

Another Case 

 

In the context of the above ultra leftist Democrat, mention should be made next to a so-called “conservative,” Republican follower of George W. Bush and his brand of responsible conservatism. 

 

This writer occasionally goes into the little town of St. Maries, Idaho in order to do laundry at a local laundromat.  This particular laundromat has a full time worker who takes care of it.  She is probably in her forties in age and perhaps a little younger than the above cited rural mail carrier.  But since her life teachings, experience and motivations have occurred in the last forty years, she is as zombiized as the mailman. 

 

Along with this zombiized mental conditioning, this woman is also an introvert and is not very outgoing or friendly.  In other words, one must speak to her to get any response at all. 

 

Most employees at a place of business are very careful about insulting or being verbally hostile to a customer.  Manifestly, this condition does not apply to this woman.  While she is an introvert and though she is not going to engage in conversation unless someone else starts it, she can be very rude, hateful, arrogant and nasty to try to talk to if the words said to her strike her wrong in some way. 

 

In waiting for my laundry to be finished, this writer sometimes has tried to engage this woman in some petty talk.  Actually, my efforts have occurred some four times in the last year and a half. 

 

 

The Four Instances 

 

In the first instance, there was a news story or some local talk about some holy rollers at a holy roller church.  Well, since yours truly is no fan of the holy roller movement and accepts that it is demonic to the core, some critical comments on either Christianity or the holy rollers were passed on to the laundromat woman.  She became very indignant with me and clearly sided with the Christian group. 

 

More time passed and this writer saw a news report on the evils of Bill “Slick” Clinton.  This one was on Bill wanting to date a South American mummy who had been dead for many long centuries and a recent alleged story about a mummy getting pregnant.  This writer mentioned the two stories to the woman and she actually smiled and seemed to get a laugh out of it.  It was clear to me that she didn’t like Clinton. 

 

The third instance came up on February 14, 2003, when almost the entire UN Security Council seemed to be on the side of Iraq rather than with Bush and the US.  It was clear to me that Bush was not going to get a UN declaration of war against Saddam without some more explicit cause or justification.  The thought came to me that what Bush most needed was another terrorist incident which could be blamed on Saddam. 

 

This condition was mentioned  to the laundromat woman.  She simply didn’t get it and started mumbling about the dangers of Saddam committing a terrorist incident against America (as if he would do this and at the very time that he is walking the extra mile for world public opinion and support). 

 

To try to get through this woman’s state of confusion and lack of comprehension, the point was made by me that such an incident would not necessarily be from Saddam (though Bush and his team of liars would go to the controlled media and blame it on Saddam). 

 

Because the woman was extremely thick headed (and zombiized by the controlled media and educational institutions), it finally dawned upon her that my remarks were predicated upon a faked or scripted attack which could be blamed upon Saddam and Iraq (the US has followed this methodology before to get a war started; so it was very plausible that someone could do something in this context in February or March 2003 to justify the Bush plans for war). 

 

 

The Zombie Reality Really Surfaces

 

Unbeknown to me, this woman happens to be a big follower and supporter of George W. Bush and the Republicans.  Though she is stupid and a credulous fool, she believes in this team of evil workers. 

 

Well, the laundromat woman was very indignant with me and asked if I didn’t believe that Osama bin Laden was responsible for the 9-11 attacks.  My response was that i didn’t know.  A customer in the laundromat needed some help so she cut off our conversation and went about her work. 

 

The next time this writer was in the laundromat, this prior conversation was recalled with her.  The point was made that this writer does not know whether Osama was guilty of 9-11 or not.  After all, all that the American people have is the word of George W. Bush that Osama was guilty.  No evidence was ever forthcoming. 

 

 

She Became Angry 

 

So the woman became angry and lashed out at me about Bush being the leader of the United States and that he knows things that he cannot tell the American people.  We, the American people, must simply listen to him and believe what he says.  Of course, these remarks are absolutely stupid and represent the unfathomable ignorance and gullibility of a stupid woman. 

 

An attempt was made to cover a couple of other points with her about 9-11 which should make anyone with brains above the idiot level be suspicious that the public was not told the truth about 9-11 (remember Adolf Schicklgruber said to tell a lie over and over and finally the public will believe it). 

 

Again, this writer repeated my position that i didn’t know whether Osama bin Laden was guilty of 9-11 or not.  In fact, George W. Bush has never presented any proof that Osama or the al Qaeda people were involved. 

 

As yours truly mentioned to the woman, there is even reason to believe that the Mossad pulled this caper off--perhaps with the participation of some patsy Arabs.  Too, there is the reality that Osama has been on the US payroll for years (along with other evil dictators and oppressors all over the world).  Was Osama working for America in 2001 or not? 

 

 

She Never Got It 

 

The laundromat woman was totally ignorant about the Mossad and how the real world operates.  So it was useless to talk to her and try to get her to wake up from her sleep and zombiized state and try to understand that things are not like they seem. 

 

Finally, this writer simply gave up and said no more to her as she bombarded me with how wonderful and truthful Bush was.  After these last two conversations, it became manifest to me that the poor woman was simply a hoodwinked, gullible, ignorant follower of George W. Bush and the Republicans.  She knew nothing except what GWB told her over the controlled media sources. 

 

 

Understanding the Problem

 

Of course, the primary difference between both of the above cited persons and this writer must eventually settle in on the reality that much of my growing up and developing occurred before the Sabbatian philosophy totally took over the United States--which happened primarily during the 1950s (although this motion started with FDR and greatly accelerated after WWII under Harry Truman). 

 

Because of the tremendous strength and power of the demented Sabbatian thinking (which has completely taken over the US since WWII), it is virtually out of the question to try to discuss American politics with people born after WWII.  While even some older people have been affected (in either growing up under or living in this environment for the last 50-60 years), many of them still have some independent thinking. 

 

As already outlined in preceding chapters herein, most people under age 50 have been completely mesmerized and zombiized.  Their minds have been completely seared by TV and the corrupt educational system (which succumbed to Sabbatian thinking long ago). 

 

Knowing the hugely different environment that modern people have lived under and learned under since about 1950 (when TV came in), in comparison with the development and learning before 1950 (before TV came in), this writer does realize the need to be careful of what is said to these persons. 

 

All that you will usually accomplish is to make an enemy.  And very soon, Big Brother will extend his totalitarian system so extensively and pervasively that the persons who know something about you and your beliefs will share that information with the state. 

 

Therefore, if Big Brother doesn’t have enough adverse information in his files on your beliefs, more will come from many of these people and supposedly innocent conversations an unsuspecting person may have with them. 

 

 

The Bottom Line 

 

What this amounts to is that people with political, religious, social or other controversial beliefs (that are in sharp contrast to the politically correct positions) had better be very careful about who is spoken to and what words are said.  An innocent remark may one day be sufficient to either send a person to a concentration camp or a firing squad.  We live in very dangerous times. 

 

The dilemma of how this sad state of zombiized people (like the above described mail carrier and laundromat worker) developed in the United States and indeed in the entire Western Christian civilization was assessed in preceding chapters and needs no further explanation now. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 503--Government Plans for Tyranny

 

 

More on a National Emergency 

 

Having mentioned throughout this publication the continuing White House plans to suspend the United States Constitution and declare martial law (with far more dictatorial fiat than Abe Lincoln’s suspension and martial law declarations of 1863), it would be well to take note of some other things going on that may precipitate such an action quicker than what one may suppose. 

 

For some time now (actually, since mid 1997), many students of international events and intelligence have been following believed plans of the Iraqis or some other Muslim state to use germ warfare against the United States.  In particular, it appears that the Muslims have had deadly bubonic plague, anthrax and small pox toxins available which could be easily dispensed to an unsuspecting civilian population. 

 

With the way things developed in early 2003, the day of reckoning for the United States may be closer at hand than anything ever dreamed of before.  The constant Bush administration pressure, opposition and war on the Muslims must spell out coming trouble for America. 

 

Someday, the Muslims will eventually counterattack.  Any radiological, chemical or biological agents that they may have in the US could easily be employed. 

 

This writer first heard about these plans over a radio program on “Bible Prophecy” by David J. Smith of Texas in the early summer of 1997.  Smith had a guest on his program who had worked for years for the US Army’s biological warfare program. 

 

The Jun-Jul 1998 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 14-15, 32) had a lengthy article quoting remarks and warnings from former CIA official and microbiologist Larry Harris, discussed in a prior chapter.  Harris is another individual who has spoken out and warned about this Muslim threat which was scheduled to take place by 2000. 

 

With the postponement of US aggression against Iraq to 2003, this 2000 date has obviously slipped a little.  But the dominoes are falling into place for it to happen and happen soon--as is described elsewhere herein in other commentary addressing the US war on terrorism. 

 

Besides distributing the AIDS and EBOLA viruses and any number of other deadly biological agents, it appears that the US military sold anthrax and bubonic plague agents to Saddam, which can be dispersed upon a population with a small dispensing machine from a moving automobile.  Perhaps this fact precipitated all of the outcries from the US to have inspectors in Iraq looking for these agents. 

 

 

Muslim Plans 

 

As the warnings indicate, it isn’t only that the Muslims have this material, but it is also important to note that they have had alleged plans to use it against 100-120 American cities.  The point was made that Muslim representatives (over 100 cell teams) have been entering the US in numbers with these bacteria agents and the means to obtain the distribution equipment locally. 

 

The reason why these Muslim agents can come in is because America has no secure borders and makes no effort to keep undesirables out.  In any case, they are reportedly here in numbers (as America found out on Sep 11, 2001).  With a little effort, they can take this stuff in an automobile and drive down an interstate highway to dispense it in the air and kill multitudes of people. 

 

The London “Sunday Times” had a story on Nov 16, 1997, which suggested that Saddam Hussein (or Osama bin Laden) might also have single engine crop duster aircraft--that can be converted into remote controlled drones to dispense huge quantities of bacterial and chemical agents across large areas very quickly.  The report called this the “doomsday option.” 

 

Also, in 2001, some of the terrorists who participated in the Muslim attacks on the World Trade Center and the Pentagon on Sep 11, 2001 (as described in detail in preceding chapters), were known to have checked into obtaining crop duster planes and getting licenses to handle hazardous materials. 

 

Chuck Missler’s “Personal Update” paper for Feb 1998 (p. 3) quoted Secretary of Defense William Cohen as admitting in Dec 1997 that some “28” American cities are now targeted for “nationalist and religious” terrorist attacks by Iraq (or by Osama bin Laden), using chemical, biological or nuclear agents. 

 

As noted in an earlier discussion, any future US attack on the Muslims could be the trigger that would set the Muslims off to launch a terrorist counter-attack.  Since the US government, under the power of the plutocrats, have been attacking the Muslims at will for the past several years, it won’t be long before they retaliate (as happened already on Sep 11, 2001, in New York and Washington, DC). 

 

Every time the US bombs Iraq, Afghanistan or some other Muslim state over some alleged cause, the prospects of a terrorist reprisal in the US intensifies. 

 

The Jun-Jul 1998 “Prophecy Flash” article also reflects that while the Clinton administration publicly pooh-poohed these warnings, it privately began preparing for such an eventuality, involving perhaps 120 American cities, and resulting in perhaps 40 million American deaths initially and millions more a little later.  Certainly, Bush must now be concerned. 

 

 

Not Whether, But When 

 

In 1999, US Army Colonel David Franz told Diane Sawyer and Sam Donaldson on ABC’s Prime Time that “The likelihood of a biological attack in the U.S. is now high;” and Dr Michael Osterholm, Chief of Disease Epidemiology at the MN Department of Public Health, said that it is not a matter of “if” this will happen; but rather, a matter of when (per undated letter from Lee Bellinger, editor of the “American Sentinel”). 

 

Osterholm goes on to say that not only will it happen, but asks “how much panic and how much death are we willing to accept at the time it occurs... It will be the closest thing to a living hell that I can imagine... Worse yet, there has not been a single government alert put out to the public health systems or this country.  No letters, no phone calls, no suggestions about how to handle this frightening situation.” 

 

Of course, the doctor is right.  The federal government is saying nothing publicly about the threat.  This is like the situation in 1999 when the Japanese had a nuclear accident that released radioactive particles into the atmosphere; which, in time, came with the jet stream to fall upon the Pacific Northwest.  Big Brother said nothing to the citizens who faced this nuclear fallout. 

 

As outlined elsewhere herein, a number of large volcanoes are acting strange in the Western part of the US.  Again, the federal government has said nothing to alert citizens about what all is going on.  It seems that if a threat to the health and safety of Americans arise, there is a strange silence about it from Washington (as if government leaders could care less what happens to the affected people). 

 

 

Some Measures 

 

Despite this strange silence about the likelihood of a biological attack, the federal government has certainly been taking some steps.  For sure, Clinton made preparations by building a secret command and control bunker in the White House underground for the president to use if needed, as noted in a prior chapter (does this not sound a lot like Schicklgruber’s underground bunker in Berlin in WWII?). 

 

Assuredly, the biological threat is real and some insignificant actions have been taken.  For instance, the US Army’s Chemical and Biological Command has started a $52 million crash course to train civilian civil defense personnel in some 120 American cities on how to cope with a terrorist attack involving VH gas, sarin and anthrax agents (per Richard Parker, in the “Oregonian” of Aug 10, 1997). 

 

Both the Marine Corps and Army are training medical teams on how to respond in such attacks.  Early 1998 also saw the US military begin a campaign to inoculate all military personnel against anthrax and the plague (“Personal Update,” Feb 1998, p. 3). 

 

As the Jun-Jul 1998 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 32) article outlined, the Clinton administration in 1998 was quietly preparing for such a Muslim attack, but they were preparing in a unique way.  Instead of public statements and education on the threat and how Americans can survive it, the focus was on reacting and processing the casualties and deaths. 

 

A Sep 2001 letter from Lee Bellinger (editor of “American Sentinel”) said that vaccines and facilities are simply not available to respond to such an attack.  Bellinger quoted a June 2001 mock exercise conducted by the government which showed that reality. 

 

By mid 2002, the Bush administration concern focused upon the threat of a small pox plague from so-called Mid-East terrorists.  Hence, an effort commenced to give small pox vaccines to many or all US medical and government personnel. 

 

 

Russian Developments 

 

Since the supposed Communist empire collapsed in Moscow, reports have likewise surfaced mentioning the work of the Russians in the development of anthrax and other biological agents.  The most extensive revelation on these activities came from an article by Joseph D. Douglass Jr on “A Biological Weapons Threat Worse Than Saddam,” appearing in the Mar 10, 1998, “Wall Street Journal.” 

 

Douglass referred to comments made by Russian defector Kanatjan Alibekov on a recent “ABC Prime Time Live” presentation.  Alibekov was a former deputy director of Biopreparat, a huge Russian weapons development program started years ago in the Soviet Union.  It continued despite opposition from Boris Yeltsin. 

 

The report said that Biopreparat had employed some 25,000 engineers, scientists and technicians in the development of some 52 biological agents before 1992 (when Alibekov left the agency).  The work has included the development of ballistic missile warheads--loaded with anthrax and small pox intended for delivery against US cities. 

 

Writer Douglass went on to also suggest that the Russians have been involved in genetic engineering projects and had possibly developed a strain of anthrax which was resistant to US vaccines. 

 

While the focus of this program had military and warfare applications, it appears that Moscow had other schemes in mind as well.  Apparently, the Soviets/Russians have concentrated upon chemical and biological agents useful in political assassinations. 

 

One objective of these agents and programs has been to mimic the effects of natural diseases.  Another has been to render a person ineffective without killing him, with a view that he would be confused and make bad decisions--which was better than killing him and having him replaced. 

 

Numbers of agents were developed which were intended for focused military use--such as special non-lethal agents for use against pilots, tank drivers, command posts and field commanders.  Some of these agents were tested in Vietnam.  The Soviets had a program there of monitoring US airplane crashes due to the use of their agents. 

 

 

The Threat is Still Real 

 

Much of the world supposes that with the breakup of the old USSR, the danger from Moscow is over.  However, as the article suggests, the Russian leadership could change overnight (in early 2003, it looks like Russian President Putin has already changed and is prepared to re-institute much of the old Soviet system).  

 

Every passing day sees the Russian government continuing to plow vast sums of money into military hardware.  They are getting ready for a confrontation with the United States, Britain, and the state of Israel (in an ante-type of Ezekiel 38). 

 

Finally, the Slick Clinton launched assault in the Balkans may have paved the way for the Russians to eventually enter that conflict in some fashion on the side of their Serb allies.  Despite the lack of Congressional or public support, Slick continued to press it in 2000.  As the Russians are being pushed on this, they could decide to use some of their chemical, biological or nuclear weapons of terror inside the US. 

 

In other Russian developments, information has surfaced on their efforts to produce suitcase nuclear bombs or nuclear briefcases (as mentioned earlier), depending upon how one might wish to characterize them.  Much concern has been expressed over the possibility that these bombs can be obtained and used by unfriendly agents against America. 

 

According to Professor Aleksey Yablokov, a corresponding member of the Russian Academy of Sciences, Russia still has a large number of these briefcase bombs under the control of the Russian President.  Yablokov noted that the PLO allegedly bought some nuclear devices from Russia which could be these small bombs (per Victor Sokirko, “Israeli & Global News,” Nov 17, 1997). 

 

 

Surrender Liberty For Hoped For Security 

 

Secretary of Defense William Cohen told the “Army Times” in 1997 that terrorism is increasing to the point that Americans might soon have to choose between their civil liberties (the US Constitution) and more intrusive means of protection (per “USA Today,” Sep 15, 1997). 

 

Will modern Americans trade their Bill of Rights and Constitutional protections for supposed security?  Without a doubt, the answer is “yes,” here in the early 21st century.  Anytime before the Korean War, the answer was always no!  But times have changed in America. 

 

Obviously, personal security was never in the minds of the persons who signed the Declaration of Independence.  They laid their lives and fortunes on the line with their signatures.  All of them would have been promptly hung as traitors if the British had captured them.  As a minimum, most of them lost their private property and holdings. 

 

How about the “give me liberty or give me death” speech of Patrick Henry in Hanover County, Virginia at the start of the American Revolution?  There is no question but that the famous Virginian would have never traded liberty for security (real or imagined). 

 

The previously quoted General Benton Partin (in his video on Globalism) says that a period of escalating violence will be used as one of the final steps in the present plans to impose the New World Order on the American population. 

 

If a bomb, germ and/or chemical threat materializes, in the context of domestic terrorism, the time table for world government may be moved up, at least, in terms of thinking by US government leaders.  Literally, things can explode very quickly.  It won’t take much of a provocation and Big Brother will immediately declare a national emergency and suspend the US Constitution. 

 

 

Lee Bellinger, Revisited 

 

In the way of a possible recap of what to soon expect, the previously quoted Lee Bellinger (editor of “American Sentinel”) wrote in a late 2000 letter (just after the US elections):  “Federal troops are prepared to seize control of the United States in response to a national catastrophe--such as a biological terror attack, or a Middle East nation detonating one of the many missing Soviet nuclear devices in a major U.S. city... 

 

“The fact is--most experts believe that  a major terror attack is simply a matter of when, not if.  And when it does occur, social chaos will be the result.  Pandemonium on a scale unseen in our history, and almost certain to trigger a massive federal police response. 

 

“Hard to believe?  In May 2000 the federal government began practice (of) ‘crowd control’ drills in ‘Operation Topoff’ -- Clinton’s planned draconian response to a biological terror attack against U.S. population centers.  An Associated Press report confirms that Attorney General Janet Reno directed federal emergency response drills in concert with FEMA, the Federal Emergency Management Agency. 

 

“This spells trouble with a capital ‘T.’  Let me be blunt:  These national exercises in crowd control are nothing less than dress rehearsals for the imposition of marital law.  And because the general public is not being prepared for this likely scenario, it is even more vital that YOU take modest, common-sense steps to prepare yourself for the inevitable social chaos. 

 

“Most Americans don’t realize this, but a dazzling array of Executive Orders issued by the Clinton administration has quietly put the machinery in place to impose a national state of emergency in response to the four most likely scenarios security experts believe will confront the federal government within the next 3 years, including: 

 

“1. Social chaos in response to a biological or major terrorist attack against the U.S.  2. Social chaos in response to stock market instability and panic runs on banks.  3. Social chaos spreading to urban areas from the nation’s racially-charged inner cities.  4. Social chaos sparked by a ‘cyber-attack’ against the fragile U.S. computer infrastructure.” 

 

 

Outline for Tyranny 

 

As noted above, things are in place for Big Brother to declare a national emergency, suspend the Constitution and assume dictatorial control of the United States (by Clinton, if he regains power, or whomever). 

 

Every day that passes, which makes for Clinton popularity, spells out a day closer to the likelihood of Slick regaining power (under a new constitution or possibly under the coat tails of a Hillary presidency, or possibly even assuming power at the UN) and acting to preserve that power in someway by dictatorial fiat. 

 

For sure, if Slick regains power, declares a national emergency and takes over control of the US government (he has all of the executive orders in place and especially since George W. Bush has continued them or added to them), Bill will immediately arrest all of his opponents.  Thereafter, Big Brother (Clinton, Bush, Rice, Powell or whomever) could be hated by most all Americans when martial law is declared)! 

 

Not only would the Militia, right wing and Christian Identity people go down the tubes, but Slick (or Hillary Clinton, George W. Bush, Colin Powell, Condi Rice or whomever) would imprison all the others who have or could cause problems.  This list would assuredly include such people as Rush Limbaugh, G. Gordon Liddy, Michael Reagan, certain judges, key political opponents and on and on. 

 

 

More Tyranny 

 

The Jul 17-Aug 6, 1998, “Trade N’ Save” newspaper (p. 1) had an article by Jim Hardin on “Outline for Tyranny” which argued that within the next 12 to 18 months, the following events are scheduled to take place--viz: 

 

(1) The use of social security identification numbers (SSIN) by banks and credit companies is already in place.  (2) The States are being mandated to standardize drivers licenses as federal ID cards.  Some states are planning a biometric code on them.  (3) All children are being given SSIN at birth.  This puts them in the system from birth to death. 

 

(4) The UN requires all member states to maintain ID numbers on all citizens.  (5) Medical and insurance records are now being tracked by SSIN.  (6) Employers must require a W-4 with SSIN to track people’s employment.  (7) Within 6 months, all gun purchases will be approved and tracked by the federal government.  Next, all guns will be registered. 

 

(8) Clinton’s Executive Order establishing federal law as the law of the land (discussed elsewhere herein) to invalidate the 10th Amendment.  (9) Public law (like PL 104-193) already allows the federal government to track all citizens.  (10) The “Deadbeat Dad” law will register all people who go to work for a new company.  It means new employees must be approved by the government when hired. 

 

(11) The new “school to work” law will determine what jobs each citizen will have for the rest of their lives.  (12) Property will be controlled through UN agreements (like Clean Air, Bio-diversity, Clean Water, Rivers Act, etc).  The control of property will control people.  (13) Trade agreements have already put American producers at the mercy of foreigners. 

 

(14) The new World Courts will determine what laws citizens must follow.  Just wait until the new Freedom From Religious Persecution Act becomes implemented.  If your religious belief is not on this approved list, then you no longer have any protection for your beliefs.  (15) The dollars which have flooded the world will soon be coming back to the US to cause massive inflation. 

 

(16) There was the coming Y2K problem (which largely fizzled out).  (17) The federal government has started a policy of sending checks only to a direct deposit system.  (18) This leads to a cashless society.  (19) Cameras are now being installed throughout America to monitor the movements of private citizens. 

 

(20) Police are now routinely setting up roadblocks to check the identification and papers of travelers.  Rather than protect citizens, police are more like the old Nazi SS forces.  (21) Police and law makers no longer honor their oath to protect the US Constitution.  Many don’t even know what the Constitution says. 

 

Like Jim Hardin says in his article, the above list is enough for tyranny.  Otherwise, there is still more out there and far more to come in the coming months.  Once the cashless society is here, it will be very difficult to buy food or conduct trade without being a part of the system.  Assuredly, the mark of the beast, 666, is just around the corner. 

 

 

Laws Now on the Books 

 

The “Trade N’ Save” newspaper of Aug 7, 1998, followed up with an article by Claire Wolfe on the “Legacy of the 1994 Republican Revolution” which outlined the ten laws now on the books that are enough for tyranny right now--viz: 

 

(1) A national database of employed people; (2) 100 pages of new health care crimes--penalty for violation includes seizure of assets from both doctors and patients; (3) Confiscation of assets from any American who establishes foreign citizenship; (4) The largest gun confiscation act in US history;  

 

(5) A law banning guns in ill-defined school zones, authorizing random roadblocks for enforcement; (6) More money for the ATF; (7) A law allowing the executive branch to arbitrarily declare various groups as terrorist groups without appeal.  Once declared, the mailing and membership lists must be turned over to federal officials; 

 

(8) A law authorizing secret trials with secret evidence for certain types of persons; (9) A law requiring all states to issue drivers’ licenses with social security numbers and security features to include fingerprints and personal records; and (10) A new national database that will include every patient exchange and observation occurring within doctors’ offices. 

 

This list failed to mention Title 50 of the US Code which now authorizes the president to declare any material in the US as scarce or material the supply of which is threatened by accumulation.  Once declared, it will be unlawful for citizens to have such material, beyond reasonable demands (which Big Brother will define) for business, personal or home consumption (Aug 1998 “Idaho Observer,” p. 7). 

 

This law is far reaching.  It allows the president to seize almost anything in the hands of the public (as he may decide).  Ostensibly, it was passed to control hoarding, but the president can unilaterally declare any material as qualifying by publishing it in the Federal Register. 

 

 

Future Plans 

 

In 1998, Attorney General Janet Reno launched a new effort in Congress to pass a whole array of new laws to permanently install a dictatorial federal police power in the US, in clear contradiction to the Constitution (Dec 1998 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 29).  The background on these efforts came from Congressman Bob Barr when he released data on Sep 28, 1998, on Reno’s shopping list. 

 

She wanted a new definition of terrorism to include domestic crimes correctly unrelated to terrorism; the power to seize commercial transportation assets; expanded wiretap authority to include roving wiretaps and wiretaps without court authority (which are largely now in place); and new asset forfeiture laws to allow the FBI to seize personal property in both criminal and civil matters. 

 

More items on the shopping list included the establishment of a permanent FBI Police Force; change the Posse Comitatus restrictions to allow more US military involvement in domestic law enforcement matters; and authority to force telephone and Internet companies to divulge information on their customers.  With the September 11, 2001, terrorist attacks, this stuff, for sure, has already or will soon be coming down the pike. 

 

As late as Aug 4, 1999, Reno and the Clinton administration prepared a new request for legislation.  This latest scheme was that they wanted authority to secretly enter a private home or office for the purpose of neutralizing or removing any security devices on personal and business computer systems (Sep 6, 1999, “Spotlight,” p. 10). 

 

This effort would allow the feds to plant devices to allow them to read all of the files and incoming and outgoing data in the computer.  Actually, they already have the ability to externally read many of these files.  But apparently, some citizens have installed scrambling and security systems to protect their computer files and operations.  The feds want to secretly go into and alter these security devices. 

 

Under the new hate crimes agenda, as pushed by Clinton and Janet Reno, America has moved to the point that right wingers, patriots, conservatives and sincere religious people are being automatically declared to be extremists in the context that they are enemies of the state.  As noted earlier, if someone mentions the word race, they can be immediately chastised as a racist, White supremacist, etc. 

 

Once a person is labeled as a right wing extremist, racist or White supremacist, or by some other media and government catch word which generates emotionalism, that person is up against the full powers of government.  It won’t be long before Big Brother successfully finds some charge to prosecute him or her on. 

 

 

The Bottom Line 

 

While the evil duo of Bill “Slick” Clinton and Janet “Butch” Reno are ostensibly gone for the time being, no one should be gullible enough to relax and suppose that all of these plans for tyranny are things of the past.  As noted in previous chapters, and as will be detailed in later chapters, the George W. Bush administration is proving to be just as tyrannical as Clinton and Reno. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 504--Coming Deception

 

 

Two Definitions 

 

Funk & Wagnalls’ “Standard Desk Dictionary” (p. 164) defines deception as “1. The act of deceiving; deceit.  2. The state of deceived.  3. Anything that deceives or is meant to deceive; a delusion. [See DECEIVE].”  For deceive, this source says “1. To mislead by falsehood; lead into error; delude... 2. To practice deceit.” 

 

One of the great tragedies on this theme is the extraordinary and profound presence of lies and deception in the world historically, today and in the immediately coming future.  Perhaps part of the problem is that all men are lairs (Num 23:19; Ps 116:11; Rom 3:4).  There are no exceptions with this charge (beyond YHWH YESHUA). 

 

Yes, all of the great men in the Scriptures have been liars at one time or the other--to include Adam, Seth, Enoch, Noah, Shem, Avraham, Yitzhak, Yisrael, Moshe, David, Yoshiyahu, Shaul the apostle, Kefa and so it goes.  Yes, this all figure includes both you and me (this writer is working hard to confess this sin only in the past tense.  But the problem is so great that it is easy to become entrapped in lies and deceit). 

 

And the tragedy is furthermore that most people have not the foggiest idea of how extensive they do lie and deceive.  Many or most people (and especially Christian people) live under the delusion that they cannot be charged with lies as long as their hearts are in the right place in sincerity.  They simply don’t understand that a Scriptural lie is simply a falsehood or untruth. 

 

Therefore, the indictment that comes home to all of us is that we all are liars.  In other words, all of the Christian pap about meaning well will not alter the fact that Christians tell lies like everyone else. 

 

 

Hollywood 

 

Perhaps actor Marlon Brandon put it well when he described his profession as involving lies and deceit (in Brando’s teachings about Lying for a Living).

 

And this has to be one of the issues in evaluating the movie and television professions.  Is it right to live and convey an image of lies/deceit (as in Hollywood)?  Well, this writer is not completely sure of the answer here.  But certainly, on the surface, one must back off and wonder about this reality in the live stage, movies and TV. 

 

In any case, this writer grew up in the 1930s and 1940s when the movies were not totally corrupt and depraved as they are today.  Some of this stuff from the old days was both entertaining and educational (as discussed earlier on cultural issues). 

 

One of the things which impressed me about Hollywood was its incredible ability to convey lies and deceit in a convincing manner. 

 

 

Some Examples 

 

For example, take the question of the height of various Hollywood stars.  Many of those men especially were actually quite short in height.  Of course, the hero in a movie cannot be a real short guy.  So Hollywood had to quickly entertain a methodology of handling this adverse situation. 

 

Take the well known TV Western drama called “Bonanza,” with the Cartwright family, starring Lorne Green, Pernell Roberts, Michael Landon, and Dan Blocker.  Of this whole crowd, all of them were fairly short men, except for Dan Blocker (who had very evident behemah genes).  While Blocker was stocky and heavy set, he too was not really a tall man (he was assuredly something under six feet in height). 

 

One of the characteristics of filming the Bonanza TV series was that these short stars demanded that only other short actors play in their series.  While there may have been some goofs which let some taller men into roles in Bonanza, the truth remains that the short stars insisted on short supporting actors. 

 

So this story from Bonanza tells how Hollywood dealt with the height problem.  Since it was unthinkable that men (and especially women) would be taller than the leading male stars, the studios essentially worked out the problem by using short supporting actors. 

 

The very short James Cagney (an Irish Edomite) was a big star at the Amalekite Warner Brothers for years.  It is assuredly true that Warner Brothers went out of its way to be sure that Cagney was not embarrassed over his height, as compared with the heights of other actors on the set. 

 

 

However 

 

But sometimes, it was practical for some casting director to actually put in a much taller male actor in some roll involving a short male star.  Whether these instances simply involved goofs and mistakes or whether there were other compelling reasons for the casting, the reality created a situation where the director of the film had to use some ingenuity in dealing with the problem. 

 

In the first place, it is easy to have taller actors sitting down when dialoging with shorter actors.  A watching audience can almost never pick up on the height disparity when people are sitting down.   Too, cameras can be used in certain angles or positions to also distort the appearance of heights in people. 

 

However, the ultimate solution which directors came up with was to use elevated boxes, platforms or walks for short actors and/or depressed platforms or walks for taller actors when the two were appearing together.  This movie magic meant that the scene could and would show two men with supposedly the same height; when, in fact, one was tremendously taller than the other. 

 

Of course, it goes without saying that in shooting the scene the director would not allow the camera to pick up on the elevated or depressed platforms, etc.  This is easy to do because many camera shots are only of the actors heads, or certainly from their waists up. 

 

Call this deception or whatever, but it sure fooled the later watching audiences.  It was a few rare individuals who could or would pick up on what was happening in the shooting of the film. 

 

Actually, it is possible for an observant person to detect this Hollywood subterfuge in some of the films; because while directors sometimes used this deception, they did not always employ this technique for all shots and all scenes.  Therefore, there might be occasions in a movie when the true heights of the players could be compared and evaluated. 

 

Sometimes, one actor would appear to be much taller than his lead colleague.  But maybe, in another scene, they would seem to be about the same height.  This leveling action is particularly called for in fight scenes where tall men do not like to fight and win over short men and short men are at a decided disadvantage in fighting much taller men. 

 

 

John Wayne 

 

In WWII, several people, who would have probably never made it big in Hollywood, made it simply because they came on stage just about the time that WWII started and they were 4-Fs.  This allowed them to stay home and make movies while many of the bigger stars were off in the military (like Clark Gable, Jimmy Stewart, William Holden, Henry Fonda, Glenn Ford, etc). 

 

John Wayne was a classic case in point.  The 4F Wayne simply didn’t have it in 1941 (while he did make “Stagecoach” in 1939 with John Ford, Wayne’s career was definitely on the downside until WWII broke out).  But with WWII and the need to have a rambo-type slugging it out with the Japs all over the Pacific, Wayne was the man. 

 

As outlined in a former chapter, Wayne had several problems which hurt him grossly in trying to be a big star (his voice, looks, Hittite resembling nose, and acting ability all offered problems). 

 

Importantly, Wayne was too tall (at 6’4”)--so Hollywood had to use various methods of deception to make his supporting actors have some height (especially in fight scenes where a big Wayne would appear to be a bully slugging it out with short actors). 

 

As noted in that prior chapter, Hollywood cast the young Wayne in the role of a singing cowboy in some of his early films.  The only trouble was that Wayne couldn’t sing.  So, what did Hollywood do?  They dubbed in the voice of someone else in the scenes where Wayne was supposedly singing. 

 

But most importantly, in terms of being a cowboy star, Wayne was not much on riding horses as a old time cowboy acquaintance of mine once pointed out.  In any scenes showing hard riding, Hollywood used a double for Wayne.  Wayne films prove this claim where Wayne is shown bobbing up and down even when riding a horse in a trot.  The rhythm of good riders is in harmony with the stride of their horses in hard riding. 

 

 

Dana Andrews 

 

Perhaps one of the best illustrations of the height problem has to have been with Dana Andrews who came up in the big leagues; when he, too, like Wayne, was able to garner a number of war rolls during WWII.  But Andrews had a problem.  He was not a particularly tall man (certainly, he was nothing in comparison with the 6’ 4” Wayne). 

 

Over the years, this writer has seen a number of pictures made by Dana Andrews.  Sometimes, the work of the director was obvious in placing him on a box or elevated platform (and these acts were ascertainable when Andrews was in contact with other taller actors in other scenes where the height problem was not similarly dealt with by the director). 

 

In a western called “Johnny Reno,” Andrews played opposite big Jane Russell.  Now, Jane Russell was not exactly a small woman.  In fact, she was as tall (or perhaps even taller) than Dana Andrews.  Actually, in a couple of shots they were shown to be of about the same height. 

 

Yet, when it came time for Andrews to kiss Jane, he was much taller than her.  How was this thing handled?  Surely, the director made him stand on a box or something else to give him some added height in order to stand over big Jane. 

 

One more word is needed on Dana Andrews.  In the film “Elephant Walk,” with Elizabeth Taylor, he didn’t have any noticeable problem with Taylor’s height (after all, she is a fairly short woman). 

 

But invariably, when Andrews was shown with a coat or jacket on, he had extraordinarily wide shoulders.  The padding was so obvious that no one could miss it (and especially, when he was shown in other shots without wearing a coat or jacket). 

 

The essence of these remarks from Hollywood is that it is very easy to deceive and mislead people as to reality.  And that’s the real world out there.  It is a world of lies and deception. 

 

 

“Operation Cicero” 

 

In 1950, former German intelligence officer L. C. Moyzisch published his book entitled “Five Fingers” (later made into a hit Hollywood movie).  It was perhaps one of the most fantastic stories of espionage to come out of WWII.  Moyzisch was stationed at the German Embassy in neutral Turkey where his story took place. 

 

In early 1944, war was raging across Europe and the allies were preparing to invade Normandy Beach in Western France in early June 1944.  Unexpectedly, one evening in March 1944, Moyzisch had a visitor at the German embassy in Ankara. 

 

In time, the man turned out to be a man named Diello, who was an Albanian valet of the British Ambassador in Ankara, Turkey.  When Moyzisch met him, he had come to sell photo copies of documents to the German government. 

 

In his work for the British Ambassador, he had total access to the Ambassador’s quarters and office at the British embassy.  In that capacity, he had access to the Ambassador’s safe which contained much of the allied strategy and planned operations for conduct of the war. 

 

The valet offered to sell copies of these documents for a large sum of British pounds.  Ultimately, Moyzisch obtained approval from Berlin and proceeded to buy these documents in batches at a cost of 15,000 or 20,000 pounds per purchase.  The Germans gave their spy Diello the code name of “Cicero.” 

 

In time, Cicero linked in with a countess refugee from Poland to give him some cover and to launder some of the money in Turkey.  Things went well for awhile and the Germans brought in an intelligence specialist from Berlin to handle Cicero.  But the British became suspicious and brought in a team of counterintelligence agents to try to determine what was going wrong in the embassy. 

 

With the passage of more time, the German diplomatic code was broken and the British were introduced to a German spy working at the British embassy named Cicero.  Efforts intensified to catch him. 

 

With a receipt of around 137,000 pounds in British notes, Cicero and his countess girl friend were ready to close up shop and flee to Rio De Janeiro in Brazil.  But before this exodus took place, the countess double crossed Cicero, took 130,000 pounds of his money and fled to Switzerland.  Cicero was shocked, needless to say. 

 

But the Germans wanted one more vital piece of information.  They wanted to know when and where the allied invasion of Western Europe would take place.  Cicero got it and demanded 100,000 pounds for the data.  The German agents reluctantly agreed to meet him and buy the information. 

 

In the meantime, the British had discovered the identity of Cicero with his latest efforts to get the information.  They were looking for ways to seize him even as he was trying to set up a meeting with the Germans.  They wanted him captured alive so that they could find out how much and what type of information that he had been feeding the Germans. 

 

The last Cicero meeting with the Germans took place in a restaurant.  The Germans sent along a hit team of two men to ostensibly kill Cicero so that the British could not capture him.  The British also had a team of people arrive at the restaurant at the same time. 

 

While Cicero and the German agents were making their exchange, the British sent Cicero a note offering him protection from the Germans who might kill him after getting the documents.  So, when the Germans received the film and left, Cicero joined in with the British.  The Germans could not murder him with the British protection. 

 

 

The After Story 

 

Once on the Turkish streets, Cicero bolted from the British and fled (with his 100,000 pounds).  He did get away to Brazil and it looked like things turned out all right for him after all in view of the double cross by his countess girl friend.  However, a couple of fascinating developments took place to upset the whole spying operation. 

 

First, the Germans somehow were reluctant to really believe that Cicero was a true spy and that his information was good.  They didn’t trust him and continued to allow that he could be a British agent with planted false information. 

 

After the countess girlfriend fled to Switzerland (with Cicero’s money), she wrote two letters--one to the British Ambassador and the other to the German Ambassador.  She cleverly told the British that the valet was a German spy, and she informed the Germans that Cicero was a British agent. 

 

Upon reading the allied war plans to invade Normandy Beach in Western France in early June 1944 (all of which were true), the Germans immediately rejected the information as a plant (because of the actions of the British agents to send Cicero a message and to provide protection for him, and because of the letter from the countess to the German Ambassador). 

 

So the intelligence danger to the allied invasion was nullified because of the ignorance and incompetence of the Germans.  They had it all laid out, but they were too stupid to realize how they had been deceived. 

 

As far as Cicero, he did escape to Rio with his 100,000 pounds.  But once there, he was arrested by the Brazilian police because his money was counterfeit.  But there was one last laugh for Cicero.  When he was arrested, he learned that the same counterfeit money had been passed in Switzerland, which meant that the countess was also in trouble. 

 

 

German Gas Chambers? 

 

In Jun 2002, Dr Ernst von Busekist attended a sumptuous dinner in the dining hall of the Deutshe Bank in Dusseldorf, Germany with seventy elite guests (Jan 20, 2003, “American Free Press,” p. 2).  Dr Busekist was a former Wehrmacht officer who served at Auschwitz. 

 

The doctor said:  “I served for five years at Auschwitz Concentration Camp, commanding the ack-ack batteries protecting the ammunition manufacturing complex there against raiding aircraft.” 

 

He added that he had never seen any gas chambers, gassed victims or anything out of the ordinary there during his security inspections.  He noted that the Wehrmacht detachment, as well as the detainees, often used the camp’s swimming pool; and like prisoners, he paid for items at the camp’s store with concentration camp money. 

 

Paul Spiegel, president of the Central Council of Jews in Germany, was present and overheard the remarks.  The doctor was brought before a German court and fined 18,046 EUROs (about $18,000) for making the statement that he did. 

 

Despite the words and eye-witness accounts of multitudes of people like von Busekist, the world has been taught that the Germans operated gas chambers to kill innocent people in WWII. 

 

 

More on the Deception Problem in the World 

 

Preceding chapters herein have already broached and/or described some of the historic mysteries and deceptions which have already plagued man for the last 6,000 years.  Subsequent chapters will further assess these past or historic deceptions and frauds and codify some of them into one presentation.  There is no intent presently to address this past history. 

 

Therefore, the focus in this chapter and the next one will address the future prophetic aspects of mystery and deception--as best as this writer can ascertain from the Scriptural prophecies. 

 

 

Matthew 24 

 

Matthew 24 is YESHUA’s special focus upon the age end environment to precede His return.  The essence of this presentation involves the election and the very elect.  In other words, Matthew 24 is YESHUA’s specific warnings to the election generally and to the very elect particularly. 

 

The first important text dealing with a coming deception occurs in Matthew 24:4 where The MESSIAH specifically issues a warning to His followers to take heed that no man deceive them.  In other words, it would be very possible for them to be deceived.  So they would have to be on guard. 

 

 

Matthew 24:5 

 

After issuing the above cited general warning, The ANOINTED ONE next proceeded to note that many would come in His name and acknowledge that He was/is Ha MASHIACH (or in terms of the fraudulent Greek text fostered upon man, many would say that He was Lord Chrishna). 

 

For sure, this text in a Hebrew original would specify The MESSIAH, while the Greek presentation used by Christendom would communicate Chrishna.  Thus, this text could be taken either way. 

 

But there can be no disputing the reality that in the Greek vein, Christianity has come upon the world scene and precisely fulfilled the Greek presentation--in claiming that YESHUA was Chrishna.  We have had 2,000 years of this false teaching, as will be outlined in the following chapters herein on Christian Church history. 

 

 

Matthew 24:11

 

Next, in sequence, YESHUA reported that many false prophets would arrive on the scene and deceive many.  And again, that’s been the real world out there for the last 2,000 years and especially in the vein of Christianity. 

 

However, the evidence is massive that this text, in conjunction with Revelation 13 (which will be discussed below), really is devoted to the particularly bad situation with false prophets here in the age end.  Truly, we have and will face a number of these frauds in the climatic end of this age. 

 

 

Matthew 24:24

 

Not only did the MESSIAH promise the coming of these false prophets, but He went on to declare that they would work great signs and wonders so that if it was possible, they would deceive the very elect (Matt 24:24).  Surely, this text does tie into Revelation 13, as just noted above and to be discussed below. 

 

And as pointed out above, these coming frauds will be so good and so deceptive that, if it were possible, they could deceive the very elect.  In other words, they could deceive people like Shaul the apostle, Kefa and Yohanan. 

 

 

II Thes 2:7-12 

 

In terms of the age end, and especially in the context of the mass quantity of people on earth, The MOST HIGH has stated that He will send upon them a strong delusion so that they should believe the lie (II Thes 2:7-12). 

 

As a minimum, there will be great deception with this strong delusion that allows people to believe the lie, as will be addressed in the following chapter which will address this theme in the context of perhaps the greatest act of deception of all. 

 

 

Rev 13:11-18 

 

If there is one Scriptural message where it all comes together, it is Revelation 13:11-18 which focuses upon the coming two horned beast.  This two horned beast is called the false prophet in Revelation 19:20.  Manifestly, this false prophet has misled and deceived people for 2,000 years.  Assuredly, he is the pope.  His work of deception will be addressed in chapters to follow. 

 

 

Rev 20:8-10

 

The final act of deception will occur in the age end when Satan gathers the armies of the world for one final assault upon Jerusalem in the notorious Gog and Magog conflict--which actually does not take place until after YESHUA returns. 

 

Amazingly, Satan will seduce and deceive all of the nations so profoundly that they will look upon the returning YESHUA as an alien invader of evil of some sort.  Accordingly, Satan will be able to muster all the armies of the world to fight KING YESHUA.  What an extraordinary act of deception this thing will be. 

 

 

Other Scriptures 

 

In both the OT and NT, there are a huge number of references to deception and using several different Greek and Hebrew words.  In the Tanakh, much of this material is in the writings, but there are a number of prophetic remarks in the prophets.  Perhaps some of the most penetrating texts for the age ending House of Yisrael was written by Hosea in his condemnation of Ephraim Yisrael. 

 

In Hosea 7:15-16, the prophet echoes YHWH’s indictment against Ephraim Yisrael for his evil and that the Israelites are a “deceitful bow.”  “Soncino Books of the Bible” (Hosea, p. 28) gives this deceitful bow as one “which fails to shoot the arrow at the target.  In like manner, they do not achieve their objective in their political moves.” 

 

Hosea 11:12 notes the lies and deceit of Ephraim Yisrael.  Here, “Soncino” (Hosea, p. 44-45) has it that even “in  the womb, Jacob was a ‘supplanter’ and his descendants were like traders waxing rich on ill-gotten gains.  The bitter destiny which awaits them has been fully earned by them.”  Manifestly, Ephraim Yisrael is greatly evil and will justly earn and deserve the punishment coming upon itself. 

 

And finally, Hosea 12:7 says that Yisrael’s ideals have sunken to the level of the evil Canaanites and that the balances of deceit are in Yisrael’s hand and that Yisrael likes to oppress and defraud.  Oh, how powerful are these words in the condemnation of the age ending House of Yisrael. 

 

 

The Conclusion From the Book

 

The Scriptural evidence is massive that the age end will see an extraordinary surfacing of lies and deception--which, if possible, would be so good and professional in presentation and accomplishment that the very elect could be deceived.  Yes, people like Shaul the Apostle or Kefa could almost be taken in by these lies and deception. 

 

Manifestly, these lies were future in the Apostolic Assembly days.  While they may have seen some ante-typical fulfillments over the last 2,000 years (which will be assessed in later chapters on historic deceptions), the great typical fulfillments are still future here in the early 21st century. 

 

As a minimum, the people of YESHUA need to pull their heads out of the sand and start looking around.  The follower of YHWH YESHUA must be on the alert to enormous coming deception and great lies.  While the gullible goyim public may be too thick headed to ever realize how much they are being lied to, the student of truth should have enough brains to avoid the deception trap. 

 

 

Government Lies via Propaganda 

 

In one of the recent talk shows heard by this writer (in late Feb 2003), one of the callers noted that the host and the controlled media had accused Saddam Hussein of telling lies.  The caller went on to note that George W. Bush also tells lies and actually tells lies about Saddam--the caller gave a couple of examples of Bush lies to deceive the people. 

 

As pointed out, elsewhere herein, most of these radio talk shows are very pro Bush and pro Republican, in difference to the primary media which is very liberal and leftist in support of the liberal Democrats.  But the thing to note about both the nationally controlled media and the so-called conservative radio talk shows is that both of these sources march to the tune piped by the ruling plutocrats. 

 

Like Carroll Quigley observed, some forty years ago (as discussed in a former chapter), the two major American political parties (the Democrats and the Republicans) were designed and controlled to actually pipe the same tune.  There was to be no major differences between the two.   The few cosmetic differences (which really don’t amount to much of anything) would be allowed to fool the dumb goyim. 

 

Anyway, in response to the lies told by Bush about Saddam and Iraq, which the talk show caller told the host, the host replied that everybody spreads out his propaganda (obviously to deceive).  In other words, when penned to the wall that Bush is as much of a liar as Saddam (and perhaps even a greater liar), the pro Bush show host could only justify the Bush lies with-- “well everybody does it.” 

 

Does everyone in politics tell lies?  Well yes, generally.  Are there any exceptions?  This writer is unacquainted with any exceptions, but there may be some few out there from time to time.  However, in the vein of the different leaders and the lies they tell, some persons are greater liars than other persons. 

 

Frankly, the evidence is massive that Slick Clinton was one of the greatest liars of all history.  And George W. Bush is not too far behind Slick or the other master liar Franklin Delano Roosevelt.  For sure, Slick, Roosevelt (also known as Rosenfeld), George H. W. Bush and George W. Bush were all profoundly bigger liars than Saddam Hussein. 

 

 

A Yiddish Proverb 

 

There is an old Yiddish proverb which needs quoting here in terms of a summary of the problem of deception.  It arises in the reality that one cannot always decide what is in a cup by its appearance only.  Sometimes, one must not only look into the cup but one must taste the cup to determine exactly what is in the cup (Feb 2003 “Yavoh He is Coming,” p. 3). 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 505--The Greatest Future Deception of All

 

 

References on the Coming Greatest Hoax of All 

 

While there have already been a huge number of very profound and extraordinary deceptions and frauds perpetuated upon collective man historically (as allowed in former commentary and/or will be addressed in later chapters), and while the several future hoaxes listed or discussed in the preceding chapter are fantastic and will surely arrive on stage to mislead and fool the bulk of so-called humanity, they all perhaps pale into some insignificance when compared with still one more incredible, almost unbelievable, fraud that will be imposed upon man as the age end further unfolds. 

 

Yes, the Book emphatically declares a coming great deception which will be the most fantastic and unbelievable one of all.  Surely, it will fool the bulk of so-called humanity here in the age end.  It will be extraordinary and overshadow all other past or future instances of deception.  While it has received some comment from time to time heretofore, this chapter will assess it more carefully. 

 

YHWH YESHUA particularly mentioned it in the context that false messiahs and false prophets would arise in the termination period and work great signs and wonders so that if it was possible, they would deceive the very elect, as cited in the preceding chapter (Matt 24:24). 

 

Something that profound and exceptional, which is on the borderline to deceive and delude the very elect, has to be most unusual.  Truly, it will be a great deception of enormous proportions. 

 

Another powerful text on this theme was written by the Apostle Shaul.  He noted the incredible presence of great deceivableness and unrighteousness in the collective people, who loved not the truth, but (in context) chose to follow the mystery of iniquity (lawlessness or anti-Torah, as also elaborated upon in prior chapters). 

 

For this vast multitude of the world’s people engrossed into this spirit of lawlessness, The ELOHIM declares that He will send upon them a strong delusion so that they should believe the lie (II Thes 2:7-12); obviously, the great deception promised by YESHUA in Mattityahu’s writings (as quoted in the preceding commentary). 

 

The alternative here is a blessing for those who will believe the truth (II Thes 2:13).  This alternative assuredly addresses the very elect of Philadelphia. 

 

 

The Coming Satan 

 

Actually, there is a third, marvelous, Scriptural reference outlining this coming great deception.  The Apostle Yohanan recorded it in the book of Revelation by describing the release of Satan from his present imprisonment to go out and deceive the nations, in his person and flesh (however that is to be defined), as he has done so in past ages (Rev 20:1-7). 

 

This outline disagrees with what traditional Christianity has attempted to interpret for Revelation 20.  The problems surface with how English translators render the Greek “teleo,” which appears in the KJV as fulfilled (in Rev 20:3) and expired (in Rev 20:7) in the context of Satan being released from his pit prison at the “supposed end” of the 1,000-year millennium (Rev 9:1-11). 

 

As briefly touched upon earlier, the findings of Dr David Stern and E. T. Tennyson (in his book “Unspeakable Words,” p. 55), suggest that teleo/telos correctly can mean “to set out for a definite point or goal.”  As elsewhere observed herein, Yohanan was writing about the fact that Satan will be released for his final work near when the millennium is reached or set out. 

 

Also, as elaborated upon in other commentary herein, there seems no doubt about it, but Satan will come to earth in his present state of being for one last great deception upon Adam man.  The evidence is overwhelming that he will come as “Jesus Christ” and “God.”  He will be accepted, worshipped and adored by collective Adam man, as well as all of so-called humanity in general. 

 

Putting these three references together, it would seem that the essence of truth is that lawless Christianity becomes extremely popular as a great deception for not only the last 2,000 years, but gains momentum and particular acceptance by the masses in the age end in order to welcome and worship the coming Satan (Gee-Zeus Chrishna and Gawd). 

 

This whole thing will be quite a fantastic deception (even more than it has been for the last 2,000 years). 

 

 

How It Unfolds 

 

At this stage, it would be well to look at the event as it unfolds.  Revelation 9:1-11 seems to describe it in the context of the release of Satan the Dragon or Abaddon, and his subordinate angels from the bottomless pit, where they have been held in a form of captivity for the last 2,000 years, since Satan’s former actual habitat of planet earth. 

 

In Second Temple days and earlier, Satan, on occasion, walked around earth in his physical, material state (as he did when he, in person, came to YESHUA to tempt Him in a real, live conversation--Matt 4:1-11). 

 

He was on earth doing his prosecutorial job, until rebellion entered his heart and mind (evidently, a second time after an earlier such event at the flood, or even before the flood, and preceding the reforming of earth in Genesis 1). 

 

Satan’s last formal rebellion, in his physical state on earth, happened after the ministry of YESHUA.  The best guess is that it occurred around 70 CE when the then age (era or period) ended with YESHUA’s second return for the election of His Apostolic Assembly. 

 

This former rebellion and the decision of The SOVEREIGN to seize the rebellious Devil and his wicked angels and helpers are adequately described in the Word with an ante-typical presentation by the prophet Yeshayahu (Isa 14:12-17).  Revelation 12:1-9 gives a NT follow-up and explanation of the same event; but again, in an ante-typical presentation. 

 

What this amounts to is that Satan historically used to have access to YHWH’s throne, as well as having his domain on the surface of the earth (not only in the days of the Apostolic Assembly, noted above, but also in the days of Iyov, David and Zekharyah--Job 1:6-2:7; Ps 109:6; Zech 3:1-2). 

 

 

The Pit 

 

But in the ending of the Second Temple period, c70 CE, The HIGHEST evidently judged Satan and his evil angels (during their last attempt at outright rebellion and effort to take over the throne) and cast them into the bottomless pit here on earth to join the previous messengers which had been thrust into that prison, following the flood (II Pet 2:4; Jude 1:6; Rev 20:1-3). 

 

Please understand that this c70 CE cast down was a preparatory move of what is to still come for the Devil in the age end when he and his helpers come forth from the bottomless pit.  In other words, the messages from Isaiah, Revelation, etc, respecting Satan’s fall and recovery, will have still more fulfillment in the future. 

 

Revelation 9:1-11 describes this pit prison here on earth where Satan was cast at his last rebellion, c70 CE.  Exactly where it exists does not seem to be absolutely clear to this writer at present.  But a good estimate would be that it is underwater in the Atlantic Ocean in the Bermuda Triangle area since Satan is also identified as the watery Leviathan in the sea (Job 41:1; Ps 74:14; 104:25-26; Isa 27:1). 

 

There are reasons to believe that Satan and his henchmen are now trying to escape that watery prison.  Perhaps this is the explanation for the UFO surge, now in evidence all over earth, following the end of WWII. 

 

Is it possible that these fallen angels in this pit confinement are trying to build and perfect some type of a suitable space craft to come out of their prison to once more appear physically on planet earth, ascend into the heavens for war against The HIGHEST, and return to earth to accomplish their last great act of deception?  Have they been testing these craft for the past 50 years? 

 

In any case, they eventually are allowed out by The MOST HIGH for one final work of evil and deceit to precede the ultimate third return of YESHUA and the establishment of the millennial kingdom. 

 

Yohanan described this return in the context of the “teleo” period, immediately preceding the millennium (Rev 20:7-10), as described above.  Following this last rebellion, Satan will be cast down once more--this time to the lake of fire (Rev 20:10). 

 

 

The Present Dilemma of When 

 

There seems to be no question about what is coming.  The whole dilemma is only of determining the when and its timing factors, in order to facilitate an understanding of the great deception.  While it is possible to understand the Satanic delusion coming on man without knowing when, the knowledge of the timing constraints will help the believer to recognize the deception and better plan for it. 

 

These timing constraints have been covered in former chapters and will be detailed hereafter in later chapters and in Appendices D and E.  There is no need to attempt a repeat of this material in the present remarks. 

 

But the short of it is that the entire last seven years of time (preceding the millennium) is closely tied to the history of the Third Temple.  Its construction is outlined and dated in excruciating detail by the events associated with the Second Temple, some 2,500 years ago. 

 

Per the established dating pattern (which was detailed in preceding chapters and/or will be covered in succeeding chapters and Appendix E), this construction starts probably by Yechezkel’s 30th year (while the Russians and their Third World and Islamic allies have the US and White British Commonwealth under pressure). 

 

 

The Third Temple 

 

The timing in Ezekiel, Haggai, Zechariah, Ezra, Nehemiah, etc (and Maccabees to a certain extent) seem to thoroughly date all of the primary events associated with the Third Temple. 

 

Please note that one of the most extraordinary events associated with the Third Temple will be when the sun worshipping Christians, condemned in Ezekiel 8-9, commence their work of evil against the workers at the Temple site, possibly in Yechezkel’s 30th-33d years (paralleling the acts of the evil Samaritans of some 2,500 years ago).  This eventuality has been discussed in a former chapter herein. 

 

In any case, the life of the Third Temple covers a period of approximately seven years.  It will be built upon the basis of an agreement or covenant between the Jews and other nations (including the Arabs and the Beast power).  In the midst of the seven-year pact, the Beast army invades Jerusalem and breaks the covenant and ultimately murders the final two witnesses. 

 

Just before this invasion, the stage is set for the release of the Devil and his demons from their watery grave--perhaps in the first Scriptural month of Yechezkel’s 34th year. 

 

The demons come onto earth to fulfill the real fifth trumpet.  Satan and his demonic army make a move into the heavens where they are defeated by YESHUA and cast back to the earth.  Satan arrives as Gee-Zeus Chrishna in his UFO.  He then enters the Third Temple to sit in it as Gawd (II Thes 2:3-4). 

 

Either at the beginning of his work of evil or at the end (of the last three and a half years of this age), Satan and his angels will unleash a 150-day period of demonic torment (probably just after Satan leaves the Temple to prepare the kings of the earth to attack the returned YESHUA). 

 

The above scenario, in conjunction with Appendices D and E, is interesting in that not only is it possible to use the Scriptures to authenticate the beginning of trouble upon America (possibly in Yechezkel’s 30th year), but it is fascinating that world events, a pending economic collapse and continuing possibilities of domestic terrorism are all building rapidly to a crisis stage, starting possibly very soon. 

 

 

Some Christian Awareness 

 

An amazing thing about this process is that numbers of sun worshipping, evil, pagan Christians and their leaders, especially in the more fundamentalist sects, are beginning to sit up and take “some” notice of the seriousness of the times we live in (and particularly, in 1999, over Y2K). 

 

With all of their evil, rebellion and wickedness (the mystery of iniquity), one has to wonder how or why is it that The ELOHIM has allowed such wretched sun worshippers to see anything.  But it appears that some of them (clearly a minority) are beginning to show some concern and awareness of the coming trouble. 

 

These amazing beliefs, in the context of the current mental thinking, were brought out in a poll of Americans (obviously, most were Christians) as reported in the Nov 1, 1999, “Newsweek” magazine in two stories. 

 

The first story by Kenneth L. Woodward (“The Way The World Ends,” p. 67), said that 40% of US adults expected the world to end as predicted in a battle at Armageddon between the Christian Gee-Zeus and the so-called Antichrist.  Some 19% of Americans and nearly all persons believing in prophecy believe that this “Antichrist” is now alive and present on earth. 

 

In a report on “Millennium Madness” (p. 71), by John Leland and formerly quoted herein, some 18% of those polled said that they expect this Gee-Zeus to return to earth in their lifetimes.  And as previously cited, some 68% expect to go to heaven. 

 

 

But Something is Wrong 

 

Manifestly something is profoundly wrong in a comparison with these beliefs and what one finds in apathy and indifference among modern Christians (as well as in their deeds, works and fruits of righteousness, as compared with supposed beliefs).  Perhaps an explanation lies in the Christian anticipation of a rapture or being delivered because of a supposed belief in Gee-Zeus. 

 

Since these Christians are so incredibly rebellious and evil (in their entire, corrupt, sun worship system--religion, culture, monetary, economic, social, government, legal, justice and political affairs), one must try to ponder why and how it is that they are having the revelations which some are now experiencing. 

 

It appears that the present, sun worshipping, Christian insight into the very evident age ending problems is coming about as a part of the great deception, discussed in the above comments of this chapter. 

 

This developing Christian awareness will be assessed in some detail in a later chapter.  But for now, it must be acknowledged in the sense that it is becoming a point of notice in the historically lethargic and could care-less world of Christian confusion. 

 

Even Hollywood has gotten on the bandwagon to promote some Christian ideas about the age end.  This focus upon apocalyptic Christian films was discussed in an article by Yvonne Zipp on “In Hollywood, Christianity is now cool--and bankable,” appearing in the Jan 3-9, 2000, “Washington Times” (p. 26).  What a tragedy it is for ignorant Christians in that these films generally present much bad information. 

 

Movies and even books on religion are now becoming very popular (again, writings with much bad information).  Even Republican presidential candidate George W. Bush chose to get on the band wagon when he said in late 1999 that “Jesus Christ” was his favorite philosopher or thinker. 

 

 

A Purpose 

 

There has to be an ultimate purpose for these beginning signs of some Christian awareness of pending trouble.  This writer is convinced that this whole process is part of the Satanic delusion that is coming upon the world when Satan comes as Gee-Zeus Christos to sit in a Third Temple as “Gawd” (II Thes 2:3-4). 

 

Logically, if the Pope is to ultimately become the world’s pastor and if Christianity is to merge with all of the world’s other religions, faiths and beliefs (in the context of a Christian New Ageism, as discussed in a former chapter), there seems to be a need to authenticate modern Christianity as a legitimate religion which can support the coming Satan as “Jesus Christ” (Gee-Zeus Chrishna). 

 

At the moment, this increasing fascination within Christianity on the prospects of the “end of the world,” the ”end of the age” or something similar provides an authentication of modern Christendom (when the age ending events begin unfolding).  To the extent that “some” contemporary, Christian Americans and others are at least talking about a climatic age end, it is preparing the way for the coming Satanic hoax under discussion. 

 

This whole theme of Christian awareness or Christian concern for an apocalyptic age end will be addressed in the coming chapter, just mentioned.  Suffice to say, there is now some movement within Christianity to at least talk about the prospects of the age end (although Christians are unconcerned about it because of apathy and indifference). 

 

While this effort has been limited (because of Christian beliefs in a coming rapture or other deliverance which will take them out of it), it is growing and at least is receiving some discussion. 

 

 

A Fantastic Deception 

 

Hence, man will be faced with quite a fantastic deception with the coming of Satan in a prophetic role of being the Christian anticipated or expected “Jesus.”  For sure, this coming of Satan is promised in II Thessalonians 2:3-6.  The next several verses in this context (II Thes 2:7-12) then go on to outline this coming as a great deception. 

 

With the fall of the United States and the White British Commonwealth nations (as covered in previous remarks and to be outlined again in later chapters and in Appendix E), it will appear to uninformed Christians that the end is upon man in Yechezkel’s 32d-34th years and particularly so when Russia and her Islamic allies make their invasion of the Middle East and the state of Israel in an ante-type of Ezekiel 38, perhaps in Yechezkel’s 33d year. 

 

Christians will look upon this Russian invasion of the Middle East as the real Ezekiel 38-39.  It will seem to be the Christian anticipated battle of Armageddon, so talked about and addressed so often by collective Christianity over the ages. 

 

Many Christians will surely think that they are in the end time in Yechezkel’s 32d-34th years.  And very profoundly, they will cheer with joy upon the arrival of Satan (Gee-Zeus Chrishna) to commence their supposed millennium of happiness, joy and prosperity.  There will then be an enormous, ecumenical, religious world headed up by the Christian pope as the world’s pastor. 

 

Finally, and as noted earlier, most Christians and other worldly persons will look upon The ELOHIM’s two witnesses as the Beast man and False Prophet of Revelation 13.  They will be happy and pleased with the murder of the two witnesses.

 

 

Theologian Ernest Martin, Revisited 

 

While some Christian sun worship leaders have some awareness and cognizance about the age end, many do not and this is especially true of much of Catholicism and the establishment oriented, old line Protestant Churches (like the Lutherans, Anglicans, Methodists, etc). 

 

Even some non-conforming Christian leaders (like the former Dr Ernest Martin of Portland, Oregon, now deceased) seemed to be unable to grasp what all was happening. 

 

Christian theologian Dr Ernest Martin, wrote in March 1999 (“ASK Communicator,” p. 1) that the next five to ten years would be the “best years” in an economic and social sense that have ever happened in world history and that the Book’s climatic events won’t happen until after 10-15 years of prosperity. 

 

He said that the gloom and doom Christian evangelicals have had it wrong for the future because their teachings have no more to do with biblical truths than the teachings of Mickey Mouse.  Martin cited the Christian beliefs of an immortal soul, Mary being alive in heaven right now and the long haired look of “Jesus” as proof that their doctrines are bad. 

 

While it is true that evangelical Christians have at least some of the problems Martin cited, they have had far more in common with Martin himself.  Martin was a Christian and shared most of the same, pagan, Christian doctrines and teachings that the fundamentalists and evangelicals possessed. 

 

 

The Bottom Line 

 

Assuredly, one has to wonder how it is possible that any Christians could have anything right in terms of prophetic interpretation in view of their host of sins and sun worship beliefs.  It would at first seem that they all must be wrong! 

 

But apparently, a few (mainly fundamentalists) have been allowed to have some perception of the coming trouble--perhaps for reasons cited above in a view of authenticating Christianity in the age end as a part of the great deception coming upon man. 

 

For sure, someone will be identified as a false prophet in the immediate future.  Will it be people like the former Ernest Martin or some of the other fundamentalists?